Sei sulla pagina 1di 496

PADS Schematic Design Reference

Manual

Release PADS VX.2.1

2007-2016 Mentor Graphics Corporation


All rights reserved.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Mentor Graphics Corporation. The original recipient of this
document may duplicate this document in whole or in part for internal business purposes only, provided that this entire
notice appears in all copies. In duplicating any part of this document, the recipient agrees to make every reasonable
effort to prevent the unauthorized use and distribution of the proprietary information.
This document is for information and instruction purposes. Mentor Graphics reserves the right to make
changes in specifications and other information contained in this publication without prior notice, and the
reader should, in all cases, consult Mentor Graphics to determine whether any changes have been
made.

The terms and conditions governing the sale and licensing of Mentor Graphics products are set forth in
written agreements between Mentor Graphics and its customers. No representation or other affirmation
of fact contained in this publication shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to any liability of Mentor
Graphics whatsoever.

MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

MENTOR GRAPHICS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS)
ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS PUBLICATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT,
EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS: The software and documentation were developed entirely at
private expense and are commercial computer software and commercial computer software
documentation within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to
FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFARS 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure by or for the U.S.
Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in
the license agreement provided with the software, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable
mandatory federal laws.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos and service marks ("Marks") used herein are the property of
Mentor Graphics Corporation or other parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior
written consent of Mentor Graphics or the owner of the Mark, as applicable. The use herein of a third-
party Mark is not an attempt to indicate Mentor Graphics as a source of a product, but is intended to
indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A current list of Mentor Graphics
trademarks may be viewed at: www.mentor.com/trademarks.

The registered trademark Linux is used pursuant to a sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of
Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

Mentor Graphics Corporation


8005 S.W. Boeckman Road, Wilsonville, Oregon 97070-7777
Telephone: 503.685.7000
Toll-Free Telephone: 800.592.2210
Website: www.mentor.com
SupportNet: supportnet.mentor.com/

Send Feedback on Documentation: supportnet.mentor.com/doc_feedback_form


Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
User Interface - Design Entry Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
File Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 2
Support Files and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
xDX PDF Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 3
Dialog Boxes and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Add Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Add Nets With Ports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Add Pin Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Add Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Array Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Databook Tool Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Databook Tool - CL View Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 3


Table of Contents

Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202


Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Databook Tool - Query Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
xDX Archiver Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Font Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Generate Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Merge Differences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
New Library Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
New Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Open Block Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Packager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Part Lister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Paste Special Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Replace Part Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
RINF Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Scale Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Settings Dialog Box - Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Settings Dialog Box - Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Settings Dialog Box - Special Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Settings Dialog Box - Databook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

4 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Table of Contents

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317


Settings Dialog Box - Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan and Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Settings Dialog Box - Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Settings Dialog Box - Nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Settings Dialog Box - Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Settings Dialog Box - Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Designer Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Databook Data Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Settings Dialog Box - Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Simulation Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Update Other Objects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Verify Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Chapter 4
Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
icdbPartsLister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
DxArchiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
sch2pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
vdrc (Design Rule Checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 5


Table of Contents

Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Chapter 5
Property Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Visibility Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Property Name and Value Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Netlist Interpretation of Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
User-Defined Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Multiple and Duplicate Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Multiple Property Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Property Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Chapter 6
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Unnamed Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Name Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Compound Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Unique Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pin Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Chapter 7
Key Bindings and Strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Key Bindings - Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Key Bindings - PADS Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 8
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Diagnostics Tool Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
DRC Rule Notes and Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Appendix A
Supplemental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
LineSimLink - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Pin (Port) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Property Editing Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Verilog HDL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Verilog HDL Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

6 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Table of Contents

Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472


Using Parameters in Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Example VHDL Netlist Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
The QCV Netlist Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Search Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Index
Third-Party Information
End-User License Agreement

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 7


Table of Contents

8 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 1
Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities

The following describes some of the windows and utilities associated with the
PADS DX Designer interface as follows:
User Interface - Design Entry Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
File Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

User Interface - Design Entry Tool


This topic identifies PADS DX Designer windows in various configurations.
Video
PADS DX Designer UI Introduction Click to view a video demonstrating the basic user
interface capabilities.

Note
The Design Entry Tool Start Page Click to view a short video demonstrating the Start
page capabilities.

Video
Toolbar Tooltips Click to view a short video demonstrating the toolbar button tooltips.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 9


Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities
User Interface - Design Entry Tool

Figure 1-1. PADS Schematic Design Interface With Various Uitility Windows
Displayed

10 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities
File Viewer Utility

Figure 1-2. Design Entry Tool with Project Integration Window Displayed

Related Topics
User Interface Customization - xDX Designer

File Viewer Utility


The File Viewer utility allows you to view the contents of log files generated by the design entry
tool. These files are located in the project's ./LogFiles folder. Options are provided from the
pulldown menus to delete, rename, print, send, copy, find, list with or without details, and
arrange by Name, Size or Date.
The File Viewer utility is available from the File > File Viewer pulldown menu or from the
toolbar button.

Note
You cannot copy and paste sections of one File Viewer file into another File Viewer file.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 11


Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities
File Viewer Utility

The Workspace is divided into two areas: the left hand side lists the files, the right hand side
displays the text of the selected file. Figure 1-3 shows the File Viewer window with the buttons
identified with their associated menu path. The List button (see figure inset) provides a simple
list of files, whereas the Details button provides additional file information.

Figure 1-3. File Viewer Window

Many of the commands are also available from popup menus when you right-click the mouse
button.

If the right mouse button is clicked in the list of files, the popup menu displays View and
Arrange commands as shown below on the left. If a file is highlighted in the list of text files
during the right-click, the popup menu displays Print, Delete and Rename commands as shown
below on the right.

12 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities
File Viewer Utility

You can print only relevant information by highlighting the portion of text you want before
using the File > Print command. If text is not highlighted within the file, the whole file is
printed.

If you exit the application without exiting File Viewer, you will have to manually close File
Viewer.

Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 13


Design Entry Tool Interface and Utilities
File Viewer Utility

14 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 2
Support Files and Variables

The following topics provide information on some of the PADS DX Designer design entry
tools support files and variables:
Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Support File Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Borders Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DxDesigner.xml File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
xDX PDF Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Files Summary
The following table describes some of the files that the design entry tools use to control their
behavior and appearance. You can customize many of the settings stored in these files from the
design entry tool user interface, or in the files themselves.

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing


Filename Description
addins.ini Supports the configuration of custom Add-ins.
borders.ini Stores schematic border assignment settings specified from Setup >
Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory). You
specify the location of this .ini file from Setup > Settings, Project
(category), Border Symbols (field).
Related Topics:
Borders Initialization File Format on page 22
Controlling Sheet Borders - xDX Designer
busconts.ini Replaces the conts.bc file from releases prior to 2007.
Related Topic:
Bus Contents File Format on page 27

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 15


Support Files and Variables
Files Summary

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing (cont.)


Filename Description
<layout_system>.cfg Defines the attributes that are passed to the layout system. The
files configuration files also perform error checking. You can control the
level of error checking (ERROR, WARNING, or NOTE). You can
also define rules for self-correction (for example, to replace illegal
characters with legal characters).

Client.cfg This Client-Server Configuration Manager client file is located at
%WDIR%\iCDB\Client\Client.cfg.
Related Topic:
Client.cfg Configuration File in the Concurrent Design
Administrators Guide.
commontools.ini The design entry tool stores customized common menu commands
(Tools > Customize) in this file in the
\<mentor_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard directory.
Related Topic:
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box on page 187
dashtools.ini Controls custom toolbox on the Dashboard.
.dxc files Contains color definition schemes that you can load or save from
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory)
.dbb file Controls which .dbc file is loaded into DataBook.
Related Topic:
Creating a Databook Configuration File
.dbc file Connects the Databook tool to an ODBC database.
Related Topic:
Databook Tool Configuration File Format on page 29
dxpdf.ini Stores default DxPDF settings in
\<mentor_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\dxpdf.ini. Any
setting changes you make are stored in a dxpdf.ini file in your
project directory. DxPDF reads your WDIR variable and chooses
the settings in first dxpdf.ini file it finds in the path during
execution.
Related Topics:
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format - xDX
Designer
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab on page 217

16 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Files Summary

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing (cont.)


Filename Description
DxArchiver.xml Contains the settings you use when you run Tools > Archiver. The
tool also creates the file manifest.xml.
Related Topic:
Project Archive
DxDesigner.xml The primary Setup configuration file that replaced the viewdraw.ini
and draw.ini files that were used prior to Release EE2007. Contains
user preferences set from the Setup > Settings (dialog box).
Related Topic:
DxDesigner.xml File Format on page 53
DxDesigner.wsp Stored in your WDIR to record your design entry tool window
placement from your last session. There are multiple versions of this
file for each project type, such asDxDesignerNL.wsp,
DxDesignerPADS.wsp,.
To restore your session to the default window placement, delete
these files. A new file is created the next time you invoke the design
entry tool.
See also:
Saving and Restoring the Window Configuration - xDX Designer

hdlutils.ini Created from running the Tools > Simulation Setup utility or File
> Export > VHDL Netlist or File > Export Verilog Netlist. All
netlister settings are stored in this hdlutils.ini file that is created in
the project directory during creation of the VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Related Topics:
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box on page 391
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box on page 392
Launcher.cfg This Client-Server Configuration Manager file is located only on
machines that run the service/daemon in
%WDIR%\iCDB\Launcher\Launcher.cfg.
Related Topic:
Launcher.cfg Configuration File in the Concurrent Design
Administrators Guide
locmap.cfg Contains variable definitions that define soft pathnames found in
your WDIR path.
<project_dir>/ When certain tools are run from the design entry tool, resulting log
LogFiles/ <tool>.log files are stored in <project>\LogFiles\<tool>.log

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 17


Support Files and Variables
Files Summary

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing (cont.)


Filename Description
manifest.xml Lists the fileset used when you run Tools > Archiver. The file
DxArchiver.xml is also created.
Related Topic:
Project Archive
map.cfg Maps pre-v2007 design entry tool attributes to the current
equivalent property names. The tool searches for a map.cfg file in
the following locations in the following order:
1. Current project folder.
2. Each folder specified by the WDIR environment variable,
reading left-to-right.
Related Topic:
WDIR Variable Search Order
NetlistVerify.ini The Design Rule Checker (DRC) utility uses this .ini file (for Netlist
project designs) to store your projects DRC configuration settings,
such as which checks you chose to run, default values that are used,
and the message level specified (ERROR, WARNING or NOTE).
Related Topics:
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format on page 40
Verify Dialog Box on page 387
Set Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations - xDX Designer
NetlistVerifyDefaults.in The Design Rule Checker utility uses this .ini file (for Netlist
i project designs) to store initial default settings. It is stored in
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\ or %WDIR%.
Also see the description for NetlistVerify.ini.
Related Topics:
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format on page 40
Verify Dialog Box on page 387
Set Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations - xDX Designer
PathsMap.cfg This Client-Server Configuration Manager file is located at
%WDIR%\iCDB\PathsMap.cfg.

18 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Files Summary

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing (cont.)


Filename Description
<project>.prj Contains the project-specific settings and configurations that are set
from the Setup > Settings (dialog). This file is stored under your
project directory. Templates are also created as .prj files and located
in specific locations.
Related Topics:
DxDesigner.xml File Format on page 53
Project Template File
scripts.ini Lists which scripts are loaded when the design entry tool starts.
scout.ini Contains Scout configuration settings. Scout is a cross reference
utility that supports hierarchy.
Related Topic:
Sample Scout.ini File in the Cross Referencing a Design
Server.cfg This Client-Server Configuration Manager server file is located at
%WDIR%\iCDB\Server\Server.cfg.
Related Topic:
Server.cfg Configuration File in the Concurrent Design
Administrators Guide
usertools.ini The design entry tool stores customized user-specific menu
commands (Tools > Customize) in this file in either the %WDIR%
location or the project location.
Related Topic:
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box on page 187
Verify.ini The Design Rule Checker (DRC) utility uses this .ini file to store
your projects DRC configuration settings, such as which checks
you chose to run, default values that are used, and the message level
specified (ERROR, WARNING or NOTE).
Related Topics:
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format on page 40
Verify Dialog Box on page 387
Set Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 19


Support Files and Variables
Files Summary

Table 2-1. Design Entry Tool Support Files Listing (cont.)


Filename Description
VerifyDefaults.ini The Design Rule Checker utility uses this .ini file to store initial
default settings. It is stored in
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard or %WDIR%.
Also see the description for Verify.ini.
Related Topics:
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format on page 40
Verify Dialog Box on page 387
Set Up the Verify Tool to Find Rule Violations - xDX Designer

Related Topics
Read-only User-Preference Settings

20 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Support File Reference

Support File Reference


The support file reference topics describe the content of each file, and what you may or may not
edit in each file.
Borders Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Bus Contents File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Databook Tool Configuration File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DxDesigner.xml File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Part Lister Initialization File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
project.prj File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
xDX PDF Initialization File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 21


Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Borders Initialization File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools schematic border settings
The design entry tool reads the specified ASCII borders.ini file to configure the schematic
border settings. You specify the location of this .ini file from Setup > Settings, Project
(category), Border Symbols (field).
The borders.ini file stores schematic border assignment settings specified from Setup >
Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory).

Format
The file is composed of five sections as shown in bold below:

Figure 2-1. borders.ini File Content Overview

[SYMBOLS]
This section defines a border symbol for specified sheet sizes and
orientation.

Syntax Example:
Sheet=symbol_name
In the syntax example, Sheet specifies the size and orientation of the
sheet, symbol_name is name of the border symbol

Example:
A0SHEETL=Borders:a0sheet.1 (Defines the symbol for landscape oreientation)
A0SHEETP=Borders:a0sheet.2 (Defines the symbol for portrait orientation)
. . .

[ZONE A0SHEETL] (A zone exists for each configured sheet.


A0SHEETL is used as an example to match the sheets defined above.)
(See VerticalZones and HorizontalZones descriptions for content of this
section)
[ZONE A0SHEETP]
. . .
[ATTRIBUTES]
This section defines a set of properties that are attached to each border
symbol instance when a border is added or changed.

Syntax Example:
property_name1=property_value1
property_name2=property_value2

Example:
DEVELOPER=Thomas
COMPANY=ACME

22 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

[ANNOTATIONS]
This section describes the annotation format for links (from Setup >
Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory). The
definition is stored here if it differs from the default form of the
following
Example:
FORMAT=$(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)

[DEFAULTS]
This section defines default values for border properties.

Syntax Example:
property1=value1
property2=value2;value3;value4

Parameters
The following tables list the setting names and describe the editable parameter values in each
section of the borders.ini file.
Table 2-2. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section
Setting Name Setting Description
HORZLABELING Specifies whether numbers or letters are used to denote the horizontal
zones, and whether the numbers or letters are ascending or descending
as shown in the following:

GUI access:
Setup > Settings,
Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory), Horizontal Zones
(section), Letters, Numbers, and Descending (options)
HORZNUMBER Specifies the number of horizontal zones on the schematic, such as in the
following example:
HORZNUMBER=8

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category)
Borders and Zones (subcategory), Horizontal Zones (section), Number
of Zones (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 23


Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 2-2. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
OFFSETBOTTOM Specifies the bottom offset in the specified units for the horizontal zones
on the schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETBOTTOM=1270000

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.


A value of 1.27e+006 sets the offset to 12.7mm, or .5in.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory),
Horizontal Zones (section), Bottom Offset (option)
OFFSETTOP Specifies the top offset in the specified units for the horizontal zones on
the schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETTOP=1270000

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.


A value of 1.27e+006 sets the offset to 12.7mm, or .5in.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory),
Horizontal Zones (section), Top Offset (option)
VERTLABELING Specifies whether numbers or letters are used to denote the vertical
zones, and whether the numbers or letters are ascending or descending
as shown in the following:

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory),
Vertical Zones (section), Letters, Numbers, and Descending (options)
VERTNUMBER Specifies the number of vertical zones on the schematic, such as in the
following example:
VERTNUMBER=10

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory),
Vertical Zones (section), Number of Zones (option)

24 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 2-2. borders.ini - ZONE <SHEET_TYPE> Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
OFFSETLEFT Specifies the left offset in the specified units for the vertical zones on the
schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETLEFT=2540000

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.


A value of 2.54e+006 sets the offset to 25.4mm, or 1.0in.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory),
Vertical Zones (section), Left Offset (option)
OFFSETRIGHT Specifies the right offset in the specified units for the vertical zones on
the schematic such as in the following example:
OFFSETRIGHT=2540000

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.


A value of 2.54e+006 sets the offset to 25.4mm, or 1.0in.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (subcategory), Borders and Zones
(subcategory), Vertical Zones (section), Right Offset (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 25


Support Files and Variables
Borders Initialization File Format

Table 2-3. borders.ini - ANNOTATIONS Section


Setting Name Setting Description
FORMAT Specifies the appearance of cross reference links by using the cross-ref
variable as shown in the following default example:
FORMAT=$(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)-$(block)

You can also insert text in the FORMAT specification.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory),
Annotation Format for Links (option)

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones
Sheet Borders
Support Files and Variables

26 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format

Bus Contents File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer bus bundle information
PADS DX Designer reads pre-defined bus information from an ASCII busconts.ini file. You
specify the location of this .ini file from Setup > Settings, Project (category).
Format
The default busconts.ini filename replaces the conts.bc filename used in releases prior to 2007.

When PADS DX Designer loads a project, if a bus contents file for that project is specified in
the <design_name>.prj file such as the following:

SECTION DesignInfo
. . .
KEY Bus_Contents busconts.ini
. . .
ENDSECTION

the bus information contained in that file is loaded into PADS DX Designer.

Parameters
The contents of the 2007 and beyond busconts.ini file and the older conts.bc bus contents
file use similar formatting as follows:

$FORMAT_CAR Define header in pre-2007 conts.bc files.


D$ (Not used with the busconts.ini file)
nA mC (Not used with the busconts.ini file)
$END$ Terminate header in conts.bc.
(Not used with the busconts.ini file)
bus_net_name signal_name1,signal_name2,
signal_name1,signa signal_name3,signal_name4,
l_name2,

Field Description
nA The maximum size of the bus net name field.
(Not used with busconts.ini)
mC The size of the bus contents field. m is less than 64K.
(Not used with busconts.ini)
bus_net_name The value of the Net Name text property you assign to the bus.
signal_name The signal names you assign, separated by a comma. The signal
names must be separated with a comma.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 27


Support Files and Variables
Bus Contents File Format

o Each line of the contents file can have up to 10,000 characters.


o Use an ampersand (&) at the end of a line to continue a bus definition on another
line.
Note, the continuation (second) line must also have the bus_net_name at the
beginning. See the following example:
Bus1 net1,net2,&
Bus1 net3,net4

o When using signal names that contain spaces, all of the signal names must be
enclosed in double-quotes ( ). Although this is allowed, it is not a recommended
practice.
o Nested buses are not supported.
Examples
The following is an example of a busconts.ini bus contents file:

CPU_BUS ADR[0:15],DATA[0:8],CTL[0:3],&
CPU_BUS INAP[0:25],ADV[0:7]
MEM_BUS "ADR[0:10],CONTROL[10:20],NETNAME WITH SPACE"

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Creating and Editing Pre-Defined Buses - xDX Designer
Connectivity With Buses - xDX Designer

28 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Databook Tool Configuration File Format


Input for: The design entry tools Databook tool.
The configuration (.dbc) file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. Use the .dbc
file to connect the Databook tool to an ODBC database.
You can edit the file elements and subelements with a text or XML editor.

Note
Editing the .dbc file may require deleting component libraries associated with the Data
Source Name (DSN) and adding libraries back to the file.

Format
A .dbc file must conform to the following formatting restrictions:

File sections appear in a specific order (see Table 2-4 on page 30):
1. Declaration Statement
2. dbc Element
3. CObject
4. CConfigSym
5. CConfigLib
6. CConfigLibEntry
7. CConfigAtt
8. CConfigTable
9. CConfigPref
10. CConfigScripting
11. End Statement
File content is case-sensitive.
Standard XML file syntax is:

<element attribute1="value1" ... > elements' contents </element>

The XML file elements can be nested and are called subelements.

For example:

<element>

<subelement1> ... </subelement1>

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 29


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

<subelement2> ... </subelement2>

</element>

If an element statement does not contain information, it appears in shorthand notation:

<element attribute1="value1" ... />

All XML file elements need to be numbered in order of appearance in the file.

For example,

<element1><element2><element3><element3><element4><element4><element1>

<element5><element5><element1>

See the subsection in this topic for a sample of an XML file containing nested and numbered
elements.
Table 2-4. XML File Structure
File Section Example Value Description
Declaration <?xml version="1.0" The file begins with a standard
Statement encoding="UTF-8"?> XML declaration which includes a
UTF-8 encoding statement.
dbc Element <dbc version="1.0"> The dbc element is the top-level or
main element of the XML file with
version number as its attribute
(this element contains all of the
other file elements/subelements).
CObject <CObject0 overallSchema="21" CObject contains the Databook
flag="DX Databook Overlay main configuration (CConfig
Configuration File" element) and internal window data
BaseConfigurationURL=""> (CObList element).
<CConfig1>
... Note: Do not modify the
CObList element or its
</CConfig1> attributes.
<CObList128 CPersistList="0"/>
</CObject0>
CConfigSym <CConfigSym2> CConfigSym contains the list of
<CObArray3 symbols and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="0"/> CConfig.
</CConfigSym2>
Note: CConfigSym cannot be
used to store symbols.

30 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-4. XML File Structure (cont.)


File Section Example Value Description
CConfigLib <CConfigLib4> CConfigLib contains the list of
<CObArray5 libraries, and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="8"> CConfig with the following
subelements:
<CConfigLibEntry6 > ... </
CConfigLibEntry6> CObArray which has the
following subelements:
... CConfigLibEntry
</CObArray5> CConfigTableEntry
</CConfigLib4> Contains subelement
CStringList which lists all
table fields.
CConfigAtt
CConfigTable Contains the
list of tables
CConfigLibEntry <CConfigLibEntry6> CConfigLibEntry is a subelement
<CConfigAtt7 ... > ... </ of CObArray and it contains the
CConfigAtt7> DataBook library configuration.
<CConfigTable32> ... </
CConfigTable32>
</CConfigLibEntry6>
CConfigAtt <CConfigAtt7 CConfigAtt contains the list of
UseCentralLibrarySymbols="0"> properties and it is a subelement of
<CObArray8 CConfigLib (CConfigAtt has
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="2"> subelement CConfigAttEntry).
<CConfigAttEntry9> ... </
CConfigAttEntry> Note: CConfigAttEntry is also
a subelement of CObArray.
<CConfigAttEntry9> ... </
CConfigAttEntry>
</CObArray8>
<CConfigAtt7>
CConfigTable <CConfigTable32> CConfigTable contains the list of
<CObArray33 tables and it is a subelement of
CXMLTypedPtrArraySize="1"> CConfigLib (CConfigTable has
subelement CObArray).
<CConfigTableEntry34> ... </
CConfigTableEntry34>
</CObArray33>
</CconfigTable32>

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 31


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-4. XML File Structure (cont.)


File Section Example Value Description
CConfigPref <CConfigPref125 CConfigPref contains the
LoadIntoNewWindow="0" configuration file preferences and
SymbolAttributesGet-Loaded="0" it is a subelement of CConfig.
ComponentTracking="1"
AnnotateUndefinedAttributes="0"
Chan-geCompEnabled="0"
ComponentTrackingZoom="0"
MaintainAttVisibility="0"
LibraryAttEnabled="1"
LibraryAttName="DXDB_LIBNA
ME" AnnotateUndefine-
dAttributesValue=""
UseLoadTabAttribute="0"
LoadTabAttributeName="" An-
notateSelected="0"
AnnotateSelectedPrefix="ALT_*"
AnnotateRemoveAttri-butes="1"
ExcludedAttList="REFDES"/>
CConfigScripting <CConfigScripting126 CConfigScripting is a subelement
OnAddComponentEnabled="1" of CConfig and it contains
OnAnnoComponentEnabled="1" Databook scripting (automation
OnLoadComponentEnabled="1" control) information.
OnSelectComponentEnabled="1" CConfigScripting has subelement
On-ViewDocumentEnabled="1" CConfigScriptLanguage.
OnAfterAddComponentEnabled="1
" OnAfterAnnoCom-
ponentEnabled="1">
<CConfigScriptLanguage127
Filename="" type="0" pro-
gID="VBScript"/>
</CConfigScripting126>
End Statement </dbc> The file ends with the XML end
statement.

Parameters
Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes
Element/Subelement Attribute Description
CConfigAtt UseCentralLibraryS Symbol data from Central Library is used.
ymbols="0" Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).

32 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)


Element/Subelement Attribute Description
CConfigAttEntry Fieldname="ID" Name of column in ODBC data source
table.
AttName="ID" Name of property as it appears in Databook
and the design entry tool.
DefaultValue="" Value used if property not present (value
dependent on property).
ExcludeWhenAnnot Properties to exclude when back-
ating="0" annotating to PADS DX Designer. Values
are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
ExcludeWhenLoadi Properties to exclude when loading into
ng="0" Databook. Values are 0 (disabled) and 1
(enabled).
m_bNameVisible=" Property names are visible in the design
0" entry tool schematic after back-annotating.
Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
m_bValueVisible=" Property values are visible in the design
0" entry tool schematic after back-annotating.
Values are 0 (disabled) and 1 (enabled).
AttType="0" Field type. Values are 0 (Normal), 1
(Symbol), 2 (Document), 3 (Unused), 4
(Unique ID).
ValueType="0" Type of value. Values are 0 (Undefined), 1
(String), 2 (Numeric), 3 (Numeric_Int), 4
(Numeric_Float), 5 (Numeric_Double).
MagType="0" Numeric property values displayed in
Databook. Values are 0 (Unknown), 1
(Atto), 2 (Femto), 3 (Pico), 4 (Nano), 5
(Micro), 6 (Milli), 7 (Unity), 8 (Kilo), 9
(Mega), 10 (Giga), 11 (Tera), 12 (Auto), 13
(Percent).
UnitsString="" Unit suffix annotated to symbols. Values
are expressed as a string (for example,
mm or in).
AddAsOat="0" For internal use only.
Required="0" Properties that are required. Values are 0
and 1 (property is required and included).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 33


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)


Element/Subelement Attribute Description
ValidMag="2047" Valid magnitude for selected property.
Value is the number, which is interpreted
as a binary mask that enables values
described in MagType (each MagType
value is interpreted as one bit).
ValidMagDir="63" For internal use only.
FutureUseBool1="0 For internal use only.
",
FutureUseBool2="0
",
FutureUseStr1="",
FutureUseStr2=""
MatchCondition="- SQL database language relation used for
" matching.
=: exact match. For example, entering a
value of 50, only results in a match of 50.
Like: matches a character pattern using
wildcards. For example, entering a value of
*50, results in matches of ALS150, DP50,
and so on. Entering a value of *50*, results
in matches of ALS0500, ALS0505_sp, and
so on.
Note: Only applicable if Databook is
used by Variant Manager.
AttrUnplace="0" Property placement. Values are 0 (Name),
1 (Value), 2 (NameAndValue), 3 (Hide), 4
(Delete), 5 (None).
SerialKey="0" For internal use only.
CConfigLibEntry LibraryName="nam Library name.
e"
JoinTable="false" Tables linked to provide access to
component properties that reside in
multiple tables. Values are true or
false.
Locked="0" For internal use only.
SymbolExpression= Symbol expression used to find a valid
"" symbol.

34 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)


Element/Subelement Attribute Description
JoinType="0" Tables linked vertically or horizontally.
Values are 0 (vertical join) or 1 (horizontal
join).
HorizJoinType="0" Records from tables combined if values of
joined fields meet specified criteria (inner
join) or records included even if related
records are not in joined tables (left outer).
Values are 0 (inner) or 1 (left outer).
CConfigPref LoadIntoNewWind New window is created when components
ow="0" loaded. Values are 0 (window not created)
or 1.
SymbolAttributesG Symbol properties loaded along with
etLoaded="0" component properties. Values are 0
(properties not loaded) or 1.
ComponentTrackin Automatic selection of component in the
g="0" design entry tool when selected in Search/
Verify windows. Values are 0 (component
not selected) or 1.
AnnotateUndefined Values matching undefined value are
Attributes="0" annotated. Values are 0 (values not
annotated) or 1.
ChangeCompEnabl New symbol can be overwritten when
ed="0" annotating to a component. Values are 0
(symbol not overwritten) or 1.
ComponentTrackin Zoom To Fit is performed on selection.
gZoom="0" Values are 0 (Zoom To Fit not performed)
or 1.
MaintainAttVisibilit Properties change their visibility when
y="0" annotated. Values are 0 (visibility not
changed) or 1.
LibraryAttEnabled= Special library property is annotated.
"0" Values are 0 (property not annotated) or 1.
LibraryAttName=" Name of the property which holds the
DXDB_LIBNAME library name (for example,
" DXDB_LIBNAME).
AnnotateUndefined String to match values (if a value matches,
AttributesValue="" it is not annotated).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 35


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)


Element/Subelement Attribute Description
UseLoadTabAttribu Load tabs in the Databook Search window
te="0" use LoadTabAttributeName. Values are
0 or 1 (load tabs use
LoadTabAttributeName).
AnnotateSelected=" Annotate properties to selected
0" components. Values are 0 (not enabled) or
1.
AnnotateSelectedPr AnnotateSelectedPrefix used in
efix="ALT_*" conjunction with AnnotateSelected
attribute.
AnnotateRemoveAt Properties without values are removed
tributes="0" during annotation. Values are 0 (properties
not removed) or 1.
ExcludedAttList="R Comma-separated list of properties to be
EFDES" excluded when loading (for example, Ref
Designator).
CConfigScripting OnAddComponentE OnAddComponentEnabled automation
nabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnAnnoComponent OnAnnoComponentEnabled automation
Enabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnLoadComponent OnLoadComponentEnabled automation
Enabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnSelectComponen OnSelectComponentEnabled automation
tEnabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnViewDocumentE OnViewDocumentEnabled automation
nabled="1" callback is enabled. Values are 0 or 1
(enabled).
OnAfterAddCompo OnAfterAddComponentEnabled
nentEnabled="1" automation callback is enabled. Values are
0 or 1 (enabled).
OnAfterAnnoComp OnAfterAnnoComponentEnabled
onentEnabled="1" automation callback is enabled. Values are
0 or 1 (enabled).
CConfigScriptLanguage Filename="" Script filename.

36 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Table 2-5. Element/Subelement Attributes (cont.)


Element/Subelement Attribute Description
type="0" Script programming language. Values are
0 (VBScript), 1 (JScript), 2 (User-
Defined).
progID="VBScript" User-defined programming language
name.
CConfigTableEntry Assembly="ODBC; Data source configuration file.
ALIAS=SampleLib;
CNS={ODBC;DSN
=SampleLib};DDS
={Microsoft Access
Driver (*.mdb)};"
TableName="Capac Database table name (for example,
itors" Capacitors).
CObArray CXMLTypedPtrArr Value is number of libraries listed in
aySize CObArrayElement.
CStringList ListSize="1" Number of fields stored in properties.
Value is number of fields (decimal format).
ListItem0="ID" Lists of different types in .dbc file format.
Values are dependent on list type used.
dbc overallSchema="21 Internal version number.
"
flag="xDX File type with
Databook Base
Configuration File" "xDX Databook Overlay Configuration
File"

or

"xDX Databook Overlay Configuration


File" BaseConfigurationURL="">

values.

Note: For flag="xDX Databook Base


Configuration File", the value is the
.dbb file (see Databook to Data Sources
Connections for more information).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 37


Support Files and Variables
Databook Tool Configuration File Format

Examples
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<dbc version="1.0">
<CObject0>
<CConfig1>
<CConfigSym2>
<CObArray3/>
</CConfigSym2>
</CConfig1>
<CObList4/>
</CObject0>
</dbc>

Related Topics
Databook Configuration File Overview

38 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)


The design entry tool Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool uses the VerifyDefaults.ini file to
configure the checker.
The file description is broken into the following topics:

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40


DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 39


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The design entry tool reads one or more ASCII VerifyDefaults.ini files along your WDIR path
to configure the design entry tools Verify tool settings. A Verify.ini file located in the project
folder stores your local settings. The settings stored in the local Verifiy.ini file take precedence
over those stored in the VerifyDefaults.ini file.
For more information on why the design entry tool uses more than one copy of this file and how
the design entry tool accesses them, see DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order on
page 455.

You can modify a .ini file to set up your own DRC Verify tool default settings to do the
following:

Change the default settings on the Settings pane


Do the following on any of the Rules panes:
o Change the default value for a particular Rule check
o Change the rule check visibility
o Add your own groups and assign certain Rule checks to them
o Choose which check(s) you want to appear under each group
Format
The VerifyDefaults.ini file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. The content is
divided into major sections as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2. VerifyDefaults.ini File Section Structure

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<VDRC>
<FlowType Name="<name>" />
<!--In NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini, Name=Netlist -->
<Checks>
<!-- See DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 48 -->
</Checks>
<Defines>
<!-- See DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 46 -
->
</Defines>
<GUI>
<!-- See DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 42-->
</GUI>
</VDRC>

40 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

The following topics describe the sections of code in a VerifyDefaults.ini file to help you relate
the file contents to the DRC dialog box panes:

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 42


DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 46
DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 48
DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File on page 50

Note
The NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini and VerifyDefaults.ini are similar. Values may vary
slightly for some checks.

Warning
Incorrect XML syntax in a VerifyDefaults.ini file could cause the design entry tool to
hang when starting Tools > Verify.

Parameters
None.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 41


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Defines Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools Design Rule Checker (DRC)
The <Defines> section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file defines Option Names and corresponding
Values that the DRC uses for certain rules checks.
Format
Figure 2-3 shows the VerifyDefaults.ini file <Defines> section with added comments to indicate
which DRC checks use each option:

Figure 2-3. DRC VerifyDefaults.ini File - Defines Section Listing

<Defines>
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="AGND CGND GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<!-- ground_nets is used by checks:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204) PowerValueCheck (drc-
205) NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="power_nets"

Value="VCC +5V +18V +2.5V* -2.5V* +3.3V"/>


<!-- power_nets is used by checks:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510) PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603) OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="units"

42 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Value="Atto:a Femto:f Pico:p Nano:n Micro:u


Milli:m Kilo:k Mega:M Giga:G Tera:T" />
<!-- units is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply Pin" />
<!-- supply_pin is used by checks:
SupNegConnected (drc-505)
SupNotConnected (drc-506)
SupWrongConnected (drc-507) -->
<Option Name="drc_power" Value="DRC Power" />
<!-- drc_power is used by checks:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="drc_value" Value="Value" />
<!-- drc_value is used by check:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)-->
<Option Name="drc_tolerance" Value="DRC Tolerance" />
<!-- drc_value is used by check:
N/A -->

<Option Name="drc_negative" Value="DRC Negative" />


<!-- drc_negative is used by checks:
PowerValueCheck (drc-205)
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204) -->
<Option Name="drc_positive" Value="DRC Positive" />
<!-- drc_positive is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203)
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204)
PowerValueCheck (drc-205) -->
<Option Name="drc_voltage" Value="DRC Voltage" />
<!-- drc_voltage is used by checks:
VoltageValueCheck (drc-204) -->
<Option Name="drc_ic" Value="DRC IC" />
<!-- drc_ic is used by checks:
VoltageDropCheck (drc-203) --> <Option Name="drc_power_factor"
Value="DRC Power" /> <!-- drc_power_factor is used by checks:
N/A) -->
<Option Name="drc_vrrm" Value="DRC VRRM />
<!-- drc_vrrm is used by checks:
N/A) -->
<Option Name="vhdl_file" Value="VHDL File" />
<!-- vhdl_file is used by check:
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="verilog_file" Value="Verilog File" />
<!-- verilog_file is used by check:
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 43


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

<Option Name="vhdl_type" Value="VHDL Type" />


<!-- vhdl_type is used by checks:
VhdlReservedKeyword (drc-701)
VhdlDataTypeMismatch (drc-703) -->
<Option Name="verilog_type" Value="Verilog Type" />
<!-- verilog_type is used by check:
VerilogReservedKeyword (drc-702) -->
<Option Name="vhdl_model" Value="VHDL Model" />
<!-- vhdl_model is used by check:
VhdlReservedKeyword (drc-701)
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="verilog_model" Value="Verilog Model" />
<!-- verilog_model is used by check:
VerilogReservedKeyword (drc-702)
VhdlModelAvailability (drc-705) -->
<Option Name="global_signal" Value="Global Signal Name" />
<!-- global_signal is used by check:
GlobalSignals (drc-504) -->
<Option Name="supply_net" Value="Power Supply Net" />
<!-- supply_net is used by check:
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511)
BusTranscPin (drc-603)
OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->
<Option Name="pin_type" Value="Pin Type" />
<!-- pin_type is used by check:
ConOUTBI (drc-101)
ConOUTTRI (drc-102)
FanIn (drc-103)
FanOut (drc-104)
UnconnectedPins (drc-107)
UndrivenCompPins (drc-111)
InputsConnectedToConnector (drc-112)
InputsConnectedToInputs (drc-113)
DipoleToInput (drc-114)
DipoleToBidirectional (drc-115)
OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116)
OutputSameComp (drc-117)
InputSameComp (drc-118)
OclVDD (drc-201) OemGND (drc-202)
TristatePinConnect (drc-206)
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
PowerGroundPinConnection (drc-511) -->
<Option Name="ground" Value="GROUND" />
<!-- ground is used by check:
NumberConnDevice (drc-510)
<Option Name="power" Value="POWER" />
<!-- power is used by check:
NumberConnDevice (drc-510) -->
<Option Name="part_number" Value="Part Number" />
<!-- part_number is used by check: ImplicitPowerConnected (drc-
508) -->
<Option Name="resistors" Value="*res*.*" />
<!-- resistors is used by check:
OutputSameComp (drc-117)
InputSameComp (drc-118)
ICDevice (drc-601)

44 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

OpAmpConnPower (drc-604) -->


<Option Name="serials" Value="" />
<!-- serials is used by check:
N/A) -->

<Option Name="net_class" Value="DRC_NCLS" />


<!-- net_class is used by check: NetClass (drc-125) -->
<Option Name="net_check" Value="DRC_NCHK" />
<!-- net_check is used by check: NetClass (drc-125) -->
<Option Name="net_class_default" Value="5V_TECH" />
<!-- net_class_default is used by check: NetClass (drc-125) -->
</Defines>

Parameters
For example, OutputDirectlyPG (drc-116) passes the Values specified in the following
ground_nets and power_nets definition in the .ini file <Defines> section to the DRC:
<Option Name="ground_nets" Value="GND +0V* E FG AG E0V* G0V*
A0V*"/>
<Option Name="power_nets" Value="VCC +2.5V* -2.5V*"/>

You can use other Option Name definitions to indicate to certain rules checks which
schematic objects the DRC should evaluate. This type of option specifies a user-defined
value that corresponds to a property name on a schematic object. For example, the following
supply_pin definition specifies a value of DRC Supply Pin.
<Option Name="supply_pin" Value="DRC Supply Pin" />

If you define a DRC Supply Pin property in your design and place the property on a net,
the checks SupNegConnected (drc-505), SupNotConnected (drc-506), and
SupWrongConnected (drc-507), if selected, evaluate that net.
Note
You or an administrator can modify the Values in the .ini <Defines> section to suit
each site. For example, you can change the Value in the supply_pin definition from
DRC Supply Pin to Supply Pin Check. You can then create a property named
Supply Pin Check and place it on a schematic object(s). However, you must not
modify the Option Name supply_pin.

Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box
DRC Rule Notes and Examples
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 45


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The <Settings> section of the .ini file relates to the various settings on the Verify tool Settings
pane, which specifies the scope of the DRC operation.
Format
Figure 2-4 uses numbered designators to cross-reference the .ini file code to the Settings pane.

Figure 2-4. DRC Verify Tool Settings Pane - Settings Section as it Relates to UI

46 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 47


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Checks Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool
The <Checks> section of the .ini file contains the definition of each numbered check.
Format
Figure 2-5 uses the following numbered designators to cross-reference the .ini file code to the
Rules pane.

1. ID Specifies an ID number.
2. State Presets the checkbox as either Enabled (checked) or Disabled (unchecked).
3. Severity Presets the Severity level as either Note, Warning, or Error.
4. GUI Defines the Rule title that appears on the GUI.
5. Description Text defined here appears at the bottom of the dialog box when a check
is selected.
6. Option text Defines the Option title that appears on the GUI.
7. Option Value Preset the value(s) in the Values column, or leave this out of the Check
Name definition if there are no values.
8. Option GuiObject (edit) If set to edit, an edit box appears when you click on the
value.
9. Option Value In Figure 2-5, this option value is the default setting for one of the
choices provided.
10. Option GuiObject (combobox) If set to combobox, a pulldown list is available to
set the value.

48 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Figure 2-5. Verify Tool Rules Pane - Defaults File Checks Section as it Relates
to UI

Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 49


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

DRC Rules Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools Design Rule Checker (DRC)
The <Rules> section specifies which groups appear in the Rules list, and which checks are
associated with each group.
Format
Figure 2-6 shows the <Rules> section of the .ini file. Figure 2-6 also shows a portion of the
Checks section so you can see how the <Rules> section references a Check Name. In this
example, the PropertyUnsupported Check Name is the first entry in Migration. The
description that follows the figure uses the numbered designators as reference.

50 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

Figure 2-6. DRC Rules Pane - Defaults File Rules Section as it Relates to UI

The following items explain the .ini file sections shown in Figure 2-6:

1. The <Rules> section of the .ini file define the group name(s). This example defines the
first group as Migration.
2. Migration group checks reference Check Names, as defined in the <Checks> section.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 51


Support Files and Variables
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults)

3. If you include the string State=Enabled in the Rules section, it overrides the State
declaration in the Checks section of the .ini file for a given check. This example shows
the PropertyUnsupported check disabled in the Checks section, yet it is enabled in the
Rules section. As seen in the UI (Figure 2-6), this check is enabled.
4. The second group specified in the Rules section is titled Connectivity.
Parameters
None.
Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

52 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

DxDesigner.xml File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer design entry tools user interface configuration settings
The design entry tool reads one or more ASCII DxDesigner.xml files along your WDIR path to
configure the design entry tool session settings.
For more information on how design entry tool accesses multiple DxDesigner.xml files along
your WDIR path, see DxDesigner.xml File Precedence Order.

Format
The DxDesigner.xml file is an ASCII file that uses standard XML formatting. The file content is
divided into major sections as shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7. DxDesigner.xml File Section Structure

<?xml version="1.0" ?>


<DxDesigner_Configuration_file version="1.2" name="DxDesigner.xml">
<DxDesigner>
<OBJECTS> <!--See Table 2-6 on page 54--> </OBJECTS>
<LAYERS> <!--See Table 2-7 on page 57--> </LAYERS>
<ICTOBJECTS> <!--See Table 2-8 on page 59--> </ICTOBJECTS>
<SETTINGS> <!--See Table 2-9 on page 60--> </SETTINGS>
<SIZES> <!--See Table 2-10 on page 136--></SIZES>
<COLORS> <!--See Design Entry Tool COLORS Element on page 463--> </
COLORS>
. . .
</DxDesigner>
<DxDatabook>
<SETTINGS> <!--See Table 2-11 on page 139--> </SETTINGS>
</DxDatabook>
</DxDesigner_Configuration_file>

The lines that define configuration settings in the DxDesigner.xml file have the following
format:

<key name="setting_name" value="setting" />

Note
You should only change the setting value.

If the readonly=1 option has been applied to an object or key name in the DxDesigner.xml
file, such as <object name=NET readonly=1/> or
<key name=VISIBLE value=1 readonly=1/>, the associated setting cannot be changed
in the Setup > Settings dialog box. All objects allow the readonly=1 option. Not all key
names allow the readonly=1 setting. Read-only compatibility is indicated in the key name
descriptions in this topic. For more information, see Read-only User-Preference Settings.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 53


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Parameters
The following tables list the setting names and describes the editable parameter values in
each section of the DxDesigner.xml file:
o DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner OBJECTS Section Table 2-6 on page 54
o DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner LAYERS Section Table 2-7 on page 57
o DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner ICTOBJECTS Section Table 2-8 on page 59
o DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section Table 2-9 on page 60
o DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SIZES Section Table 2-10 on page 136
o DxDesigner.xml DxDatabook SETTINGS Section Table 2-11 on page 139

Table 2-6. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner OBJECTS Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The OBJECTS section defines the following: (Note: Names in parentheses indicate UI labels.)
NET, COMPONENT, ATTRIBUTE (Property), LABEL (Name), PIN, BOX, LINE,
CIRCLE, ARC, TEXT, WIRE, BUS, WIRE_BUS, FRAME, POLYGON, and
DOCUMENT_CONTAINER
COLOR Sets the color of each object using an RGB hex value. The
default values for each defined object are set as follows:
0xffff00 ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, LABEL (Name),
WIRE, WIRE_BUS
0x00ffff ARC, BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT, LINE,
PIN, POLYGON, TEXT
0x9eb8cf DOCUMENT_CONTAINER
0xff6820 FRAME
0x00ff00 NET
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects

54 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-6. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner OBJECTS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
FILL_STYLE Sets the fill style of each object using the following values:
0 Hollow (Default for BOX, CIRCLE, COMPONENT,
DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LINE, PIN, POLYGON, and
WIRE)
1 Solid (Default for BUS, NET, and WIRE_BUS)
2 Diagdn1
3 Diagdn2
4 Grey08
5 Diagdn2
6 Diagup1
7 Horiz
8 Vert
9 Grid2
10 Grid1
11 X2
12 X1
13 Grey50
14 Grey92
15 Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable (set to -1 by the design entry
tool) to the following objects:
ARC, ATTRIBUTE (Property), FRAME, LABEL (Name),
WIRE, and TEXT
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Schematic button selected.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 55


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-6. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner OBJECTS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
LINE_STYLE Sets the line style of each object using the following values:
0 Solid (Default)
1 Dash
2 Center
3 Phantom
4 Big dash
5 Dot
6 Dash-Dot
7 Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable to the following objects:
ATTRIBUTE (Property), LABEL (Name), TEXT
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Schematic button selected.
SELECTABLE Defines selection filter behavior as follows:
0 The object is filtered from the selection and cannot be
selected. (Default - all objects.)
1 The object is selectable.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
VISIBLE Sets object visibility state as follows:
0 Not visible.
1 Visible (Default - all objects.)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
View > Other Windows > Selection Filter
For ATTRIBUTE (Property) objects Setup > Settings,
Display (category), Common Properties (option)
For TEXT objects Setup > Settings, Display (category),
Graphical Text (option)
For LABEL (Name) objects Setup > Settings, Display
(category), Name (option)

56 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-6. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner OBJECTS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
LINE_THICKNESS Sets line thickness using a value between 1 (thinnest - default)
and 10 (thickest). Line thickness settings are not applicable to
the following objects:
ATTRIBUTE (Property), BUS, COMPONENT,
DOCUMENT_CONTAINER, LABEL (Name), PIN, and TEXT
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory)

Table 2-7. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner LAYERS Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The LAYERS section defines the following: (Note: Names in parentheses indicate UI labels.)
SELECTION_LAYER, DYNAMIC_SELECTION_LAYER, BORDER_LAYER,
VALUE_LAYER, ANNOTATION_LAYER, HIGHLIGHT_LAYER,
BACKGROUND_LAYER, GRID_LAYER, DRAG_LAYER (Selection),
UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER, ZONES_LAYER (Border/Grid Zones),
ZONING_LAYER (Sheet Zoning Grid), CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER
COLOR Sets the color of each layer using an RGB hex value. The default
values for each defined layer are set as follows:
0xffffff SELECTION_LAYER, ZONES_LAYER
(Border/Grid Zones), ZONING_LAYER (Sheet Zoning
Grid)
0x00ffff BORDER_LAYER
0xc0c0c0 VALUE_LAYER,
UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER
0xffff00 ANNOTATION_LAYER,
CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER
0xff00ff HIGHLIGHT_LAYER
0x000000 BACKGROUND_LAYER
0x3a3a3a GRID_LAYER
xffaaaa DYNAMIC_SELECTION_LAYER
0x00ff00 DRAG_LAYER (Selection)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Schematic button selected

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 57


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-7. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner LAYERS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
FILL_STYLE Sets the fill style of each layer using the following values:
0 Hollow
1 Solid (Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER)
2 Diagdn1
3 Diagdn2
4 Grey08
5 Diagdn2
6 Diagup1
7 Horiz
8 Vert
9 Grid2
10 Grid1
11 X2
12 X1
13 Grey50
14 Grey92
15 Grey04
Fill style settings are not applicable for any layers except the
HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Schematic button selected

58 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-7. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner LAYERS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
LINE_STYLE Sets the line style of each layer using the following values:
0 Solid (Default for HIGHLIGHT_LAYER)
1 Dash
2 Center
3 Phantom
4 Big dash
5 Dot
6 Dash-Dot
7 Medium Dash
Line style settings are not applicable for any layers except the
HIGHLIGHT_LAYER.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Schematic button selected

Table 2-8. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner ICTOBJECTS Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
The ICTOBJECTS section defines the following: (Note: Names in parentheses indicate UI
labels.)
ICTBLOCK (View), ICTBUS, ICTCOMPONENT (Block), ICTDIFFPAIR, ICTEDITCELL,
ICTFPGA, ICTFUB (Editable Block), ICTGROUP, ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER,
ICTINVALIDCELL, ICTNET, ICTNETS (Global Net), ICTPIN, ICTPORT, ICTSYMBOL.
COLOR Sets the color of each ICT object using an RGB hex value. The
default value for each ICT object is set as follows:
0xfffbf0 (Default for ICTBLOCK (View), ICTBUS,
ICTCOMPONENT (Block), ICTDIFFPAIR,
ICTEDITCELL, ICTFPGA, ICTFUB (Editable Block),
ICTNET, ICTNETS (Global Net), ICTPIN, ICTPORT,
ICTSYMBOL)
0xa6caf0 (Default for ICTGROUP)
0xffffce (Default for ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER)
0xb0b0b0 (Default for ICTINVALIDCELL)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
ICT button selected

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 59


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-8. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner ICTOBJECTS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
TEXTCOLOR Sets the text color of each ICT object using an RGB hex value.
The default value for all ICT objects is set as follows:
0x000000
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
ICT button selected

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ABSOLUTE_OATS Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
ADD_PROPERTIES_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
HINT_TAG
ADD_PROPERTIES_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
HINT_TAG_TIMER
ADISTANCE Obsolete. Use ADISTANCE_HR.
ADISTANCE_HR Avoidance distance - high resolution. (Available only when
Avoidance Routing is active: =2.) Sets the minimum distance
between nets and components or other nets.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 5.08mm or 0.20in appears in the file as
508000 (5.08mm * 100,000).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Avoidance Distance (option)
ADVANCED_BOARD_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls connectivity when you move
MANAGEMENT system level Blocks between boards:
0 Do not update connectivity. Default.
1 Update connectivity. xSD Systems Designer adds
connector pairs, nets and wires to preserve connectivity.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), System Designer
Automatic Connectivity Update (option)

60 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ANALOG_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
SIMULATION_MODE
ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_X Sets cross reference annotation text X-offset placement based
on the annotation origin point in the specified units. Default is
0. A positive number offsets the text to the right, a negative
number offsets the text to the left.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 1.143e+006 sets the offset to 11.43mm, or .45in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), X-Offset (option)
ANNO_LOC_OFFSET_Y Sets cross reference annotation text Y-offset placement based
on the annotation origin point in the specified units. Default is
0. A positive number offsets the text vertically up, a negative
number offsets the text vertically down.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
A value of 762000 sets the offset to 7.62mm, or .3in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Y-Offset (option)
ANNO_LOC_SPACING Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 61


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ANNO_ORIGIN Sets the cross reference annotation text origin point (or none)
for the as one of the following:
0 None (Default)
1 Upper left
2 Middle left
3 Lower left
4 Upper center
5 Middle center
6 Lower center
7 Upper right
8 Middle right
9 Lower right
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Annotation Origin (option)
ANNO_SIZE Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
ANNO_SIZE_HR Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
CROSS_REFERENCE_ Sets the size of cross reference text. Default is 381000.
SIZE_HR You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 381000 sets the offset to 3.81mm, or .15in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Text Size (option)
ANNO_MAX_LENGTH Sets the maximum length (in characters) of the cross reference
annotation. Default is 20.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Max Line Length (option)

62 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ANNO_SEP Specifies a separator that appears between multiple cross
reference link designators when a link goes to more than one
destination such as 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Default = ;
(semicolon).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Separator (option)
ANNO_CONDENSED_ If the ANNO_USE_CONDENSED option is on (value=1),
SEP then you can specify the separator (default = /) used between
multiple link designators when a link goes to more than one
destination such as: 3-G4/D10/G9.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Condensed Separator (option)
ANNO_USE_ Sets the cross reference annotation text to use either condensed
CONDENSED format (default) or non-condensed format when a link points to
multiple destinations:
0 Display verbose, non-condensed cross reference links
to a given sheet.
1 Condense cross reference links to a given sheet.
Default.
For example, given the following destinations from a link:
2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Turning on this option (value=1)
condenses the three entries that all go to page 3 as follows: 2-
B7;3-G4/D10/G9. Note that the condensed separator is set in
the ANNO_CONDENSED_SEP setting, which in this example
is set to / (the default).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference
(subcategory), Allow Condensed Annotations (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 63


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AREA_SELECTION_ 0 The selection area must totally enclose an object to be
OVERLAP included in a selection. Default.
1 The selection area need only enclose a portion of an
object for it to be included in a selection.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Area Select by
Overlap (option)
See also:
Selecting Schematic Objects - xDX Designer
ATTR_ON_SPLIT Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
ATTRON Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
AUTOHIDE_SCHEMATIC Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
_PANANDZOOM
AUTOLABELING_NETS Controls whether the design entry tool names new nets
automatically as follows:
0 The design entry tool does not name nets
automatically. Default.
1 The design entry tool names nets automatically based
on the rules described in the topic:
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xDX
Designer
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Name New Nets Automatically (option)

64 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AUTOLABELING_ Controls whether the design entry tool names new buses
BUSES automatically as follows:
0 The design entry tool does not name buses
automatically. Default.
1 The design entry tool names buses automatically based
on the rules described in the topic:
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xDX
Designer
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Name New Buses Automatically (option)
AUTO_CONNECT_NEW_ Sets the ICT power supply tap autoconnect behavior as follows:
TAP 0 Turn off power supply tap autoconnect.
1 If set prior to placing a tap in an Interconnectivity
Table (Add > Power or Add > Ground), creates the
connection to the corresponding global net (given by the
value of the tap symbol property Global Signal Name).
The global net is eventually added if it does not already
exist. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Power
supply tap autoconnect (option)
AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
SEGMENT
AUTO_RIPPER_BUS_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
SEGMENT_LENGTH_
HR
AUTO_TEXT_ORIEN Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
AUTOLOG Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 65


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AUTOMATICALLY_ Controls the behavior of connector pin naming when
PROPAGATE_NET_ connecting a net to a connector as follows:
NAMES 0 You can use different names between nets and
associated connectors. Default.
1 The design entry tool automatically synchronizes the
net name with the connector pin name no matter which
name changes.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Automatically
synchronize on-sheet/off-links and net names (option)
AUTOPAN Controls schematic panning as follows:
0 Does not automatically pan screen when dragging a
component to an edge of the schematic.
1 Automatically pans the screen when dragging a
component. This eliminates the need for using F6 to pan
each time you move an object. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Auto Pan (option)
BEGIN_NETS_IN_ Controls how nets are places on the schematic as follows:
SPACE 0 Nets can only start at a component pin or at a junction
with another net.
1 Allows nets to start anywhere. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
BELL Obsolete.
BIGCROSS Obsolete.
BITNUMBERS Control the display of bit numbers on a ripped bus as follows:
0 Do not show bit numbers on a ripped bus. Default.
1 Show bit numbers on a ripped bus.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Show Ripper
Indexes (option)
BLOCKTYPE Internal Use Only. Do not modify.

66 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
BORDERON Controls the visibility of the schematic border shown in the
figure, Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid. This is not
referring to a border symbol.
0 Hides the schematic border.
1 Displays the schematic border. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Border (option)
BORDERZONES Controls the visibility of the schematic zoning grid border label
shown in the figure, Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid.
0 Hides the zoning grid border label. Default.
1 Displays the zoning grid border label.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Zone Labels (section),
Border (option)
BOXSIZE Obsolete. Use BOX_SIZE_HR.
BOXSIZE_HR Sets the drawing size (radius) of all boxes on dangling joints.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 127000 sets the size to 1.27mm, or
0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Box Size [<Units>]
(option)
BUBBLESIZE Obsolete. Use .
BUBBLESIZE_HR Sets the size of the bubble on inverted pins.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 127000 sets the size to 1.27mm, or
0.050in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Inverted Pin Bubble
Size [<Units>] (option)
BUS Obsolete.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 67


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
BUS_DOTSIZE Obsolete. Use BUS_DOTSIZE_HR.
BUS_DOTSIZE_HR Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net solder dots.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 305000 sets the size to 3.05mm, or
0.120in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Bus Dot Size
[<Units>] (option)
BUS_MODE Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
BUSWIDTH Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS
object in the OBJECTS section.
BUSWIDTH_HR Obsolete. Use the LINE_THICKNESS option in the BUS
object in the OBJECTS section.
CHANGE_TO_ALLOW_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
MULTIPLE_TYPES
CHECK_COMP_DATES Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date
symbols as follows:
0 The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date
symbols.
1 Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date
symbols. The software compares the symbol in the host
design and central library to ensure they are the same. If the
time/date stamp of the symbol is different than that in the
host design, The design entry tool places a magenta box
around the out-of-date symbol. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Flag out-of-date
symbols (option)

68 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
CHECK_REUSEBLOCK_ Controls the design entry tool behavior with out-of-date
DATES reusable blocks as follows:
0 The design entry tool does not flag out-of-date
reusable blocks. Default.
1 Enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date
reusable blocks. The software compares the reusable block
in the host design and central library to ensure they are the
same. If the time/date stamp of the reusable block symbol is
different than that in the host design, the design entry tool
places a magenta box around the out-of-date reusable block.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Flag out-of-date
Reusable Blocks (option)
COARSE_GRID Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
COMPONENT_ Controls the visibility of component tooltips (labels and
TOOLTIPS properties) on schematics as follows:
0 Hide component tooltips.
1 Display component tooltips. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Components (option)
COMPTEXTON Sets symbol text visibility on schematics as one of the
following:
0 Hide symbol text.
1 Display symbol text on schematics. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Symbol Text (option)
CONSTRAINT Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
CONTEXT_WINDOW Obsolete.
CONTINUE_ROLLBACK_ Internal Use Only. Do not modify.
DECISION

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 69


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
CONTINUE_REMOVE_ Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet
ALL_BACKUPS_ backups in the current project.
DECISION 0 Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
the current project. Default.
4 Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
CONTINUE_REMOVE_ Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all sheet
BOARD_BACKUPS_ backups in the current board.
DECISION 0 Provide a warning before deleting all sheet backups in
the current board. Default.
4 Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
CONTINUE_REMOVE_ Controls whether to provide a warning before deleting all
SHEET_BACKUPS_ current sheet backups.
DECISION 0 Provide a warning before deleting all current sheet
backups. Default.
4 Do not provide warning.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
COPY_CONSTRAINTS_ Controls how constraints are copied along with schematic data
ON_COPY_BLOCK as follows:
0 Only schematic data is copied.
1 The design entry tool copies constraints data during
Copy Block and Copy Sheet operations. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Sheet/ICT Backup,
Copy Constraints on Copy Sheet (option)

70 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
COPY_CONSTRAINTS_ Controls whether constraints overwrite existing values during
OVERWRITES_VALUES Copy Block and Copy Sheet operations, as follows:
0 Constraints do not overwrite existing constraints
values in the project to which a block or sheet is copied.
1 Constraints overwrite existing constraint values in the
project to which a block or sheet is copied. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Copy Constraints
Overwrites All Values (option)
COPY_CONSTRAINTS_ Controls Constraint Manager invocation method when you
USING_CRM paste a sheet in the design entry tool, as follows:
0 The Constraint Manager tool does not open
automatically in Conflict Resolution Manager (CRM) when
you paste a sheet in the design entry tool. Default.
1 The Constraint Manager tool opens automatically in
Conflict Resolution Manager (CRM) when you paste a
sheet in the design entry tool.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Copy and Paste
Sheet using Conflict Resolution (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 71


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
CUSTOM_SELECTION_ Stores the schematic editor selection filters Custom Filter
FILTER_NAMES names.
This key name consists of multiple <value> lines, one
corresponding to each custom filter <value> line listed in the
CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS. The first
<value> line corresponds to the first line listed in the Custom
Selection Filter Objects list, the second <value> line
corresponds to the second item listed in the Custom Selection
Filter Objects list, and so on.

Can be set to Read-only? No.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Selection
Filters (subcategory)
Also see: CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_OBJECTS

72 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
CUSTOM_SELECTION_ Controls the custom selection filter settings represented by the
FILTER_OBJECTS following values:

This key name consists of multiple <value> lines; one line per
custom filter listed in the
CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES (Custom Filters)
list. The first <value> line corresponds to the first item listed in
the Custom Filter list, the second <value> line corresponds to
the second item listed in the Custom Filter list, and so on.
For each <value> line, activate the objects you want in that
particular filter by adding the appropriate values, separated by
spaces (see the following default custom filter definitions).
Default Custom Filter Definitions:
<value>0 1 3 4</value> (Graphics)
<value>5 7 9 26 27</value> (Objects)
<value>2 6 8</value> (Text)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Selection
Filters (subcategory)
Also see: CUSTOM_SELECTION_FILTER_NAMES

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 73


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
PRESERVE_ Controls what the design entry tool does with packaging
PACKAGING_INFO_ information when you copy a schematic, sheet, block, or design
ON_COPY as follows:
0 Packaging information resets to default or empty
values (depending on the information type). Default.
1 The design entry tool preserves packaging information
such as reference designators, instance values, pin numbers,
and pin slots.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Preserve
packaging info on copy (option)
CROSSCURSOR Set the appearance of the schematic crosshair cursor as one of
the following:
0 None. Default.
1 Small.
2 Full Extent.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Crosshair Cursor
(option)
DATETIME_FORMAT Set the @DATETIME property format using the following
variables and separator characters (most common are / and : ):
%d day
%m month
%Y year as four digits
%y year as two digits
%H hour
%M minutes
%S seconds
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Default: %d/%m/%Y:%H:%M
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Date Format -
pulldown menu

74 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DB_AUTO_BACKUP Controls whether sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you
open them.
0 Do not backup sheets and ICTs. Default
1 Backup sheets and ICTs each time you open them.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT
DB_BACKUPS_LIMIT Set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before
overwriting them. This is used if DB_AUTO_BACKUP is set
to 1 (on). Set the value to between 4 and 20. If you keep the
default of 0, the design entry tool saves all backups without
overwriting older ones.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
See also: DB_AUTO_BACKUP
DB_ERR_VERBOSE Sets the SCH/SYM parser database validation to display one of
the following in the design entry tool:
0 Tallies the number of messages when done reading the
design.
1 Generates all error/warning messages. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
DBOXON Internal use only. Do not modify.
DEFAULT_VALUE_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
UPPER

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 75


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DEFAULT_ZOOM Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADS DX Designer
configuration:
0 Turns off the PADS DX Designer style pan and zoom.
1 Turns on the PADS DX Designer style pan and zoom.
Default.
Note: This setting is used in conjunction with
EXPEDITION_ZOOM and PADS_ZOOM. Only one of
these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan,
and Zoom (subcategory)
See also:
Panning and Zooming Default-Style - xDX Designer

DEFMETHOD Sets the behavior of border symbol placement on new


schematic sheets as one of the following:
0 Does not place user-configured border symbol on new
schematic sheets.
1 Places a user-configured border symbol on to new
schematics. This symbol can be from any location in the
search order. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Enable user-configurable border symbols
(option)
DEFSHEET Sets the following Border Sheet option as one of the following:
0 Do not automatically add a border to new schematic
sheets. Default.
1 Automatically add a hardwired border schematic from
a required location on to new schematics.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Automatically add border to new schematic
sheets (option)

76 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DEF_USESHEET1 If DEFMETHOD=1, this setting lets you choose to use either
the same user-configurable border for all sheets, or a different
border for the first sheet in a design, as follows:
0 Do not use the sheet 1 border for new sheets. Default.
1 Use the sheet 1 border for new sheets.
Rules:
This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use
this setting to specify which border to use on the first sheet
of a new schematic when you push into a composite
component.
If you select this setting, the border specified in Border for
Sheet 1 is used on the first sheet of the underlying
schematic.
If you clear this setting (value=0), the border specified in
Border for Sheet 2-N is used for all sheets, including sheet
1.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics
(option)
DETAIL Controls how the design capture tool displays objects during
object manipulation operations as one of the following:
0 The design capture tool displays a bounding box,
which represents the object until the operation is complete.
1 The design capture tool continually displays objects
while you are performing operations, such as: adding,
pasting, moving, copying, or rotating. Default.
Tip: Leaving this option on (value=1) slows down object
movement. If you find the speed of object operations slow,
change this option setting.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 77


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DISPLAY_FULL_ Controls how the design entry tool displays net names when
SIGNAL_NAME_ON_ you rip nets from a bus as follows:
RIPPER 0 Displays only the ripper index value (default) as shown

below:
1 Displays the full net name of the ripped net as shown

below:
Prerequisite:
=1 must be set before you can display the ripped net name.
See also:
Connectivity With Buses - xDX Designer

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Use Full Bus Name
on Ripper (option)
DISPLAY_ Obsolete.
REUSEBLOCK_WORK
DOTSIZE Obsolete. Use DOTSIZE_HR.

78 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DOTSIZE_HR Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net connection dots. The
design entry tool determines the connection dot size from the
radius setting and the net linewidth.
You need to enter a radius value as: (value in millimeters) *
100,000. The default value of 63500 sets the increment to
0.635mm, or 0.025in.
If the net has a linewidth=1, the design entry tool displays the
connection dot using the radius value (0.025 in the second
example in the following figure.)
If the net has a linewidth>1, the design entry tool increases the
connection dot size according to the net size. The design entry
tool adds the radius value to the net line edge as shown in the
first example in the following
figure:

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Dot Size [<Units>]
(option)
DOTSIZE_THREE_ Obsolete.
SEGMENTS
DOTSIZE_THREE_ Obsolete.
SEGMENTS_HR
DXD_ALTERA_ Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable.
EXECUTABLE_PATH Default: null string .
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA
Tools (subcategory), Altera Executable Path (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 79


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_CLEAR_LIBRARY_ Controls what actions need to happen before simulation
BEFORE_INIT initialization as follows:
True You do not need to manually run the Simulation >
Clean command before running Simulation > Initialize
Simulation .
False Before running Simulation > Initialize
Simulation you need to manually run the Simulation >
Clean command. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Delete Design Units
from HDL Design (option)
DXD_COMPILE_ Controls what actions need to happen before simulation
BEFORE_INIT initialization as follows:
True You do not need to manually run the Simulation >
Compile command before running Simulation >
Initialize Simulation .
False Before running Simulation > Initialize
Simulation you need to manually run the Simulation >
Compile command. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Compile Files (option)
DXD_CURRENT_FPGA_ Specify which FPGA tool you want to execute (Xilinx or
TOOL Altera).
Default: null string .
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA
Tools (subcategory), Current Tool (option)

80 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_DIAGNOSTICS_ Sets the design entry tool to run the automatic Diagnostics tool
RUN_ON_CLOSE when the session exits.
0 Does not run the Diagnostics tool. Default.
1 Runs the Diagnostics tool when the design entry tool
closes.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, DxDesigner Diagnostics (category),
Execute PADS DX Designer Diagnostics on exit (option)
DXD_ENABLE_ Controls the design entry tool edit mode if the proj_name.prj
EXTERNAL_EDITOR file has specified a valid DedicatedServerName as follows:
False Sets the session so that the first designer to open a
sheet does not get read-write access to the sheet. The sheet
is opened in read-only mode. The first designer who clicks
the Click to Edit button gets read-write access to the
sheet.
True Sets the session so that the first designer to open a
sheet gets read-write access. Any subsequent designer
opening the same sheet gets read-only access.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Enable edit mode for
opened sheets (option)
or
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator, Use External Text Editor (option)
Also see: The Multi-User Environment
DXD_ENABLE_ Controls whether the PADS DX Designer Start Page displays
START_PAGE when you invoke the tool as follows:
0 Does not display the Start Page.
1 Displays the Start Page. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 81


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_ Controls what actions need to happen before simulation
INIT initialization as follows:
True You do not need to manually run the Simulation >
Export HDL Files command before running
Simulation > Initialize Simulation .
False Before running Simulation > Initialize
Simulation you must run Simulation > Export HDL Files.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Export HDL Files
(option)
DXD_EXPORT_BEFORE_ Controls whether to export HDL files when you run the Launch
TOOL_LAUNCH FPGA tool as follows:
True Exports HDL files when you run the Launch
FPGA Tool the Launch FPGA tool.
False Does not export HDL files when you run the
Launch FPGA tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA
Tools (subcategory), Export Before Launch (option)

82 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_EXTERNAL_ If the DXD_ENABLE_EXTERNAL_EDITOR setting is set to
EDITOR_EXECUTABLE True, use this setting to provide a path to your own text editor
instead of using the one the design entry tool provides. The
default = null string .
In addition to the path to the executable, include the parameter
$(File) as in the following example to enable the design entry
tool to start the editor on the correct HDL file:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File)

If your text editor invocation supports a second argument to


invoke on a specific line number, you can add the argument
$(Line) as in the following example:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File) $(Line)

Can be set to Read-only? No.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Executable File and
Parameters (option)
DXD_HDL_EXPORT_ Sets the name of the export folder (default = Exported):
FOLDER Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), Export Folder
DXD_HDL_EXPORT_ Sets the default export language as one of the following:
LANGUAGE 0 VHDL (default)
1 Verilog
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL
(subcategory), Default Export Language (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 83


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_ML_OBJECT_ This setting works with a project.
REFERENCES Use this setting to compute values of Function or Location or
Product ID properties in different formats as follows:
0 PADS DX Designer computes values in single-level
format.
1 PADS DX Designer computes values in multi-level
format. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Multi-Level Object
References (option)
DXD_ML_OBJECT_ This setting works with a project.
REFERENCES_SHORT_ If DXD_ML_OBJECT_REFERENCES is set to value=1, this
NOT option controls the following:
0 The design entry tool does not use shorthand notation.
1 The design entry tool uses shorthand notation. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Multi-Level Object
References Use Shorthand Notation (option)
DXD_MODELSIM_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
EXECUTABLE_PATH
DXD_OVERWRITE_ Controls whether to overwrite the tool files list before running
TOOL_FILES_LIST the Launch FPGA tool as follows:
True Prepares the project file in the FPGA tool with the
HDL file list when you run the Launch FPGA tool.
False Does not overwrite tools HDL file list when you
run the Launch FPGA tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA
Tools (subcategory), Overwrite Tool Files List (option)

84 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXD_SIMULATOR_ Sets the path to the ModelSimfolder that contains the
EXECUTABLE executable. Default = null string
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), ModelSim Executable
Path (field)
DXD_SIMULATOR_USE_ Controls what actions need to happen before simulation
EXTERNAL initialization as follows:
True Use the ModelSim User Interface (UI) to set up
and run the simulation instead of the PADS DX Designer
UI.
False PADS DX Designer provides a dialog to set up
and run the simulation. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category),
Integrated Simulator (subcategory), Use External ModelSim
(option)
DXD_XILINX_ Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable.
EXECUTABLE_PATH Default = null string
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA
Tools (subcategory), Xilinx Executable Path (option)
DXDB_HIDE_CL_VIEW Controls whether the Central Library view is visible in
DataBook when a .dbc configuration file is loaded:
0 The Central Library view is visible in xSD Databook.
Default.
1 The Central Library view is not visible in DataBook.
Can be set to Read-only? No
DXDLITE_SHOW_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
EXPIRATION_WARNING
_LEVEL

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 85


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXDIAG_ON_DB_ Controls the design entry tool behavior before opening a
UPGRADE project that was created with an earlier version of
PADS DX Designer as follows:
0 Do not run Tools > DxDesigner Diagnostics before
opening an updated project. Default.
1 Before opening a project that was created with an
earlier version of PADS DX Designer, PADS DX Designer
automatically runs Tools > DxDesigner Diagnostics after
successfully updating the project to the current version of
PADS DX Designer.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Run Diagnostics
after update (option)
DYNAMIC_PANNING Controls dynamic panning as follows:
0 Do not use middle mouse button to pan the schematic.
1 Use middle mouse button to pan the schematic.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
DYNAMIC_PLOTSIZE Obsolete.
DYNAMIC_XY Controls component coordinate updating as follows:
0 Does not dynamically update component coordinates
on the status bar during a component move. This setting
may improve performance slightly.
1 Dynamically updates component coordinates on the
status bar when moving a component. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
EDM_GENERATE_BAsd_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls xDM Design Client check-in
SYNCDATA_ON_CLOSE behavior regarding back annotation as follows:
0 Hide the Generate SD BA dialog box on check-in
request. Default.
1 Show the Generate SD BA dialog box on check-in
request.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Hide 'Generate SD
BA dialog' on Check-In request (option)

86 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
EURO_ARROWS This option is used in conjunction with option
PINTYPE_ARROWS to set the appearance of pintype arrows
between full arrow and half arrow (European) style as follows:
None .........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 0,
...................EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 0)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 1)
The default setting for EURO_ARROWS is 0.
Notes:
The design entry tool only displays pintype arrows for
symbols that have block types of Module and Composite.
The design entry tool does not display pintype arrows for a
block type of Pin.
If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design
entry tool does not display Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. A list of
these are shown in the PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples table
in the Settings Dialog Box - Advanced topic.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Pintype Arrows
(option)
EURO_DATE Obsolete. Use DATETIME_FORMAT

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 87


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
EXPEDITION_ZOOM Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the layout tool
configuration:
0 Turns off xPCB Layout tool style pan and zoom.
1 Turns on the xPCB Layout style pan and zoom.
Default.
Note: This setting is used in conjunction with
DEFAULT_ZOOM and PADS_ZOOM. Only one of these
should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan,
and Zoom (subcategory)
See also:
Panning and Zooming xPCB Layout-Style - xDX Designer

88 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
FIXED_TEXT_ Controls the design entry tool text rotation behavior as follows:
ROTATION 0 (Off) The design entry tool handles text rotation as
shown in the following example (on the left). Rotating the
text 180 degrees maintains the original orientation. Rotating
the Text string either 90 or 270 degrees produces the
results shown in the example on the left.
1 (On) The design entry tool handles text rotation as
shown in the following example (on the right). For each
rotation of the text (90, 180, and 270 degrees), the
orientation is changed as shown. Default.

Note: If you change the setting from On to Off after you


have added text, any text appearing in the 180 degree state
or the 270 degree state (as shown on the right in the example
above) changes to the equivalent state as shown at the left in the
example when you apply the new setting.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Fixed Text Rotation
(option)
FUBPINTYPEON Internal Use. Do not modify.
GRC_DESIGN_SCOPE Sets the Graphical Rule Checker scope as one of the following:
Project - Default
Board
Schematic
Sheet
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
GRC button pulldown

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 89


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE Configures the Graphical Rules Checker rule defaults that
appear in Setup > Settings, Graphical Rules Checker
(category). Each line is constructed of:
<value> 0 (checked) or 1 (unchecked):
{rule_name}:{severity}:{value} </value>
The following shows the default settings:
<key name="GRC_ISSUE_SCOPE">
<value>1:Net overlap:Note</value>
<value>0:Object overlap:Note</value>
<value>1:Net off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Pin off grid:Note</value>
<value>1:Text owner:Note:1.2in</value>
<value>1:Text alignment:Note</value>
</key>

Can be set to Read-only? No.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Graphical Rules Checker (category)
GRID_HIGHLIGHT_ Internal Use. Do not modify.
INTERVAL
GRID_HIGHLIGHT_ Internal use. Do not modify.
MARKS
GRID_HIGHLIGHT_ If = 1 and = 1, this sets a grid highlight interval (default = 10,
MARKS_INTERVAL meaning that for every ten grid units, a highlight mark is
displayed).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GRID_HR Sets the grid display space increment for the active schematic
or symbol window.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 254000 sets the increment to 2.54mm, or
0.1in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Grid Spacing
(option)

90 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
GRIDON Sets the schematic grid display as follows:
0 Grid is off. Objects that are placed or moved on a
schematic do not snap to the grid.
1 Grid is on. Objects that are placed or moved on a
schematic snap to the grid. Default.
If the grid is on, the LINE_GRID (Grid Type) setting
determines how the grid appears (dotted or lined).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Display Grid
(option)
GRIDZONES Turns on or off the schematic zone labels as shown in the
figure, Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid as follows:
0 Turns off zone labels. Default.
1 Turns on zone labels.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Zone Labels (section),
Left-Top Corner of Each Zone (option)
HATS Internal use. Do not modify.
HIDE_EDM_GENERATE_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls xDM Design Client check-in
BAsd_SYNCDATA_ON_ behavior regarding back annotation as follows:
CLOSE_DIALOG 0 Hide Generate SD BA dialog box on check-in request.
Default.
1 Show the Generate SD BA dialog box on check-in
request.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Hide 'Generate SD
BA dialog' on Check-In request (option)
HIDE_EDM_GENERATE_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls xDM Design Client check-in
FA_SYNCDATA_ON_ behavior regarding forward annotation as follows:
CLOSE_DIALOG 0 Hide Generate FA dialog box on check-in request.
Default.
1 Show the Generate FA dialog box on check-in request.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), xDM Design: Hide
'Generate FA dialog' on Check-In request (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 91


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ICE_AUTOFIT Sets ICT autofit on or off as follows:
0 Turn autofit off
1 Turn autofit on (default)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Autofit
Automatically (option)
ICE_CELLS_SHOW_ Sets the ICT cell display characteristics for direction as
DIRECTION follows:
0 Do not display direction. Default.
1 Display direction.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Cells
display, Direction (option)
ICE_CELLS_SHOW_ Obsolete.
NAME
ICE_CELLS_SHOW_ Sets the ICT cell display characteristics for pin numbers as
PIN_NUMBER follows:
0 Do not display pin numbers. Default.
1 Display pin numbers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Cells
display (section), Pin number (option)
ICE_COMPONENTS_ Sets the ICT components to display in one of the following
IN_COLUMNS configurations:
0 Show components in rows, nets in columns
1 Show components in columns, nets in rows (default)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Show
components in (option)

92 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ICE_PINSDROPDOWN Sets the ICT pin drop-down list to display pin direction as
LIST_SHOW_DIRECTION follows:
0 Do not display pin numbers.
1 Display pin numbers. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Pins
drop-down list display (section), Direction (option)
ICE_PINSDROPDOWN Obsolete.
LIST_SHOW_NAME
ICE_PINSDROPDOWN Sets the ICT pin drop-down list to display pin numbers as
LIST_SHOW_PIN_ follows:
NUMBER 0 Do not display pin numbers. Default.
1 Display pin numbers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Pins
drop-down list display (section), Pin number (option)
ICE_SLICEANDDICE_ Sets the ICT Slice and Dice nets choices as one of the
NETS_SHOW_MODE following:
0 Show only nets connected between the components of
Slice and Dice. Default.
1 Show nets connected between and to the components
of Slice and Dice.
2 Show all nets.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Slice
and Dice (subcategory)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 93


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ICE_SYMBOL_FORMAT Select how Symbol label(s) appear in the Interconnectivity
Table using any combination of the following variables:
$(Name)
$(Symbol)
$(Ref Designator)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(Name)$(Symbol)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category),
Symbol label format (option)
ICT_HIDE_ Show only common properties in ICT viewer.
NOTCOMMON_PRP 0 Shows all properties. Default.
1 Shows only common properties.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category),
Properties (subcategory), Show Common Properties Only
(checkbox)
IMPORT_PADSPE_CL_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
PATH
KEYBINDINGS Control the design entry tool keybindings as follows:
0 The design entry tool uses default keybindings.
1 The design entry tool uses xPCB Layout-style Key
Bindings. Default.
See also:
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style on page 437
Key Bindings - Default on page 433
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Xpedition Style
Keybindings (option)
LABELBRACKETS Internal use only. Do not modify.
LABELON Obsolete

94 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
LABELTHRESHOLD Internal use only. Do not modify.
LABEL_ON_SPLIT Internal use only. Do not modify.
LANGUAGE Set the User Interface language to one of the following:
Default
ENG English
JPN Japanese
PTB Portuguese
CHN Chinese
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Language (option)
LINE_GRID If GRIDON is set to 1, LINE_GRID sets the active schematic
or symbol window grid display as follows:
Dotted Grid is displayed as dotted lines.
Lined Grid is displayed as solid lines. Default.
The grid lines or dots display as one line per grid interval
defined by GRID_HR (Grid Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Grid Type
(option)
LONG_LINE_ERRORS Set the maximum number of characters allowed in an error/
warning message.
Default: 127
Can be set to Read-only? No.
MIDSTROKE If STROKES is on (value=1), this setting determines which
mouse button you use to draw predefined patterns in the
schematic window to execute commands or functions as
follows:
0 You draw strokes with the right mouse button. Default.
1 You draw strokes with the middle mouse button.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes,
Pan, and Zoom (subcategory)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 95


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
MRU_SCHEMA Points to the last-saved user color scheme. The project reopens
to this scheme.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory),
Save (option)
MRU_SETTINGS The design entry tool stores the last-viewed Setup > Settings
dialog box pane as follows:
<key name=MRU_SETTINGS value=<pane_name>/>

The next time you open the Setup > Settings dialog box, this
pane is selected.
Default: Designs
Can be set to Read-only? No.
MRU_SIZE Sets the maximum number of Most Recently Used items
displayed in the list.
Default: 6
Can be set to Read-only? No.
NAMESON Obsolete.
NAV_BLOCK_FILTER_ Controls filtering for blocks and schematics in the Navigator as
USE_REGEXP follows:
0 Display all blocks or schematics (Wildcard).
1 Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the
displayed list. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Navigator window > right-click block or schematic > Filter

96 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_BLOCK_INFOTIP_ Sets the block info tip format in the Navigator window using
FORMAT any combination of the following variables:
$(Name)
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(View): $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
NAV_BLOCK_LABEL_ Sets the block label format in the Navigator window using any
FORMAT combination of the following variables:
$(Name)
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Label format (option)
NAV_BLOCK_SHEET_ Controls whether or not the sheet range of each block is shown
RANGE_DISPLAY in the Navigator window as follows:
0 Does not display the sheet range of each block in the
Navigator window. Default.
1 Display the sheet range of each block in the Navigator
window.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Display sheet range (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 97


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_BLOCK_SORT_ Controls the way blocks or schematics are sorted in the
DESCENDING Navigation window according to the chosen property as one of
the following choices:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right-click schematic node and choose Sort > Ascending or
Descending
NAV_BLOCK_SORT_ Controls the way blocks or schematics are sorted in the
ORDER_BY Navigator window as follows:
0 Name. Default.
1 View.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right-click schematic node and choose Sort > Name or
View.
NAV_BOARD_FILTER_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
USE_REGEXP
NAV_BOARD_INFOTIP_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
FORMAT
NAV_BOARD_LABEL_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
FORMAT
NAV_BOARD_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the board sorting order as follows:
DESCENDING 0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window, right click a board and choose
Sort > Descending
NAV_BOARD_SORT_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
ORDER_BY

98 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_BUS_INFOTIP_ Sets the format of the info-tip for bus objects in the Navigator
FORMAT window.
Values: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Bus: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses
(subcategory), Bus info Tip format (option)
NAV_BUS_LABEL_ Sets the bus label format in the Navigator window using any
FORMAT combination of the following variables:
$(Name)
$(Path)
$(Type)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses
(subcategory), Bus label format (option)
NAV_CABLE_FILTER_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
USE_REGEXP
NAV_CABLE_INFOTIP_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the cable info-tip in the
FORMAT Navigator using predefined variables and formatting characters
between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so
on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: Cable: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Cables (group), Info Tip format (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 99


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_CABLE_LABEL_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the cable label in the
FORMAT Navigator using predefined variables and formatting characters
between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so
on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Cables (group), Label format (option)
NAV_CABLE_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the way the design entry tool
DESCENDING sorts cable nodes by names as follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right click on the cable node on the Cables tab and choose
Sort > Ascending or Descending.
NAV_CABLE_SORT_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
ORDER_BY
NAV_COMP_DISPLAY_ Sets how the Navigator displays component symbols as
MODE follows:
0 Display all component symbols. Default.
1 Display hierarchical only.
2 Dont display component symbols.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Display all components, Display hierarchical
only, or Dont display components (options)

100 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_COMP_FILTER_ Controls filtering for symbol nodes in the Navigator window as
USE_REGEXP follows:
0 Display all symbols (Wildcard). Default.
1 Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the
displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Navigator window > right-click a symbol > Filter
NAV_COMP_INFOTIP_ Configures the symbol info-tip in the Navigator using
FORMAT predefined variables and formatting characters between the
variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Custom), $(Name), $(Symbol), $(Type), $(Path),
$(Ref Designator)
Default: $(Name) $(Symbol)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
NAV_COMP_LABEL_ Configures symbol label in the Navigator window using
FORMAT predefined variables and formatting characters between the
variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Custom), $(Name), $(Symbol), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Symbols
(subcategory), Label format (option)
NAV_COMP_SORT_ Controls the symbols sort order (either descending or
DESCENDING ascending) in the Navigator window as follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a
component, and select Sort > Descending

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 101


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_COMP_SORT_ Controls the way symbol/component nodes are sorted in the
ORDER_BY Navigator window using one of the following values:
0 Custom.
1 Name. Default.
2 Symbol.
3 Type.
4 Path.
5 Ref Designator.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right-click on a symbol node > Sort > (option)
NAV_CONNECTOR_ xSD Systems Designer. Specify the use of regular expressions
FILTER_USE_REGEXP in filters for connector nodes as follows:
0 Wildcard. Default.
1 Regular expression.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Connectors tab, right-click a
connector > Filter. In the Filter connector dialog box, select
Reg. exp.
NAV_CONNECTOR_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the connector info-tip in
INFOTIP_FORMAT the Navigator using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon and so on.
Variables: $(Board), $(Connector Gender), $(Connector Id),
$(Connector Mating Part), $(Name), $(Part Number)
$(Ref Designator), $(Symbol Alias)
Default: $(Connector Id)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Connectors
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)

102 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_CONNECTOR_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the connector label in the
LABEL_FORMAT Navigator window using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon and so on.
Variables: $(Board), $(Connector Gender), $(Connector Id),
$(Connector Mating Part), $(Name), $(Part Number)
$(Ref Designator), $(Symbol Alias)
Default: $(Name):$(Part Number)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Connectors
(subcategory), Label format (option)
NAV_CONNECTOR_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the connectors sort order
SORT_DESCENDING (either descending or ascending) in the Navigator window as
follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a
connector, and choose Sort > Ascending or Descending
NAV_CONNECTOR_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls connector nodes sort order in
SORT_ORDER_BY the Navigator window, the Connectors tab, using one of the
following values:
0 Board. Default.
1 Connector Gender.
2 Connector Id.
3 Connector Mating Part.
4 Name.
5 Part Number.
6 Ref Designator.
7 Symbol Alias.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right-click on a connector node > Sort > (option).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 103


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_DISPLAY_SHEETS Depending on which selection you choose, this option displays
icons (shown in the following figure) for each sheet and
composite node within a design in the Navigator tree as
follows:
0 Always
1 Only if there is more than one

2 Never
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Display sheets (option)
NAV_FLAT_VIEW Controls how the design entry tool displays blocks in the
Navigator window as one of the following:
0 Hierarchical view format as shown in the following

example (default):
1 Flat view format as shown in the following example:

Can be set to Read-only? No.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Hierarchical view or Flatten view (options)
NAV_ Obsolete.
FUNCTIONBLOCK_
FILTER_USE_REGEXP
NAV_ Obsolete.
FUNCTIONBLOCK_
INFOTIP_FORMAT

104 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_ Obsolete.
FUNCTIONBLOCK_
LABEL_FORMAT
NAV_ Obsolete.
FUNCTIONBLOCK_
SORT_DESCENDING
NAV_ Obsolete.
FUNCTIONBLOCK_
SORT_ORDER_BY
NAV_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
DOCUMENTBLOCK_
FILTER_USE_REGEXP
NAV_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
DOCUMENTBLOCK_
INFOTIP_FORMAT
NAV_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
DOCUMENTBLOCK_
LABEL_FORMAT
NAV_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
DOCUMENTBLOCK_
SORT_DESCENDING
NAV_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
DOCUMENTBLOCK_
SORT_ORDER_BY
NAV_NET_DISPLAY Controls Navigator window display of nets and buses as
follows:
0 Does not display nets and buses.
1 Does display nets and buses. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses
(subcategory), Display nets and buses (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 105


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_NET_FILTER_USE_ Controls filtering for nets in the Navigator window as follows:
REGEXP 0 Display all symbols (Wildcard). Default.
1 Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the
displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window, right-click Net, click Filter,
NAV_NET_INFOTIP_ Configures the nets info-tip format in the Navigator window
FORMAT using predefined variables and formatting characters between
the variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: Net: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses
(subcategory), Net info tip format (option)
NAV_NET_LABEL_ Configures the nets label format in the Navigator window using
FORMAT predefined variables and formatting characters between the
variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Type), $(Path)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses
(subcategory), Net label format (option)
NAV_NET_SORT_ Sets the nets and buses sorting order in the Navigator window
DESCENDING as follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a net, and
select Sort > (option)

106 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_NET_SORT_ Sets the nets and buses sorting order in the Navigator window
ORDER_BY based on one of the following values:
0 Name. Default.
1 Type.
2 Path.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a net, and
select Sort > Name, Type or Path
NAV_SHEET_INFOTIP_ Sets the sheet info tip format in the Navigator window using
FORMAT predefined variables and formatting characters between the
variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Number)
Default: $(Number): $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
NAV_SHEET_LABEL_ Sets the sheet label format in the Navigator window using
FORMAT predefined variables and formatting characters between the
variables such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Number)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Label format (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 107


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_SHOW_REPLACE_ Controls whether the design entry tool displays a warning
SHEET_WARNING before replacing selected sheets during a copy in the Navigator
as follows:
0 Do not provide Warning before replacing selected
sheets.
1 Provide Warning before replacing selected sheets.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Warn before replacing selected sheets during
copy (option)
NAV_SPLICE_INFOTIP_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the splice info-tip format in
FORMAT the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: Splice: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals (category),
Splices (group), Info Tip format (option)
NAV_SPLICE_LABEL_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the splice label format in
FORMAT the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: Net: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Splices (group), Label format (option)

108 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_SPLICE_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the way splice nodes are
DESCENDING sorted by their name in the Navigator window.
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Right-click on the splice node and choose Sort > Ascending
or Descending
NAV_SPLICE_SORT_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
ORDER_BY
NAV_SUBSYSTEM_ Obsolete.
FILTER_USE_REGEXP
NAV_SUBSYSTEM_ Obsolete.
INFOTIP_FORMAT
NAV_SUBSYSTEM_ Obsolete.
LABEL_FORMAT
NAV_SUBSYSTEM_ Obsolete.
SORT_DESCENDING
NAV_SUBSYSTEM_ Obsolete.
SORT_ORDER_BY
NAV_SYSTEMDESIGN xSD Systems Designer. Specify the use of regular expressions
BLOCK_FILTER_USE_ in filters for block nodes on the Navigator window Blocks tab
REGEXP as follows:
0 Wildcard. Default.
1 Regular expression.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window, right-click a block > Filter. In the
Filter sdblocks dialog box, select Reg. exp.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 109


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_SYSTEMDESIGN xSD Systems Designer. Sets the block info tip format in the
BLOCK_INFOTIP_ Navigator window using any combination of the following
FORMAT variables:
$(Board)
$(Name)
$(Symbol)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(Name): $(Symbol)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Info Tip format (option)
NAV_SYSTEMDESIGN xSD Systems Designer. Sets the block label format in the
BLOCK_LABEL_ Navigator window using any combination of the following
FORMAT variables:
$(Board)
$(Name)
$(Symbol)
You can include formatting characters between the variables
such as space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Default: $(Board)$(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks
(subcategory), Label format (option)
NAV_SYSTEMDESIGN xSD Systems Designer. Controls the way blocks are sorted by
BLOCK_SORT_ their name in the Navigator window.
DESCENDING 0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window, right-click on the block node and
choose Sort > Ascending or Descending

110 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_SYSTEMDESIGN xSD Systems Designer. Controls block sort order by property
BLOCK_SORT_ORDER_ in the Navigator window Blocks tab as follows:
BY 0 Board. Default.
1 Name.
2 Symbol.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, right-click a System
Designer block and choose Sort > Board, Name, Symbol
NAV_WIRE_DISPLAY Internal use. Do not modify.
NAV_WIRE_FILTER_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls filtering for wire nodes in the
USE_REGEXP Navigator window as follows:
0 Display all wires (Wildcard). Default.
1 Use regular expressions in filters to constrain the
displayed list.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window, right-click Wire, click Filter,
NAV_WIRE_INFOTIP_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire info tip format in the
FORMAT Navigator window using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Cable)
Default: Wire:$(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Wire (group), Info Tip format (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 111


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_WIRE_LABEL_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the wire label format in the
FORMAT Navigator window using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon and so on.
Variables: $(Name), $(Cable)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Wires (group), Label format (option)
NAV_WIRE_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire sorting order in the
DESCENDING Navigator window as follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, Right-click a wire, and
choose Sort > (option)
NAV_WIRE_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire sorting order in the
ORDER_BY Navigator window based on one of the following values:
0 Cable. Default.
1 Name.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, Right-click a wire,
and select Sort > Cable or Name
NAV_WIREBUS_INFOTIP xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire bus info tip format in the
_FORMAT Navigator window using predefined variables and formatting
characters between the variables such as space, semicolon,
colon and so on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: Wire Bus: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Wire Buses (group), Info Tip format (option)

112 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NAV_WIREBUS_LABEL_ xSD Systems Designer. Configures the wire bus label format in
FORMAT the Navigator window using predefined variables and
formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.
Variable: $(Name)
Default: $(Name)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Signals
(subcategory), Wire Buses (group), Label format (option)
NAV_WIREBUS_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire bus sorting order in the
DESCENDING Navigator window as follows:
0 Ascending. Default.
1 Descending.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, Right-click a wire,
and select Sort > (option)
NAV_WIREBUS_SORT_ xSD Systems Designer. Sets the wire bus sorting order in the
ORDER_BY Navigator window based on one of the following values:
0 Cable. Default.
1 Name.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
In the Navigator window Project tree, Right-click a wire,
and select Sort > Cable or Name
NET_LENGTH Obsolete.
NET_LENGTH_HR Specifies the length of the stub automatically placed on symbol
pins at instantiation if you select the Add Components with
Nets Stubs option in DataBook.
Default: 1.016e+006
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Net Length (option)
NET_SPACING Obsolete.
NET_SPACING_HR Obsolete.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 113


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
NET_TOOLTIPS Controls the visibility of net tooltips (labels and properties) on
schematics as follows:
0 Hide net tooltips. Default.
1 Display net tooltips.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Nets (option)
NEW_ATTR_VIS Internal use only. Do not modify.
NEW_PROJECT_CL Stores the path to the last central library location entered in the
File > New > Project dialog box.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
NEW_PROJECT_ Sets a path to a default central library location that populates
DEFAULT_CL the File > New > Project dialog box. The File > New >
Project dialog box uses this value if NEW_PROJECT_CL is
empty.
Default:
${SDD_HOME}/standard/examples/SampleLib2007/
SampleLib.lmc
Note: The ${SDD_HOME} variable is set for the internal
tool environment when the design entry tool is started.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
NEW_PROJECT_ Sets a default location for new projects. The design entry tool
DEFAULT_LOCATION uses this path when NEW_PROJECT_LOCATION is empty. If
empty, the design entry tool uses ${WDIR}/DxProjects.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
NEW_PROJECT_ Stores the path to the newest project (File > New > Project)
LOCATION location.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
NEW_PROJECT_NAME Sets a default name for new projects. The design entry tool
adds a number suffix when needed.
Default: Project
Can be set to Read-only? No.
NON_UNDOABLE_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
MOVE
NO_UNDO_CBA_MOVE Internal use only. Do not modify.

114 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
OATCHECK Obsolete.
OATS Obsolete.
OATSTOOLS_FILE_ Obsolete.
BYPASS
ORIENTATION Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:
0 Landscape (default)
1 Portrait
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Sheet Orientation (section), Portrait or
Landscape (option)
PADS_ZOOM Sets the Pan and Zoom behavior to the PADSlayout tool
configuration:
0 Turns off the PADS style pan and zoom. Default.
1 Turns on the PADS style pan and zoom.
Note: This setting is used in conjunction with
DEFAULT_ZOOM and EXPEDITION_ZOOM. Only one
of these should be set to 1 (on) at a time.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan,
and Zoom (subcategory), PADS Pan and Zoom (option)
See also: Panning and Zooming PADS-Style - xDX Designer

PARTIAL_UNLIMITED_ Obsolete.
TEXT_LENGTH
PARTSLISTER_ Sets the name for the Part Lister tool configuration file.
DEFAULTS Default: PartsListerDefaults.ipl
Can be set to Read-only? No.
See also:The Part Lister Configuration File
PE_FLOW_MODE Internal use only. Do not modify.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 115


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
PIN_TOOLTIPS Controls the visibility of pin tooltips (labels and properties) on
schematics as follows:
0 Hide pin tooltips. Default.
1 Display pin tooltips.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Show tooltips
(section), Pins (option)
PINTYPE_ARROWS This option is used in conjunction with option
EURO_ARROWS to set the appearance of pintype arrows
between full arrow and half arrow (European) style as follows:
None .........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 0,
...................EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 0)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 1)
Notes:
The design entry tool only displays pintype arrows for
symbols that have block types of Module and Composite.
The design entry tool does not display pintype arrows for a
block type of Pin.
If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design
entry tool does not display Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. A list of
these are shown in Settings Dialog Box - Advanced topic.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Pintype Arrows
(option)
PLACEHOLDER Internal use only. Do not modify.

116 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
PNUMSON Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the
following:
0 The design entry tool hides Pin numbers. Default.
1 The design entry tool displays Pin numbers.
Note: This setting is used in conjunction with the
OBJECTS > ATTRIBUTE element > VISIBLE setting.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Common Properties
(option checked), Pin Numbers (option)
PRINTDEVICENAME Stores the last printer used from File > Print.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
File > Print, select a printer from the Name dropdown in the
Print dialog box
PRINTFORCEBLACK Controls the black and white print mode setting as follows:
0 Print output contains colors, depending on printer
settings.
1 Print output converts all output to black and white
colors only. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
File > Print, check Map Colors to Black in the Print dialog
box
PRINTHIERARCHY Obsolete.
PRINTING Internal use only. Do not modify.
PRINTLINETHICKNESS Sets a minimum line thickness that the design entry tool uses
when printing.
Default: 1
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
File > Print, enter a Minimum line width in the Print dialog
box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 117


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
PRINTORIENTATION Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used
Portrait or Landscape setting as follows:
1 Portrait. Default.
2 Landscape.
GUI access:
File > Print, click Properties in the Print dialog box, click
the Printing Shortcuts tab, select Orientation
PRINTPAPERSIZE Internal use only. Do not modify. This entry stores the last-used
paper size.
PRINTSCALE Obsolete.
PRINTSCALEFACTOR Sets a scale factor for the print output. Use a factor of 1 to scale
the print output to 100% of normal. A factor of .9 scales the
output to 90%.
Default: 1
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
File > Print, choose Scale factor in the Print dialog box
Zoom section, use the up and down arrows to choose a scale
factor
PRINTSCALETYPE Obsolete.
PRINTXMARGIN Obsolete.
PRINTYMARGIN Obsolete.
PROJECT_PLOT_ON_PC Obsolete.

118 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
PROPAGATE_PORTS_ Control how the design entry tool handles missing ports to a
TO_SCH lower-level schematic as follows:
0 You must manually add missing ports to a lower-level
schematic from a block using Add > Missing Ports.
1 Any pins that you add to a block automatically causes
corresponding ports to be added to the lower-level
schematic when you execute (right-click) > Push
Schematic from the block. In addition, when you place
parts containing multiple part database slots (multiple parts
in one package), the placed part automatically assigns a slot
number and corresponding pin values.
See also:Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down
Design
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Propagate Ports to
Schematic (option)
PROPERTIES_TOOLTIP Obsolete.
RB_USE_HOST_DESIGN_ Sets the following Constraint Manager actions with reuse
RULES blocks:
0 The Constraint Manager tool merges clearances and
widths design rules with the reuse block design. Default.
1 The Constraint Manager tool uses the host design rules
for clearances and widths instead of merging them with the
reuse block design.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Reuse Blocks Use
Host Design Rules (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 119


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
REMOVE_ Sets the design entry tool action for mismatched Symbol/Pin
MISMATCHED_PORTS port connectors as one of the following:
Ask You are given a choice at the time the mismatch is
found. Default.
Yes Delete the found mismatched port connectors.
No Do not delete the found mismatched port connectors.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Delete mismatched
Symbol/Pin port connectors (option)

120 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
RESET_SCALE_ON_ Controls the way the design entry tool handles a scaled symbol
SYM_UPDATE as follows:
0 When you execute Tools > Update Symbols, the
design entry tool maintains the original local scale factor of
any updated symbols, and also applies any changed scale
factor from the library. Default. For example:
a. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry
tool.
b. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that
symbol to 0.8.
c. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool applies both the local scale
factor and the Symbol Editor scale factor to the updated
symbol. The design entry tool rescales the symbol to
0.64.
1 When you execute Tools > Update Symbols, the
design entry tool sets the local symbol scale factor to 1 for
any updated symbols. Using the same scenario in the
previous example:
a. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry
tool.
b. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that
symbol to 0.8.
c. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool resets the local scale factor
to 1 on all symbols requiring an update. For this example,
the updated symbol in the design entry tool reflects only
the 0.8 scale factor set in the Symbol Editor.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Reset Component
Scale on Symbol Update (option)
See also:
Scale Symbol Dialog Box (PADS DX Designer Symbol
Editor)
Updating Sheets With Changed Library Symbols

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 121


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
RNUMSON Sets reference designator visibility on schematics as one of the
following:
0 The design entry tool hides reference designators.
1 The design entry tool displays reference designators.
Default.
Note: This setting is used in conjunction with the
OBJECTS > ATTRIBUTE element > VISIBLE setting.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Common Properties
(option checked), Reference Designators (option)
XREF_ANNOTATION_ Sets Pin number visibility on schematics as one of the
ON following:
0 Do not display cross reference annotations in the entire
design. Default.
1 Display cross reference annotations in the entire
design.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Xref Annotation
(option)
ROUTE Specifies the routing mode for new connections. Valid settings
are as follows:
0 Straight
1 Orthogonal
2 Avoidance (default)
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Route Mode (option)
See also:
Setting Net and Bus Preferences - xDX Designer

122 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
RULERS_VISIBLE xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor
rulers as follows:
0 Do not display Local Symbol Editor rulers. Default.
1 Display Local Symbol Editor rulers.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Symbol Editor (category), Display
(subcategory), Rulers (option)
SCALEFACTOR Provides a scale factor for the selected Font Style that is applied
to the Size property value that appears on all text objects.
Default: 1.0 (100%)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Font Styles
(subcategory), Scale factor (option)
SCHEMATIC_TABS Controls schematic sheet tabs as follows:
0 The design entry tool displays each schematic sheet as
a separate window.
1 The design entry tool displays each schematic sheet as
a tabbed window. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No
GUI access:
Window > Schematic Tabs
SCOPE Internal use only. Do not modify.
SD_AUTOMATIC_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls how the tool updates
CONNECTIVITY_ connectivity when you move a System Level Block from one
UPDATE board to another as follows:
0 Requires you to manually update connectivity.
1 Automatically updates connectivity. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), System Designer
Automatic Connectivity Update (option)
SD_CONNECTOR_PIN_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
SPACING
SDISTANCE Obsolete. See SDISTANCE_HR.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 123


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SDISTANCE_HR Specify a positive integer to set the number of pixels that
determine the selection distance boundary during object
selection on a schematic.
You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
The default value of 254000 sets the increment to 2.54mm, or
0.1in.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Selection Distance
[<Units>] (option)
SE_PIN_LENGTH xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor
default pin length in grid points units.
Default: 2 (grid points)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Symbol Editor (category), Pins (section),
Default length (option)
SE_PIN_SPACING xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor
default pin spacing in grid points units.
Default: 1 (grid point)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Symbol Editor (category), Pins (section),
Default spacing (option)
SE_AUTOMATIC_PIN_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor
SIDE automatic pin side recognition as follows:
0 You must manually rotate the pin if it is not oriented
correctly to the symbol border.
1 Enables the automatic pin side recognition so that
when you place a pin on a symbol border, the pin rotates
itself based on which side you choose. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.

124 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SE_PIN_PROPERTY_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor pin
POSITION property position.
Default: Below pin
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Symbol Editor (category), Properties
(subcategory), Pin property position
SE_SYMBOL_ xSD Systems Designer. Controls the Local Symbol Editor
PROPERTY_POSITION property position.
Default: Below symbol
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Symbol Editor (category), Properties
(subcategory), Symbol property position
SELBORDERS Controls whether borders are selected as follows:
0 During an area selection, the design entry tool does not
select borders.
1 During an area selection, the design entry tool includes
borders in the selection. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
View > Other Windows > Selection Filter, Borders option
SELNAMEON Internal use only. Do not modify.
SELRIPPERS Controls whether rippers are selected as follows:
0 During an area selection, the design entry tool does not
select rippers.
1 During an area selection, the design entry tool includes
rippers in the selection. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
View > Other Windows > Selection Filter, Rippers option

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 125


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SEPARATE_FLIP_ Controls the Flip or Mirror operation when more than one
MIRROR object is selected as follows:
0 The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group
of objects against the symmetry axis of the entire selected
group. Default.
1 The design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group
of objects against each objects symmetry axis.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Flip/Mirror objects
separately (option)
SHEETSIZE Sets the default sheet size for all new schematics and symbols.
Specify one of the following sizes:
(Note: The following values correspond to the SIZES
definitions in Table 2-10 on page 136:)
0 A ()
1 B (, default)
2 C ()
3 D ()
4 E ()
5 A4 ()
6 A3 ()
7 A2 ()
8 A1 ()
9 A0 ()
10 Custom - user-definable width and height using , the
HEIGHT and WIDTH values you specify.
11 F ()
See also:
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size (option)

126 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SHEETZONINGGRID Sets the visibility of schematic zoning grid shown in the figure,
Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid as one of the
following:
0 Hide the schematic zoning grid. Default.
1 Show the schematic zoning grid.
See also:
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones - xDX Designer

Can be set to Read-only? No.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Zoning Grid (option)
SHOW_ALIGNMENT_ Controls dynamic alignment marker visibility when moving
MARKS symbols:
0 Do not show the dynamic alignment markers. Default.
1 Show the dynamic alignment markers.
See also:
Dynamically Aligning Components - PADS DX Designer
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access: Grid toolbar, Show Alignment Markers
button
SNAPTOPIN Sets net route snapping to the nearest pin of a specified
component as follows:
0 Snap net to pin is off.
1 Snap net to pin is on. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets
(subcategory), Snap Nets to Pin (option)
SORTON Obsolete.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 127


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
STAGGER_DISTANCE_ Sets the distance the design entry tool uses when staggering
HR nets. If the value is too small, overlapping nets could result as
shown in the following
figure:

Enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default


value of 9.08mm or 0.3575in appears in the file as 908000
(9.08mm * 100,000).
STROKE_DELAY Specifies how much time the design entry tool allows for the
user to complete a stroke.
Default: 200 (milliseconds)
Can be set to Read-only? No.
STROKES Turns on or off the ability for you to draw predefined patterns
in the schematic window using the mouse, which map to
commands or functions as follows:
0 Turns off strokes.
1 Turns on strokes. Default.
See also:
MIDSTROKE control which mouse button draws the
strokes.
Key Bindings and Strokes on page 433
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan,
and Zoom (subcategory), Strokes off (option)
SG_PROPERTIES Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINS_IN Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINS_OUT Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PIN_LABEL_SIZE Internal use only. Do not modify.

128 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
SG_PIN_LENGTH Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PIN_SPACING Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_SYM_ATTR_SIZE Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_ANALOG Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_IN Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_BI Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_OCM Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_OEL Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_OUT Internal use only. Do not modify.
SG_PINTYPE_TRI Internal use only. Do not modify.
TABSSHEET_NAMES_ Controls what information the design entry tool displays in the
ONLY schematic tabs as follows:
0 The design entry tool displays the schematic name
followed by the sheet name on schematic tabs as shown
below:
Default.

1 The design entry tool displays only the schematic sheet


name on schematic tabs as shown below:

Can be set to Read-only? Yes.


GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Display Only Sheet
Names in Tabs (option)
TEXTON Obsolete.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 129


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
TEXTORIGIN Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and
properties you create. Valid values (options) are:
0 Lower center
1 Lower left
2 Lower right
3 Middle center (default)
4 Middle left
5 Middle right
6 Upper center
7 Upper left
8 Upper right
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Text
(subcategory), Default Text Origin (option)
TEXTSIZE Obsolete. Use TEXTSIZE_HR.
TEXTSIZE_HR Sets text size for all new text, labels, and properties you create.
Enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000. The default
value of 2.54mm or 0.10in appears in the file as 254000
(2.54mm * 100,000).
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Text
(subcategory), Default Text Size (option)
TEXT_THRESHOLD Internal use only. Do not modify.
TIPOFTHEDAY Controls how the Tip of the Day is displayed as follows:
0 Do not display the tip of the day when you start the
design entry tool.
1 Display the tip of the day when you start the design
entry tool. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Help > Tip of the Day
TIPOFTHEDAYFILEPOS Internal use only. Do not modify.
TIPOFTHEDAY Internal use only. Do not modify.
TIMESTAMP
UNDO Internal use only. Do not modify.
UNDO_LEVEL Internal use only. Do not modify.

130 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
UNIQUE_LABEL Controls the design entry tool labeling behavior when you copy
nets, components, or pins as follows:
0 Do not automatically create a unique label during a
copy operation. Default.
1 The design entry tool automatically creates a unique
label during a copy operation.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Advanced (category), Unique names on
copy (option)
UNIT Sets the design entry tool unit of measurement as one of the
following:
mm millimeters
cm centimeters
in inches (default)
Once set, the design entry tool uses the unit of measurement
you have chosen for measurements such as SHEETSIZE
(Default Sheet Size) and GRID_HR (Grid Spacing).
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Unit (option)
UNLIMITED_TEXT Internal use only. Do not modify.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
PAGENUMBERS Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
ANNOTATIONS Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
BUS_RIPPERS Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
BUS_SIGNALS Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
PROPERTIES Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
RANGE Update Other Objects.
UPDATE_OBJECTS_SD_ Internal use only. Do not modify. Stores settings for Tools >
RANGE Update Other Objects.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 131


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
USEEXCLUDEINFO Controls which sheets (if any) to exclude from printing or PDF
generation as follows:
0 Do not exclude designated sheets from printout.
1 Exclude designated sheets from printout. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
See also:
Excluding Sheets from Printing - xDX Designer -
GUI access:
File > Print, Print dialog box, Use exclusion info checkbox
USERNAME xSD Systems Designer (only).
Specify the owner name you want to apply to an objects
Owner property. By default, an objects owner property is the
operating system user name (value="$osusername"). This key
only appears in the local DxDesigner.xml file if the User name
is not the operating system user name.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
Setup > Settings, User Information (category),
Use operating system user name and User name
VALUESON Obsolete.
VERIFY_EXPEDITION_ Obsolete.
CONFIG_FILE
VERIFY_NETLIST_ Obsolete.
CONFIG_FILE
VERIFY_ Obsolete.
SYSTEMDESIGN_
CONFIG_FILE
WHITEBACKGROUND_ Internal use only. Do not modify.
MODE
WIREON Internal use only. Do not modify.
WIR_CONT_CHAR Obsolete.
WIR_FILE_ Obsolete.
CONTINUATION
WRITE_HIRES_ Obsolete.
SYMBOL_FILES

132 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
XPROB_HLU_ENABLE Controls cross probing to highlight unplaced components as
follows:
0 Do not highlight unplaced components during cross
probing.
1 Highlight unplaced components during cross probing.
Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Highlight
unplaced components (section), Enable (option)
XPROB_HLU_ Controls cross probing to highlight unplaced components only
LIMITOPEN on open schematics or ICTs as follows:
0 Do not limit the highlight of unplaced components
during cross probing to only open schematics or ICTs.
1 Limit the highlight of unplaced components during
cross probing to only open schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Highlight
unplaced components (section), Limit to already open
documents (option)
XPROB_SEL_ Use this setting to limit cross probing between the design entry
LIMITOPEN tool and other applications, such as xPCB Layout as follows:
0 Allow cross probing with other applications to any
applicable the design entry tool schematic or ICT.
1 Limits cross probing with other applications to just
open the design entry tool schematics or ICTs. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Limit selection
to already open documents (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 133


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
XPROB_SEL_ (This setting is not applicable unless
LIMITOPEN_COMP XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing
between the design entry tool and other applications, such as
xPCB Layout as follows:
0 Do not allow cross probing components on already
open documents. Default.
1 Allows cross probing with components on already
open documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Limit selection
to already open documents (option checked), for
Components (option)
XPROB_SEL_ (This setting is not applicable unless
LIMITOPEN_NET XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing
between the design entry tool and other applications, such as
xPCB Layout as follows:
0 Do not allow cross probing with signal nets on already
open documents. Default.
1 Allows cross probing with signal nets on already open
documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Limit selection
to already open documents (option checked), for Signal Nets
(options)

134 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
XPROB_SEL_ (This setting is not applicable unless
LIMITOPEN_ XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
GLOBALNET Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing
between the design entry tool and other applications, such as
xPCB Layout as follows:
0 Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already
open documents. Default.
1 Allows cross probing with global nets on already open
documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Limit selection
to already open documents (option checked), for Global Nets
(option)
XPROB_SEL_ (This setting is not applicable unless
LIMITOPEN_PIN XPROB_SEL_LIMITOPEN=1.)
Use this setting to further specify limits for cross probing
between the design entry tool and other applications, such as
xPCB Layout as follows:
0 Do not allow cross probing with global nets on already
open documents. Default.
1 Allows cross probing with global nets on already open
documents.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Limit selection
to already open documents (option checked), for Pins
(option)
XPROB_SEL_ZOOMFIT This setting controls whether the design entry tool zooms in on
the selected, cross-probed object. This setting also works with
dynamic links, to zoom in on the target object when a link is
traversed.
0 Do not zoom in to selected objects during cross
probing. Default.
1 Zoom in to selected objects during cross probing.
Can be set to Read-only? No.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category), Zoom Fit to
Selected objects (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 135


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-9. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
XTRAERRS Control the design capture tool Check utility as follows:
0 Do not provide additional Check utility testing.
1 Provide additional Check utility testing and error
reporting operations. Default.
Can be set to Read-only? Yes.

Table 2-10. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SIZES Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
A_SIZE_HR Predefines the A sheet default size used by = 0 as the following:
21590000 HEIGHT (215.90mm or 8.5in)
27940000 WIDTH (297.4mm or 11.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A (option)
B_SIZE_HR Predefines the B sheet default size used by = 1 as the following:
27940000 HEIGHT (279.4mm or 11.0in)
43180000 WIDTH (431.8mm or 17.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = B (option)
C_SIZE_HR Predefines the C sheet default size used by = 2 as the following:
43180000 HEIGHT (431.8mm or 17.0in)
55880000 WIDTH (558.8mm or 22.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = C (option)

136 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-10. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SIZES Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
D_SIZE_HR Predefines the D sheet default size used by = 3 as the following:
55880000 HEIGHT (558.8mm or 22.0in)
86360000 WIDTH (863.6mm or 34.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = D (option)
E_SIZE_HR Predefines the E sheet default size used by = 4 as the following:
86360000 HEIGHT (863.6mm or 34.0in)
111760000 WIDTH (1,117.6mm or 44.0in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = E (option)
A4_SIZE_HR Predefines the A4 sheet default size used by = 5 as the
following:
20999999.91 HEIGHT (210.0mm or 8.268in)
29699999.02 WIDTH (297.0mm or 11.693in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A4 (option)
A3_SIZE_HR Predefines the A3 sheet default size used by = 6 as the
following:
29699999.02 HEIGHT (297.0mm or 11.693in)
41999999.82 WIDTH (420.0mm or 16.535in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A3 (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 137


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-10. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SIZES Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
A2_SIZE_HR Predefines the A2 sheet default size used by = 7 as the
following:
41999999.82 HEIGHT (420.0mm or 16.535in)
59400000.58 WIDTH (594.0mm or 23.386in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A2 (option)
A1_SIZE_HR Predefines the A1 sheet default size used by = 8 as the
following:
59400000.58 HEIGHT (594.0mm or 23.386in)
84099999.44 DxDesigner.xml Miscellaneous DxDesigner
Settings Section WIDTH (841.0mm or 33.110in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A1 (option)
A0_SIZE_HR Predefines the A0 sheet default size used by = 9 as the
following:
84099999.44 HEIGHT (841.0mm or 33.110in)
118900000.96 WIDTH (1189.0mm or 46.811in)
The value is set as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = A0 (option)

138 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-10. DxDesigner.xml DxDesigner SIZES Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
Z_SIZE_HR Sets a custom sheet size for new schematics. If value="10", then
the design entry tool uses the following the HEIGHT and
WIDTH settings you define in the SIZES section:
<size name="Z_SIZE_HR">
<key name="HEIGHT" value="your_value"/>
<key name="WIDTH" value="your_value"/>
</size>

You need to enter a value as: (value in millimeters) * 100,000.


The default HEIGHT and WIDTH value of 2540000 sets the
sheetsize to 254mm or 10in square.
GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets
(subcategory), Size = Custom (option)

Table 2-11. DxDesigner.xml Databook SETTINGS Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXDB_AUTO_ 1 Default.
QUERY_LIBRARIES
DXDB_AUTO_SIZE_ 0 Default.
RESULTS_COLUMNS
DXDB_COLLAPSE_ 0 Default.
SYMBOLS
DXDB_CONNECT_ 0 Default.
TABLES_WHEN_
LOADING
DXDB_DETECT_BAD_ 1 Default.
CRITERIA
DXDB_DISPLAY_ 1 Default.
NUMERICS_WITH_
MAGNITUDE
DXDB_ENABLE_COLUMN 0 Default.
_TOOTIPS
DXDB_ENABLE_DMS_ 1001 Default.
CONNECTOR
DXDB_IGNORE_ 0 Default.
COMPOSITES

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 139


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Table 2-11. DxDesigner.xml Databook SETTINGS Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
DXDB_POSITION_ALL_ 0 Default.
LIBRARIES_FIRST
DXDB_QUERY_RESULTS_ 400 Default.
LIMIT
DXDB_QUERY_TIMEOUT 60 Default.
DXDB_SEARCH_DISPLAY 0 Default.
_PROPERTIY_NAMES
DXDB_STRIP_FROM_ PWD Default.
CONNECT_STRING
DXDB_UPDATE_TABLES_ 0 Default.
WHEN_LOADING
DXDB_USE_CACHE 0 Default.
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0x000000 Default.
TEXT
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0x640064 Default.
LINK_TEXT
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0x0000ff Default.
HIGHLIGHT
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0xf5f5e1 Default.
EVEN_BCKGND
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0xfffff5 Default.
ODD_BCKGND
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0x000000 Default.
CRITERIA_TEXT
DXDB_COLOR_SEARCH_ 0xe9e9e9 Default.
CRITERIA_BCKGND
DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_ 0x000000 Default.
TEXT
DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_ 0xebebe1 Default.
EVEN_BCKGND
DXDB_COLOR_VERIFY_ 0xf5f5eb Default.
ODD_BCKGND
DXDB_DO_NOT_STORE_ 0 Default.
USER_CREDENTIALS
DXDB_DROPBOX_ Null Default.
LOCATION

140 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
DxDesigner.xml File Format

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables
Read-only User-Preference Settings

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 141


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Part Lister Initialization File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer Part Lister
A Part Lister initialization file (<name>.ipl) stores Tools > Part Lister settings. The Part Lister
both reads from, and writes to a <name>.ipl file.
Format
A Partlister.ipl file has the following structure:

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<PartListerConfiguration version="3">
<!-- Miscellaneous Part Lister settings, see the following tables for
more information -->
<Entry name="name" value="CORPORATE"/>
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN"/>
<Entry name="outputFileExt" value="txt"/>
<Entry name="pagination" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="pagelength" value="150"/>
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" "/>
<Entry name="delimiterbefore" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="delimiterafter" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="addTitleRow" value="YES"/>
<Entry name="ignoreColumnWidths" value="NO"/>
<Entry name="open" value="YES"/>

<Header>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Header>
<Columns>
<!-- See the following tables for more information -->
</Columns>

<Preprocessor> <!-- This section is optional -->


<!--The following strips out the | symbol + suffix from a Part Number
See Ignoring DA/BS Piped Suffixes from PartNumbers - xDX Designer
--> <Rule attribute="Part Number">
<Logic regexp="(.*)\|(.*)" value="\1"/>
</Rule>

<!-- The following lines excludes part with CLASS=EMB attribute


See Excluding Parts That Have the Legacy CLASSAttribute -->
<Rule attribute="CLASS" name="Part List Exclude">
<Logic regexp="EMB" value="True"/>
</Rule>
</Preprocessor>
</PartListerConfiguration>

The lines that define miscellaneous configuration settings in the Partlister.ipl file have the
following format:

<Entry name="setting_name" value="setting" />

142 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Note
You should only change the setting value.

If the readonly=1 option has been applied to an entry name in the Partlister.ipl file, such as:
<Entry name="outputFormat" value="PLAIN" readonly=1/>, the associated setting cannot
be changed in the Tools > Part Lister dialog box.

Parameters
The following tables list the setting names and describes the editable parameter values in
each section of the <name>.ipl file:
o Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Header Section
o Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section

Table 2-12. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
outputVersion Defines the output version. Do not change.
1 Default
outputFormat Set the Part Lister report output format as one of the following:
Text File Produces a text file. Default
HTML Produces an HTML file.
EXCEL Produces an Excel spreadsheet.
See also: Part Lister output format description
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > General (tab), (report) Output format
(option)
pagination Set the Part Lister output to paginate into separate pages as follows:
NO Do not split into pages. Default.
YES Separate into separate pages, with a length determined by
the pagelength setting.
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), (Text Output) Split into
pages (option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 143


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-12. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
pagelength If pagination=YES, set the number of lines per page for the Part Lister
output.
65535 lines per page. Default.
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), (Text Output) Split into
pages, ____lines each (option)
delimiter Specifies a delimiter character (such as pipe | ) between columns.
Example:
<Entry name="delimiter" value=" |"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Delimiter (option)
See also: Delimiter - Examples
delimiterbefore Controls the column delimiter placement in front of the first column
as one of the following:
NO Do not add the column delimiter in front of the first
column. Default.
YES Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab) > (Delimiter) > Before first
column
delimiterafter Controls the column delimiter placement after the last column as one
of the following:
NO Do not add the column delimiter after the last column.
Default,
YES Add the column delimiter in front of the first column.
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab) > (Delimiter) > After last
column (option)
addTitleRow Controls the Titles row that appears at the top of each column in the
Part Lister output as follows:
NO Do not add the Titles row at the top of each column.
YES Add the Titles row at the top of each column. Default,
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), (Header) Add Title Rows
(option)
See also: (Header) Add Title Rows - Examples

144 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-12. Part Lister Initialization File Miscellaneous Settings Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
ignoreColumnWidths Controls the Part Lister use of column width settings in Text Output
as follows:
NO Do not use the column width settings.
YES Use the column width settings. Default,
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), (Text Output) Ignore
Column Widths (option)
See also: The examples in the Ignore Column Widths description

Table 2-13. Part Lister Initialization File Header Section


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
(Lines in Header Specify a Part Lister table header by adding lines in this Header
section) section such as the following:
text <Line text="Part Lister output for $(NAME)"/>
<Line text="Generated on $(DATE)"/>

The Part Lister provides the following fields to help you customize
the header:
$(NAME) - Name of the Project, Board or Block (see example
below)
$(DATE) - As shown in the example below
$(TIME) - such as 14:45:28 (hh:mm:ss)
$(VARIANT) - If PADS DX Designer is in the Variant mode (it
means that the variant view was created in the Variant
Managerwindow), this field displays the data specified in the
current variant.
Tip: If you want to add a blank line between the Part Lister output
Header and the first row, use the following blank line as the final
header line:
<Line text=" "/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Advanced (tab), Header (text box)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 145


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
dec If type = PROPERTY, use the dec (decimal) argument to define the number of
decimal places (digits after decimal point). If the value displayed in the column
is not a real number, this setting is ignored.
If you specify 0 as dec value, all numbers in the column are rounded to the
nearest integer value.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Cost" label="Cost"
width="8" sum="YES" dec="2" key="SECONDARY"
display="Compress"/>

GI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Decimal (option)
delimiter If type = PROPERTY and display = Full or display = Compressed, this setting
defines the delimiter used if a list of values is displayed in a column. May be
any string of characters. The default is the space character.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Id" label="test"
width="10" justification="RIGHT" sum="NO" display="Full"
delimiter=", "/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), List Delimiter
(option)

146 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
display If Column type = PROPERTY, use the display setting to configure the column
display mode as one of the following:
Full Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value is repeated the appropriate number of times.
Slots Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value is repeated the appropriate number of times. The slot values are
appended after a slash character (such as: U1/1, U1/2, U2/1).
Compress All values are sorted alphanumerically. Repeated values are
removed. Then ranges such as A1, A2, A3 are shortened to A1-A3. Slots are
never appended.
Unique All values are sorted alphanumerically. Repeated values are
removed. A list such as IC1, IC1, IC2, IC3, IC3, IC5 is shortened to IC1,
IC2, IC3, IC5.
Total The column displays the total of all numeric values for all objects.
Non-numeric values are ignored.
Default: Compress
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Mode (pulldown)
justification Use this argument to set the alignment of the column as one of the following:
CENTER
LEFT
RIGHT
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part

Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"

key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Display (section), Align (pulldown)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 147


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
key If type = PROPERTY, set key to one of the following:
PRIMARY (Required) This sort key must be applied to at least one
column of type PROPERTY, such as the default column Part Number as
shown in the following Example 1. If a Primary Key is not present on one of
the columns, the Part Lister output will be blank.
The purpose of this key is to define which column is used as the primary
sort.
Secondary Key This secondary sort key can be applied to at least one
column of type Property, such as the default column Ref Designator as
shown in the following Example 2.
The purpose of this key is to determine which column to sort on if there are
identical values listed in the Primary Key row.
Example:
1. <Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number"
label="Part Number" width="15" sort="ASCENDING"
priority="2" key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
2. <Column type="PROPERTY" property="Ref Designator"
label="Ref Designator" width="15" key="SECONDARY"
display="Compress"/>
--------EXAMPLE REPORT OUTPUT USING ABOVE SETTINGS-------
|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |
-----------------------------------------------------------
| 1 | 1 |74LS08-SMD |U2 |1.32 |
...
| 6 | 3 |R47-2512 |R1-R3 |0.50, |
| | | | |0.50,0.50 |
| | | | |--------- |
| | | | |8.14 |

148 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
priority If Column type = PROPERTY and key=PRIMARY, and in addition, if
sort=ASCENDING or sort=DESCENDING, the priority argument determines
the sorting priority when more than one column has sort = ASCENDING or sort
= DESCENDING.
The priority value is set as an integer in the range 0-9. The value 9 means the
highest priority. The Part Lister first sorts the column with the highest priority.
If duplicate values occur in the first column, the Part Lister continues the sort
using lower priority columns. If there is more than one column with the same
priority, the order of column definitions (from top to bottom in the file)
determines the priority.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number"
label="Part Number" width="14" justification="LEFT"
sort="ASCENDING" key="PRIMARY" priority="5"
display="Compress"/>
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Value" label="Value"
width="5" justification="LEFT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" priority="4" display="Compress"/>

See also: BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With One or More Columns
Designated as Primary
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Sort (section), Priority (field)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 149


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
property If the Column type = PROPERTY, use this property argument to specify one
of the Common Properties (.prp), which represents the row values for this
column. Additionally, this field supports the following properties not in the list
of Common Properties:
Name
Id
Partition
Symbol Name
Sheet
Sheet Number
Block
Architecture (applicable to Systems Design projects only)
Function (applicable to Systems Design projects only)
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Property (pulldown)
sum Sets the column to total the numerical value of all data in the column as follows:
NO Does not total the numerical value of all data in the column. This is
the same behavior as leaving the sum setting out of the Column definition.
YES Totals the numerical value of all data in the column.
If the result of the summing produces more than the maximum number of
digits allowed for a particular field (specified by width), the sum total is
truncated on the right side. To indicate that a truncation has occurred, the
Part Lister places a hyphen ( -) on the right side of the total.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Cost" label="Cost"
width="9" justification="LEFT" sum="YES" dec="2"
display="Full"/>

150 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
sort If type = PROPERTY and key=PRIMARY
Set whether the output is sorted by the contents of the column as one of the
following:
None If you leave the sort setting out of the column specification, the
column does not determine the sorting order.
ASCENDING The column contents sorts in ascending order
DESCENDING The column contents sorts in descending order
The sort is alphanumeric (meaning that A2 goes before A11) and case-
insensitive.
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" sort="ASCENDING" priority="2"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>

See also:
BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With One or More Columns Designated
as Primary
GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Sort (section)
text If the Column type = TEXT, use this text argument to specify a text value that
is displayed in the column rows.
Example:
<Column type="TEXT" label="test" width="10"
justification="RIGHT" text="test
text"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Text (field)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 151


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Table 2-14. Part Lister Initialization File Columns Section (cont.)


Setting Setting Description and Setting Values
Name
type Choose a column type as one of the following:
NUMBER The column represents sequential row numbers.
QUANTITY The column represents quantities.
PROPERTY The column represents the value of a pre-defined property,
as selected in the Property pull-down list.
TEXT The column represents text. Use the setting text= to add the
text.
Examples:
<Column type="NUMBER" label="#" width="3" visible="NO"/>
<Column type="QUANTITY" label="QTY" width="5"/>
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>
<Column type="TEXT" label="test" width="10"
justification="RIGHT" text="test text"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab), Type (pulldown)
visible Set the column visibility in the output as follows:
NO Hide the column in Part Lister output.
YES Make the column visible in the Part Lister output.
Note that even if a column is hidden, it still may be used for sort order.
Example:
<Column type="NUMBER" label="#" width="3" visible="NO"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab) > Display (section), Hidden (option)
width Use this argument to specify the column width in characters. The value is an
integer in the range 1-1000. Any text longer than the specified width is right-
justified, and the last character is replaced with a hyphen (-).
Example:
<Column type="PROPERTY" property="Part Number" label="Part
Number" width="15" justification="RIGHT" sort="ASCENDING"
key="PRIMARY" display="Compress"/>

GUI access:
Tools > Part Lister > Columns (tab) > Display (section), Width (option)

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

152 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
Part Lister Initialization File Format

Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns


Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Support Files and Variables
Creating a Part Lister Configuration File

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 153


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

project.prj File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer
The design entry tool creates a <project>.prj file under each project folder when you open a
new project to hold the project-specific settings and configurations.
Format
A <project>.prj is divided into major sections as shown in Figure 2-8. (Indentation is provided
in the example for readability.)

Figure 2-8. Project File Section Structure

SECTION DesignInfo
<!-- Also see table Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION iCDB
<!-- Also see Project File Settings - iCDB Section--!>
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION FlowSettings
KEY FlowType "<value>" <!-- value= DX | NETLIST | SystemDesign --!>
ENDSECTION
SECTION Template_Design
. . .
ENDSECTION
SECTION ICXProInfo
KEY ICXProDir ICXPro
ENDSECTION
SECTION <board_name> <!-- Also see table Project File Settings -
<board_name> Section --!>
. . .
ENDSECTION

Parameters
Table 2-15. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section
Setting Name Setting Description
Independent Netlist project only
Libraries LIST IndependentLibraries
VALUE "DIR [W] . (my_netlist_proj)"
ENDLIST

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Symbol Libraries

154 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 2-15. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
BorderSymbols Path to borders.ini file such as in following example:
KEY BorderSymbols "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\borders.ini"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Border Symbols (option)
Bus_Contents Path to busconts.ini file such as in following example:
KEY Bus_Contents "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\busconts.ini"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Bus Contents (option)
CentralLibrary (Not applicable to Netlist project)
Path to <library>.lmc file such as in following example:
KEY Central_Library "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\My_Lib.lmc"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Central Library Path (option)
CnsFileName Netlist project only
Path to Constraints Definition file as in the following example:
KEY CnsFileName
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\isis\expedition.c
ns

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Constraints Definition (option)
DBCFile Path to DataBook <library>.dbc file such as in following example:
KEY DBCFile "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\My_Lib_DB.dbc"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), DataBook (category)
DxD_Version Lists the PADS DX Designer software version that last edited this project
as in the following example:
KEY DxD_Version "7.9.4"
FrontEnd KEY FrontEndSnapshot "DxD"
Snapshot

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 155


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 2-15. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
LayoutID Netlist project only
Specifies the Layout Tool such as in following example:
KEY LayoutID "<ID>"

<ID> = one of the following:


ALLEGRO14
ALLEGRO15
ALLEGRO16
EXPEDITION
PADS2007
RINF (Zuken Visula Rinf)
RINF_VDP (Zuken Visula Rinf VDP)

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Layout Tool (option)
HdlUtilsConfig (Not applicable to Netlist project)
File Specifies the location of the HDL utility configuration hdlutils.ini file as in
the following example:
KEY HdlUtilsConfigFile "hdlutils.ini"
NetName Specifies the Net Name Delimiter as either None (remove the line), ( ),
Delimiter or [ ] such as in following example:
KEY NetNameDelimiter "()"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Net Name Delimiter (subcategory)
NumberingType Specifies the Sheet Numbering schemes as either INDEPTH or
VERTICAL as in the following example:
KEY NumberingType "INDEPTH"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Sheet Numbering (subcategory)
OrderFileName KEY OrderFileName ".\"

156 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 2-15. Project File Settings - DesignInfo Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
PcbCfgFile Netlist project only
Name Path to the PCB configuration file such as in following example:
KEY PcbCfgFileName
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\<name>.cfg

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), PCB Configuration (option)
PinComponents Path to Special Components speccomp.ini file such as in following
example:
KEY PinComponents "${DxGS}\My_Lib\INIT\speccomp.ini"

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Special Components (option)
Property Netlist project only
Definitions Path to Property Definitions netlist.prp file such as in following example:
KEY PropertyDefinitions
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\netlist.prp

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Property Definitions (option)
SheetsEditMode

Table 2-16. Project File Settings - iCDB Section


Setting Name Setting Description
LIST Designs Lists the designs in the project as in the following example:
LIST Designs
VALUE Board1
ENDLIST

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 157


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 2-16. Project File Settings - iCDB Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
DedicatedServer Specify the path to the dedicated Client-Server Configuration Manager as
Name in the following example:
DedicatedServerName orw-my_server-w7a

If the server becomes unavailable, the project will not open. You must edit
the name.prj file with a new server name.

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Server Name (option)
iCDBDir Specifies the path to the folder that contains iCDB data as in following
example:
KEY iCDBDir .\database

Table 2-17. Project File Settings - <board_name> Section


Setting Name Setting Description
RootBlock Specify the Top Level Block as in the following example:
KEY RootBlock block_name

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board<#>,
Top level block (option)
CADBackAnno
KEY CADBackAnno 0
ConfigType
KEY ConfigType "PCB"
Schematic If set to 1, allow back annotation as shown in the following example:
DesignBack KEY SchematicDesignBackAnno 1
Anno

If set to 0, do not allow back annotation.

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board<#>,
Allow back annotation (option)

158 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
project.prj File Format

Table 2-17. Project File Settings - <board_name> Section (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description
Schematic If set to 1, allow forward annotation as shown in the following example:
DesignStatus KEY SchematicDesignStatus 1

If set to 0, do not allow forward annotation.

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board<#>,
Allow forward annotation (option)
Schematic Specify the Conflict Resolution as one of FE (Front end always wins) or
Conflict BE (Back end always wins) as in the following example:
KEY SchematicConflict FE

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board<#>,
Conflict resolution (option)
SearchPath Specify the search path scheme as one of (Default) or (Industrial) as in
Scheme the following example:
KEY SearchPathScheme (Default)

GUI access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board<#>,
Search Path Scheme (option)

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Project Template File

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 159


Support Files and Variables
xDX PDF Initialization File Format

xDX PDF Initialization File Format


Input for: PADS DX Designer, xDX PDF
The xDX PDF initialization file (dxpdf.ini) stores File > Export > PDF settings. The xDX PDF
both reads from, and writes to a dxpdf.ini file. xDX PDF reads an PADS DX Designer
schematic, generates a hierarchical representation of the design, and saves the design as an
Adobe Acrobat PDF file.
Format
A dxpdf.ini file contains a list of parameters, such as those shown in the following example:

AddPopup 1
ChangeIct2Sch 1
Color 3
DisableMappedFonts 0
FONT_CUSTOM_FONTS Courier-Bold
FONT_FIXED Courier-Bold
FONT_GOTHIC Courier-Bold
FONT_KANJI HeiseiKakuGo-W5
FONT_OLDENGLISH Courier-Bold
FONT_PLOT Courier-Bold
FONT_ROMAN Times-Roman
FONT_ROMANBOLD Times-Bold
FONT_ROMANBOLDITALIC Times-BoldItalic
FONT_ROMANITALIC Times-Italic
FONT_SANSSERIF Helvetica
FONT_SANSSERIFBOLD Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPT Courier-Bold
FONT_SCRIPTBOLD Courier-Bold
HorizontalScale 100
LineThickness 1
MaxAnnos 100000
MaxObjs 100000
MaxPages 1024
SheetOrder
StartAcrobat 0
StrokeThickness 1
UrlProperties
UseDxDMapping 0
UseExclusion 1
VisibleHLs 1

See the descriptions in the following tables for more information on each parameter.

160 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
xDX PDF Initialization File Format

Parameters
Table 2-18. xDX PDF Initialization File Settings
Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
AddPopup Determines whether a popup menu appears in Adobe Acrobat as
follows:
0 Does not create a popup menu.
1 Creates a popup menu in the generated PDF file for each
component in the design (Default). When you click a component
in Adobe Acrobat, the shortcut menu displays the symbol name,
properties, and the option to push to the underlying schematic if
the component is a composite, as shown below:

GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > General (tab), Add popup menu on
components (option)
ChangeIct2Sch Specifies whether to print an Interconnectivity Table (ICT) as a
schematic representation bitmap as follows:
0 Does not create a bitmap (Default).
1 Creates a bitmap of a schematic representation of the ICT,
including the ICTs components and connectivity. The
components appear in a best-guess location, but the placement is
not editable.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > General (tab), Change ICTs to schematics
(option)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 161


Support Files and Variables
xDX PDF Initialization File Format

Table 2-18. xDX PDF Initialization File Settings (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
Color Sets the PDF color options as follows:
Tip: Before selecting options 1, 2, or 4, select a reasonable color
scheme in PADS DX Designer. From PADS DX Designer, choose
Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory), and then
specify colors that work with the white or black background.
0 Generates a PDF file with a white background, maps all
colors to black, and suppresses (does not print) black text.
(Default).
1 Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and white
background. xDX PDF retrieves the color map from the setup in
the design entry tool. See the following Tip.
2 Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and black
background. xDX PDF retrieves the color map from the current
setup. See the following Tip.
3 Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all
colors to black. This option prints black text.
4 Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all
colors to black. This option prints color text.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > General (tab), PDF Color Options
(pulldown menu)
DisableMappedFonts Specifies the use of mapped fonts in the xDX PDF file as follows:
0 Enables mapped fonts in the xDX PDF file. (Default).
1 Disables the use of mapped fonts in the xDX PDF file.
HorizontalScale Specifies the horizontal scale as a percentage.
Default: 100 (100%)
LineThickness Specifies the width for all lines in the schematic including boxes, arcs,
and so on. This value is a scale factor (default of 1.00 = 100%). If you
want to double the line thickness, use a value of 2.00 (200%). To
decrease line thicknesses by 1/2, use a value of 0.50 (50%).
Rule: This setting does not change text thickness.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > Advanced (tab), Minimum line thickness
(option)
MaxAnnos Specifies the maximum number of annotations allowed in the PDF
output.
Default: 100000

162 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
xDX PDF Initialization File Format

Table 2-18. xDX PDF Initialization File Settings (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
MaxObjs Specifies the maximum number of objects allowed in the PDF output.
Default: 100000
MaxPages Specifies the maximum number of pages allowed in the PDF output.
Default: 1024
SheetOrder Sets the specific order in which to process sheets in a schematic
hierarchy.
Rule: Make sure that each composite block has a component-level
property. The component-level property should have a specific name
whose value is an integer as the starting page number for that set of
schematic sheets.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > Advanced (tab), Schematic Sheet Order
Property (option)
StartAcrobat Specifies whether to start the PDF Reader as follows:
0 Do not start the PDF Reader after PDF generation (Default).
1 Start the PDF Reader after PDF generation.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > General (tab), Start PDF Reader After
Generation (option)
StrokeThickness Specifies the stroke thickness.
Default: 1
UseDxDMapping Sets font mapping as follows:
0 Do not use PADS DX Designer font mapping (Default).
1 Use the PADS DX Designer font mapping that you defined
in Setup > Settings, Display > Font Styles.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > Fonts, Use xDX Designer font mappings
(option)
UseExclusion Sets an exclusion as one of the following:
0 Do not exclude any sheets from the PDF file.
1 Exclude any sheets from the PDF file that you have specified
to exclude (Default). See:
Excluding Sheets from Printing or PDF Generation - xDX Designer
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > Advanced (tab), Use exclusion info
(checkbox)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 163


Support Files and Variables
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

Table 2-18. xDX PDF Initialization File Settings (cont.)


Setting Name Setting Description and Setting Values
URLProperties Specifies properties whose values are URLs. xDX PDF generates
links in the PDF file for the values of these properties. Property names
show up in the PDF output surrounded by a link box to the actual
URL.
Rules:
You must use forward slashes (/) when specifying URL-valued
properties. Do not use backslashes (\).
If the property name contains more than one string, such as
Arbitrary Text, enclose all strings in double quotes.
If you are entering multiple property names, place a space
between names.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > Advanced (tab), URL-valued Properties
(option)
VisibleHLs Sets hyperlink visibility in the PDF as follows:
0 Does not display a box around hyperlink text.
1 Displays a box around hyperlink text in the PDF (Default).
Click the link to go to the location associated with the hyperlink.
GUI access:
Files > Export > PDF > General (tab), Visible Component/Net
Hyperlinks (option)

The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables


The following table lists user-configurable design entry tool environment variables:

Table 2-19. User-Configurable Environment Variables


Environment Variable Definition
HPGL_HEIGHT_SCALE Controls vertical scaling of fonts in HPGL output plot files.
See:
Printing From Windows - xDX Designer
HPGL_WIDTH_SCALE Controls Horizontal scaling of fonts in HPGL output plot files.
See:
Printing From Windows - xDX Designer
LM_LICENSE_FILE or Points to the license file, or to a license server using the
MGLS_LICENSE_FILE <port>@<host> terminology.

164 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Support Files and Variables
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

Table 2-19. User-Configurable Environment Variables (cont.)


Environment Variable Definition
PATH A list of directories through which the operating system searches
to find executables.
MGC_EPD_INVISIBLE_ Controls whether a particular addin gets excluded when the
ADDIN_LIST design entry tool is invoked. By excluding addins, the design
entry tool startup time can be decreased. For example, the setting
MGC_EPD_INVISIBLE_ADDIN_LIST=ProjectNavigator
Tree,ProjectNavigator Contents will exclude these two addins
on startup. You will still be able to open each addin from the
toolbar.
WDIR The WDIR environment variable specifies the design entry tool
search path to the location of customization, initialization and
configuration files. The variable might have a value similar to
that shown in the following example:
WDIR = c:\myWDIR;
c:\MentorGraphics\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard
Note: If using Linux, the paths need to be separated by a
colon ":" instead of the semi-colon.
Also see: Search Path Specification (WDIR)

Related Topics
Support Files and Variables
Soft Pathname Settings

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 165


Support Files and Variables
The Design Entry Tool Environment Variables

166 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 3
Dialog Boxes and Windows

Dialog boxes and windows provide a user interface for interacting with the tool.

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary


Dialog Box/Window Description
Add Block Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add a block to a schematic, or extract
selected objects to a schematic hierarchically below the block.
Add Nets With Ports Dialog Use this dialog box to connect multiple components with
Box common pins.
Add Pin Array Dialog Box Use this dialog box to create and place two or more pins with
different names properties into a symbol. For high density
symbols, this dialog box provides an efficient, one-step method
to define, name, and then place multiple pins into a symbol.
Add Properties Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add or change a property across a range
or list of objects.
Array Dialog Box Use this dialog box to define an array of objects.
Cadence Allegro Netlister Use this dialog box to export a Cadence Allegro netlist.
Dialog Box
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box Use this dialog box to define the scope (Project, Board, or
Block) to include in the .cce output file.
Customize Tools Menu Use this dialog box to customize the Tools menu to include
Dialog Box programs to launch from your design entry application.
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to create and customize toolbars.
Toolbars Tab
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to customize existing toolbars and menus,
Commands Tab and to create new menus.
Customize Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the size and toolbar options for
Options Tab toolbar icons.
Databook Tool Window Use the xDX DataBook window to interface to the Central
Library, ODBC databases, and symbol libraries. From these
various component locations, you can access and place parts on
your schematic.
Databook Tool - CL View Use this Databook tool window pane to display parts, symbols,
Pane and entire designs in the Central Library.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 167


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Databook Tool - Configure Use this dialog box to add a new component library to the
Dialog Box active configuration file. You can also edit libraries, delete
libraries, and add tables to libraries.
Databook Tool - Configure Use this dialog box to control the characteristics of how the
Dialog Box - Properties Tab Databook tool interacts with the Library.
Databook Tool - Properties Use this dialog box to edit the Databook tool startup, search,
Dialog Box appearance, and color properties.
Databook Tool - Query Use this dialog box to build a set of conditions for the Databook
Builder tool to use in the search.
xDX Archiver Wizard Use this wizard to output a copy of a project and any related
files to a specified archive location.
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Use this dialog box and tab to select basic settings for PDF
General Tab output.
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Use this dialog box and tab to select advanced settings for PDF
Advanced Tab output.
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to specify the fonts xDX PDF uses for
Fonts Tab each xDX Designer font type.
Find and Replace Text Use this dialog box to search for text, or to search for and
Dialog Box replace text.
Font Mapping Dialog Box Use this dialog box to select the source for font mapping.
Generate Symbol Dialog Use this dialog box to generate a new block symbol.
Box
Insert Object Dialog Box Use this dialog box to insert an object into your document.
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Keyin Netlister.
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to configure the LineSim Link tool to
Options Tab export to HyperLynx for signal integrity simulation, or to
import any new data from HyperLynx.
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Use this dialog box tab to control the nets in the LineSim Link
Schematic Topology Tab tool schematic topology.
Merge Differences Dialog Use this dialog box to compare the current topology with the
Box imported topology.
New Library Symbol Dialog Use this dialog box to configure a new symbol in a Netlist
Box project.
New Project Dialog Box Use this dialog box to select a Project Template for a new
project, and then set parameters such as the project name,
project location, and library location (if applicable).

168 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Open Block Dialog Box Use this dialog box to open a block that is internal or external to
the current project.
Packager Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Packager, which prepares
the project for forward annotation by assigning reference
designators to map each component in the logical schematic to
a physical part.
Select Parts to Update Use this dialog box to update the project with updated parts
Dialog Box from the attached library.
Part Lister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to control the Part Lister, which creates a
Bill of Materials for the design.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use the General pane to specify the name and location of the
General Pane output Bill of Materials (BOM) file, and the scope of the
generated BOM.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use the Advanced pane to specify the output file format Part
Advanced Pane Lister produces. If your design has variants, you can specify the
variant database in this pane.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use this dialog box pane to configure the Part Lister output
Columns table that lists the parts used in a design.
Part Lister Dialog Box - Use this dialog box pane to specify the column headers in the
Header Part Lister output table that lists the parts used in a design.
Paste Special Dialog Box Use this dialog box to paste or embed clipboard contents to a
xDX Designer schematic in a specified format, or to create a
link to information that can be updated in another application.
Properties Window Use this window to view property information associated with
the selected object. You can also add or modify property values,
control property visibility, and add properties to the selected
object.
Property Definition Editor Use this dialog box in a Netlist project to define the available
Dialog Box properties and their format in a central library. Use this editor to
define new properties, define property types and their
associated syntax, and change certain aspects of pre-defined
system properties.
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box pane to configure the general settings of the
Dialog Box - General Pane xDX Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box pane to configure the display settings of the
Dialog Box - Display Pane xDX Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 169


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Quick Connection View Use this dialog box tab to configure the advanced settings of the
Dialog Box - Advanced Tab xDX Designer Quick Connection View (QCV) generic
netlister.
Replace Part Window Use this window pane when replacing parts to set the source
part number, the replacement part number, the scope for the
replacement and to specify how you want to map pins and
properties on the replaced part(s).
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Use this dialog to set symbol replacement criteria.
Box
RINF Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the RINF netlist output.
Scale Dialog Box Use this dialog box to scale the selected object up or down
using a scale factor that you specify.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog to define project-level settings such as project
Project paths, which are stored in the <design>.prj file.
Settings Dialog Box - Board Use this dialog box to configure a board.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the location(s) of legacy xDX
Symbol Libraries Designer symbol libraries in either a new or existing Netlist
project.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog to create selection lists for specialized pin
Special Components components to be added to schematics.
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Use this dialog box to list the available bus contents and their
Contents values, modify existing bus contents values, or create new bus
contents.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the border symbol for each
Borders and Zones border type (one of A Landscape, A Portrait, A0 Landscape, A0
Portrait and so on) and the zone characteristics used to divide
the schematic into navigation zones.
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Use this dialog box to configure how your link references
Reference appear on the schematic.
Settings Dialog Box - Net Use this dialog box to control how net names are resolved into
Name Delimiter elements of buses.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to specify the configuration file location for
Databook xDX DataBook
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Use this dialog to specify the way sheets are ordered for
Numbering printing or PDF generation.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the default export language and
Export HDL folder.

170 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the VHDL export settings.
VHDL
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to list packages to be inserted in the
Export HDL - External generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to map xDX Designer pin types to HDL
Export HDL - Port Map port mode types.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the Verilog export settings.
Verilog
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog to set units and grid parameters for the
Schematic Editor schematic window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the xDX Designer session
Strokes, Pan and Zoom characteristics for strokes, pan, and zoom.
Settings Dialog Box - New Use this dialog box to configure new schematic sheets.
Sheets
Settings Dialog Box - Text Use this dialog box to set the default text origin and text size for
new text on a schematic.
Settings Dialog Box - Nets Use this dialog box to set net characteristics on the schematic
window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set the availability of objects, text, and
Selection Filters graphics selections that display on schematics.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the pin and property
Symbol Editor characteristics for local or library symbols that appear in the
Symbol Editor.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default properties to symbols.
Symbol Editor - Symbol
Default Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default pin properties to symbols.
Symbol Editor - Pin Default
Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to assign default HLA properties to
Symbol Editor - Symbol symbols.
HLA Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to choose which rules to run with the
Graphical Rules Checker Graphical Rules Checker (GRC).
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to control the display and the behavior of
Interconnectivity Table the Interconnectivity Table (ICT).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 171


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Use this dialog box to choose how to slice and dice ICT nets.
Slice and Dice
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Use this dialog box to control property visibility in the ICT.
Properties
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure the block display
Navigator - Blocks characteristics in Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure sheet display characteristics in
Navigator - Sheets the Navigator window and control sheet copy behavior.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure symbol display characteristics
Symbols in the Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to configure net and bus characteristics in
Navigator - Nets and Buses the Navigator window.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set what xDX Designer displays on
Display schematic sheets.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set schematic or ICT object
Objects characteristics for color, text, fill style, line style and font.
Settings Dialog Box - Font Use this dialog box to set the font style for new schematic text.
Styles
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Use this dialog box to run the xDX Designer Diagnostics tool
Designer Diagnostics automatically when you exit a design session.
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Use this dialog box to control cross probing parameters.
Probing
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ Use this dialog box to set up automatic sheet/ICT backups.
ICT Backup
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to manage a projects backups and backup
Project Backup settings. Depending on the settings, different triggers can cause
the project database to create a backup copy in a zipped file.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to control HDL simulation parameters.
Integrated Simulator
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Use this dialog box to control the FPGA tool configuration
Tools settings.
Settings Dialog Box - Run Use this dialog box to define forms or scripts to run when a
on Startup project starts.
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Use this dialog box to enter a user name and password for a
Databook Data Source xDX DataBook data source.

172 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows

Table 3-1. Dialog Boxes and Windows Summary (cont.)


Dialog Box/Window Description
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to choose which installed features to load
Licensing when the application is started.
Settings Dialog Box - Use this dialog box to set advanced xDX Designer settings.
Advanced
Simulation Setup Dialog Use this dialog box to set up the SDF (Standard Delay Format)
Box options for a ModelSim simulation session.
Update Other Objects Use this dialog box to choose what type of object you want to
Dialog Box update. You also select the Range or scope of the update so that
you do not interfere with others who might be working on the
same project concurrently, or because you want different results
at different levels of the project.
Verify Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the Design Rule Checker
(DRC) Verify tool.
Verilog Netlister Dialog Use this dialog box to create a Verilog netlist file(s) for a
Box design. This netlister first runs the iCDB Compiler utility to
generate a Common Database for the design, and then runs the
appropriate utilities to generate the Verilog netlist (.v) files,
which are used for simulating the design.
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box Use this dialog box to configure the iCDB-to-VHDL netlister.
This utility extracts data from the Integrated Common Database
(iCDB) and outputs it in VHDL IEEE 1076-1987 format.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 173


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Block Dialog Box

Add Block Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer

To access: Add > Block or click .


Use this dialog box to add a block to a schematic, or extract selected objects to a schematic
hierarchically below the block.
Figure 3-1. Add Block Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-2. Add Block Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block name Defines the name of the block.
Extract schematic If checked, creates a hierarchical block and moves selected objects to a
new schematic lower in the project hierarchy.

Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design
Creating a Top-Down Hierarchical Design
Adding Hierarchy Within an ICT
Creating a Redundant Circuit Using Symmetrical Packaging
Assigning Ref Designators by Sheet

174 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Nets With Ports Dialog Box

Add Nets With Ports Dialog Box


To access: Edit > Advanced Connect, or right-click and select Advanced Connect.
Use this dialog box to connect multiple components with common pins.
Note
Available only on Interconnectivity Editor (ICE) designs.

Figure 3-2. Add Nets With Ports Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-3. Add Nets With Ports Contents
Field Description
Generate nets Generates net connections.
Names filter Filters the list of nets based on the characters you enter.
Directions filter Filters the list of nets based on the direction of the net.
Exclude already connected If checked, excludes nets that already have connections from the
list.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 175


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Nets With Ports Dialog Box

Related Topics
Adding Nets to an ICT Component

176 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box

Add Pin Array Dialog Box


Scope: Symbol Editor
To access: Symbol > Add Pin Array
Use this dialog box to create and place two or more pins with different names properties into a
symbol. For high density symbols, this dialog box provides an efficient, one-step method to
define, name, and then place multiple pins into a symbol.

Objects
Table 3-4. Add Pin Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Range If selected, creates pin names in a defined range and sequence interval
(delta) value. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
List If selected, creates pin names from comma-separated entries in the
Values field. Optionally, you can apply an alphanumerical prefix or
suffix to all pin names.
Value If the Range button is selected, defines the minimum and maximum
decimal range to apply to new symbol pin names.
Delta If the Range button is selected, defines the numeric sequence interval to
apply to the minimum and maximum pin range value.
Reverses the minimum and maximum range in the Value field or the
order of the comma-separated pin names in the Values field.
Values If the List button is selected, specifies a comma-separated list of pin
names to apply to the symbol.
If the List button is selected, this button causes pin names to display in
the Values field in a list format. Use this workspace to add, remove, or
reorder the list of comma-separated pin names that appear in the Values
field.
Prefix,Suffix Defines the alphanumeric prefix and suffix for each pin name in an
array.
Hint Displays a preview of pin names based on settings in the dialog box.
Note: This field refreshes when you change pin name values.

Automatic pin side If checked, automatically assigns the location and type attributes to pin
recognition names based on pin array placement in a symbol. For example, when
you place the pin array on the right side of the symbol, the tool applies
the Right Side setting (pin location) in the Pins window.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 177


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Pin Array Dialog Box

Table 3-4. Add Pin Array Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Inverted If checked, adds a negation symbol to the pin (port) shape (Inverted =
True in the pin properties list).
If unchecked, does not apply negative values to the pin (port) shape
(Inverted = False in the pin properties list).
Pin Location Defines the default pin location (Side) attribute for pins in the array.
Choose one of the following:
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Pin Type Defines the default pin type for all pins in the array. For more
information, see Pin (Port) Types on page 466.
Pin Spacing Defines the default spacing between the pins you place into a symbol
using the default spacing for grid points defined in Setup > Settings
menu item, Symbol Editor category.
To define grid spacing choose Setup > Settings menu item, Schematic
Editor category.
Name (column) Defines property names (from the Property Definition Editor in the
xDM Library Tools application) that apply to each pin in the array.
Check a checkbox to make a property name visible for pins in an array.
Use the buttons to add, remove, or reorder the list of
property names in the table.
When you add a new item to the list, a pulldown list is available in the
Name field to select an available property.
Value (column) Defines unique alphanumeric text to assign to pins in the array. Check a
checkbox to make a property value visible for pins in an array.
Position Defines the position of properties and values for each pin in the array.
Use the pulldown list in this field to choose:
Above Pin
Below Pin

178 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Add Properties Dialog Box


To access: Edit > Add Properties,
or click ,
or select one or more schematic objects, right-click, and select Add Properties.
Use this dialog box to add or change a property across a range or list of objects.
Figure 3-3. Add Properties Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-5. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Object
Type The type of object to add a property to:
Net
Component
Pin
Unattached

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 179


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-5. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Property The property to assign to the selected object(s).
For components, blocks, or a pin or pins on a component or a block, you can
also specify either:
Block values - Propagates the property to all instantiations of the block or
component.
Instance values - Adds the property to only the selected instance of the
component or block.

Range Selected, activates the Prefix, Value, Delta, and Suffix fields, enabling you to
apply a range of names to the selected objects, with an optional prefix, a
numerical value, and an optional suffix.
List Selected, activates the Values field, enabling you to provide a comma-
separated list of values for the selected objects.
Prefix Active only for Range.
Specifies a string of one or more characters to prepend to each property value.
Value Active only for Range.
Specifies a starting value. The starting value can be a decimal number, a
lexical character(s), or a bus index. An identifier box appears preceding the
value you enter:
- For decimal numbers: (0, 1, 2, ...)

- For lexical characters: (a, b, c, ... z), (A, B, C, ... Z)


- For a selected bus, or a net ripped from a bus. This value indicates the
Index of the ripped net(s). For more information, see
Ripping Nets From a Bus - xDX Designer
Delta Active only for Range.
Specifies an integer number multiple (positive or negative value) to use to
increment or decrement each bit of the selected group of objects.
Suffix Active only for Range.
Specifies a string of one or more characters to append to each property value.
Values Active only for List.
Allows you to provide a comma-separated list of values to apply to the selected
objects.
See also:
Manipulating Properties and Property Values on Multiple Objects - xDX
Designer

180 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Add Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-5. Add Properties Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Hint Gives you a preview of the selected property values before you apply them.

Related Topics
Creating Component Arrays - xDX Designer
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Ripping Nets From a Bus - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 181


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box

Array Dialog Box


To access: Add > Array, or click .
Use this dialog box to define an array of objects.
Figure 3-4. Array Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-6. Array Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Rectangular Selected, defines a rectangular array of the selected object(s), such as
array the AND gate shown below, by specifying the:
Number of Rows (2 in the example).
Number of Columns (3 in the

example) .
Diagonal Selected, defines a diagonal vector array, such as with the AND gate
vector shown below, by specifying the number of elements in the array (3 in

the example).

182 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Array Dialog Box

Related Topics
Creating a Graphical Component Array - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 183


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box

Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Cadence Allegro
Use this dialog box to export a Cadence Allegro netlist.
Figure 3-5. Cadence Allegro Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-7. Cadence Allegro Netlister Contents
Field Description
Output File Specifies the name of the Cadence Allegro netlist file.
Name
Scope Defines the scope for the netlist file:
Project
Board (selected from the dropdown list)
Block (selected from the dropdown list)
Options If checked, Open the generated file allows you to select:
Open with - Specifies the program to use to open the file.
Run new viewer for each generated file.

184 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

CCZ Exporter Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > eDxD Schematic
Use this dialog box to define the scope (Project, Board, or Block) to include in the .cce output
file.
Note
.cce files are compressed and encrypted versions of the .ccz format.

Figure 3-6. CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-8. CCZ Exporter Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specifies the path to the output .cc (uncompressed) or .cce
(compressed and encrypted) file.
Enter a pathname or browse to its location.
Scope Enables you to select the scope to include in the output file:
Project - Selected, enables the Run new window for each
generated file option, allowing you to create new files, rather than
overwriting an existing file.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 185


Dialog Boxes and Windows
CCZ Exporter Dialog Box

Table 3-8. CCZ Exporter Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Options section
Open the generated file Checked, enables you to set the default program in which to open
the generated file.
Open with - Checked, enables you to enter a pathname or browse to
the program executable in which to open the generated file.
Options - Checked, enables you to enter any option supported by
editing the program tool defined in the Open with field. For
example, to edit in ANSI, Unicode or Print in Windows notepad,
enter switches /A /W /P, respectively.
Run new viewer for each Only available with Scope > Project.
generated file Checked, displays the generated file in a new viewer.

186 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box


To access: Tools > Customize
Use this dialog box to customize the Tools menu to include programs to launch from your
design entry application.
Figure 3-7. Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-9. Customize Tools Menu Contents
Field Description
Menu Item Types
Common If checked, commands are available to all users of this machine in all projects.
Common tools are appended with (common) in the menu.
The xDX Designer tool stores common menu commands in a file named
commontools.ini in the \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard
directory.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 187


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Tools Menu Dialog Box

Table 3-9. Customize Tools Menu Contents (cont.)


Field Description
User If checked, commands are available only to users pointing to a specific
Specific %WDIR% directory or using a specific project.
The xDX Designer tool stores user specific menu commands in a file named
usertools.ini.
The Customize this project only checkbox controls the location of the
usertools.ini file:
If checked, the usertools.ini file is in the project directory.
If unchecked, the usertools.ini file is in the first writable directory in your
%WDIR% path.
Menu Items Lists the Menu items already defined in either the commontools.ini or
usertools.ini file (depending on your selection in the Menu Item Types
section). You can use the Remove, Move Up, Move Down, and Copy buttons
to manipulate items in this list.
The Add button populates the list with your new entries.
Menu Text Defines the text that appears in the Tools pulldown menu.
Command Associates the menu item with an executable command. You can Browse to
find the executable, or type in the path manually.
Arguments List the arguments to the command.
Initial Specifies the working directory for the tool associated with the command.
Directory

Related Topics
Customizing the Tools Menu - xDX Designer

188 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab


To access: View > Toolbars > Customize, Toolbars tab
Use this dialog box tab to create and customize toolbars.
Figure 3-8. Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab

Objects
Table 3-10. Customize Dialog Box - Toolbars Tab Contents
Field Description
Toolbars Displays the names of all system and user-defined toolbars. Select
the check box to display the toolbar.
Reset Returns the selected toolbar to its default state.
Reset All Returns all system toolbars to their default states.
New Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a
name for the new toolbar. The toolbar appears in the center of the
design workspace.
Rename Opens the Toolbar Name dialog box, which enables you to enter a
new name for the selected user-defined toolbar.
Delete Deletes the selected custom toolbar.
Show text If checked, displays the button text with each button.
labels

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 189


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab


To access: View > Toolbars > Customize, Commands tab
Use this dialog box to customize existing toolbars and menus, and to create new menus.
Figure 3-9. Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab

Objects
Table 3-11. Customize Dialog Box - Commands Tab Contents
Field Description
Categories Lists categories of commands.
New Menu Displays a custom menu, which enables you to add a
menu to the menu bar.
All Commands Displays all application commands, which
enables you to add commands to menus and toolbars.
Specific categories Displays commands for each standard
toolbar, which enables you to add the commands to menus and other
toolbars.
Commands Lists the commands for the selected category.
Description Displays the tooltip for the selected command.

190 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab

Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab


To access: View > Toolbars > Customize, Options tab
Use this dialog box to set the size and toolbar options for toolbar icons.
Figure 3-10. Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab

Objects
Table 3-12. Customize Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Show Screen Tips on If checked, displays the command tooltip when you hover over
toolbars the a toolbar icon.
Show shortcut keys in If checked, displays the command shortcut when you hover over
Screen Tips a toolbar icon.
Large Icons If checked, displays the toolbar icons as large images.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 191


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool Window

Databook Tool Window


To access: From xDX Designer, select View > xDX DataBook ( ).
Use the xDX DataBook window to interface to the Central Library, ODBC databases, and
symbol libraries. From these various component locations, you can access and place parts on
your schematic.
Description
The following shows the xDX DataBook window with the Search pane selected:

Figure 3-11. xDX DataBook - Search Window

Objects
Table 3-13. xDX DataBook Window - Search Pane Contents
Option Description
New Search Window Opens a new search window pane in the xDX DataBook window.
See Searching for Components in Database Libraries.
Show CL View Opens the CL View pane in the xDX DataBook window.
See Databook Tool - CL View Pane on page 196.
New Live Verification Opens a Verify pane in the xDX DataBook window in which to
Window verify components in the open sheet.
See Verifying Components on a Sheet.

192 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool Window

Table 3-13. xDX DataBook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)


Option Description
New Hierarchical Opens a Verify Hierarchy pane in the xDX DataBook window in
Verification Window which to verify components in the entire design.
See Verifying Components in a Multi-Sheet Design.
Close the Current Closes the currently selected window pane tab at the bottom of the
Search, or Close View xDX DataBook window.

Library pulldown Contains a list of libraries defined in your configuration file.


See Databook Tool Libraries.
Query Builder button Enables you to build expressions to search the library for your
components.
See Creating a Databook Search Query.
Criteria Button Shows a text box with the search criteria you defined in the Query
Builder.
See Creating a Databook Search Query.
Execute the Query Refreshes the list of components based on the changes you have
made to the query builder or to the filter fields.
See Searching for Components in Database Libraries and Creating
a Databook Search Query.
Slot pulldown Defines the slot for the selected component. Active only for slotted
components.
Slots assign specific gates for multi-gated or slotted components.
The slots are based on the pin numbers of the corresponding
component in the physical design.
When you add a slotted component to your schematic, the pin
numbers of the component appear on the pins.
See Adding Generic Components to a Schematic with the Databook
Tool and Adding Unique Components to a Schematic With the
Databook Tool.
Load Selected Loads the part information of a selected component in the
Component schematic into the xDX DataBook Search window. Same as right-
click > Load into xDX DataBook.

Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place
with All Properties the component on the schematic. The component includes all
properties assigned to the component in the library.
See Adding Unique Components to a Schematic With the Databook
Tool.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 193


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool Window

Table 3-13. xDX DataBook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)


Option Description
Add New Component Activates place mode in the schematic window, so you can place
with only Common the component on the schematic. The component includes only the
Properties properties designated as generic properties in the library.
Use, for example, when you want to place a capacitor symbol but
dont yet know what value of capacitor you want.
See Adding Generic Components to a Schematic with the Databook
Tool.
Annotate Component Adds all properties (as assigned in the library) to the selected
with All Properties component on the schematic.
Use on generic components when you are ready to apply properties
of a unique component.
See Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Tool.
Annotate Component Adds only the generic properties (as assigned in the library) to the
with Common selected component on the schematic.
Properties See Annotating Component Properties on a Schematic With the
Databook Tool.
Annotate Properties to Adds the properties of the selected component to the selected
Selected Components symbol on the schematic.
You must enable this button in the Preferences tab of the Configure
dialog box. See the table Properties Tab - Selected Component
Annotation.
Clear the Current Search Removes the operations and expressions in the filter fields, and
clears the expressions in the Query Builder.

Add Component With Specifies that when you add a component, a net stub attaches to
Net Stubs each pin.

Add Pin Labels To Nets Specifies that when you add a component with a net stub, the net
includes a label to match the label of the pin.
Only active when Add Component With Net Stubs is active.
Symbol Preview Shows a graphical representation of the components symbol. You
window can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-click
popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in with F8
and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by clicking in the
window and dragging the symbol onto the schematic.

194 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool Window

Table 3-13. xDX DataBook Window - Search Pane Contents (cont.)


Option Description
Symbol pulldown Defines the symbol to place in the schematic from a list of symbols
associated with the component in the library. Also shows the layout
cell associated with the component.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Searching for Components in Database Libraries

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 195


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View Pane

Databook Tool - CL View Pane


To access: In the xDX DataBook window, click the Show CL View button ( )
Use this Databook tool window pane to display parts, symbols, and entire designs in the Central
Library.
Objects
Table 3-14. Databook Tool - CL View Pane Contents
Tab Description
Part View Tab Displays a list of the parts in the Central Library that have
associated symbol, cell and padstack data. Use these parts to create
or edit designs with logical (electrical) and physical (cell)
characteristics. See Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab on
page 197.
Note: Part View lists symbols by part number.
Tip: You can use wildcards (*) in the Part View window to filter
parts. For example, typing PN12*89* into the Part filter produces a
match for the PN1234890ABC and PN12ABC89DEF parts. Best
practice is to use a complete search string ending with a wildcard.
Symbol View Tab Displays a list of symbols in the Central Library that do not have
associated cell or padstack data. Use these symbols to create or edit
designs with only logical (electrical) characteristics. You can also
use symbols to build and create new parts. See Databook Tool -
CL View - Symbol View Tab on page 198.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Adding Symbols to a Design
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

196 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab

Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab


To access: In the xDX DataBook window, click the CL View button ( ), followed by the Part
View tab.
Use this Databook window tab to display parts and symbols in the Central Library.
Objects
Table 3-15. CL View Window Options Part View Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the symbol
when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether or not to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbols pins. The net names are the same as the
pin names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can place
the component on the schematic. See Adding Symbols to a Design
for more information about adding symbols to your design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the components symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the right-
click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can zoom in
with F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a part by
clicking in the window and dragging the symbol onto the
schematic.
Symbol pulldown Displays a list of library symbols associated with the component,
allowing you to select the symbol to place in the schematic. Also
displays the layout cell associated with the part.
Fixed checkbox If checked, prevents changes to the cell during layout.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 197


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab

Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab


To access: In the xDX DataBook window, click the CL View button ( ), followed by the
Symbol View tab.
Use this Databook window tab to display symbols in the Central Library.
Objects
Table 3-16. CL View Window Options Symbol View Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the
symbol when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether or not to add net names to the sections of
nets attached to the symbols pins. The net names are the
same as the pin names. Active only when you check Add
Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can
place the component on the schematic. See Adding Symbols
to a Design for more information about adding symbols to
your design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the components
symbol. You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window
with the right-click popup menu. If you click in the window,
you can zoom in with F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can
place a part by clicking in the window and dragging the
symbol onto the schematic.
Symbol pulldown Displays a list of library symbols associated with the
component, allowing you to select the symbol to place in the
schematic. Also displays the layout cell associated with the
part.

Related Topics
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab
Adding Symbols to a Design
Replacing Local Symbols with Central Library Symbols
Placing One or More Instances of a Block
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions

198 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab

Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 199


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab

Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab


To access: In the xDX DataBook window, click the CL View button ( ), followed by the
Reuse Blocks tab.
Use this Databook window tab to display reuse blocks in the Central Library.
Objects
Table 3-17. Databook Tool - CL View Options Reuse Blocks Tab
Option Description
Add Nets Specifies to add a short section of a net to each pin of the
symbol when you add the symbol to the schematic.
Add Net Names Specifies whether or not to add net names to the sections of nets
attached to the symbols pins. The net names are the same as
the pin names. Active only when you check Add Nets.
Clear Filters button Clears all strings in the filter boxes.
Merge Buses button Interactively resolves conflicts between the reuse block and the
host design. Designates bus assignments in the host design
before saving and packaging.
Merge Globals button Interactively merge global nets from the reusable block to the
host design.
Merge Layers button Maps the reusable block layer stackup to the layer stackup in
the host design.
Renumber as needed These are Reference Designator settings for Reuse Blocks.
Increment By
Renumber From
Add Suffix
Add Prefix
Place Symbol button Activates place mode in the schematic window so you can
place the symbol on the schematic. See Adding Symbols to a
Design for more information about adding symbols to your
design.
Symbol Preview window Displays a graphical representation of the reuse block symbol.
You can zoom and pan the graphic in this window with the
right-click popup menu. If you click in the window, you can
zoom in with F8 and zoom out with F7. Also, you can place a
reuse block by clicking in the window and dragging the symbol
onto the schematic.
Symbol pulldown Displays a list of library symbols associated with the reuse
block, allowing you to place it in the schematic. Also displays
the layout cell associated with the part.

200 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - CL View - Reuse Blocks Tab

Related Topics
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - CL View - Part View Tab
Databook Tool - CL View - Symbol View Tab
Placing One or More Instances of a Block
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 201


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box

Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box


To access: In the xDX DataBook window (View > xDX DataBook) Search pane, right-click >
Configure > Edit Configuration
Use this dialog box to add a new component library to the active configuration file. You can
also edit libraries, delete libraries, and add tables to libraries.
Figure 3-12. Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Libraries Tab

Objects
Table 3-18. xDX DataBook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Add Library Opens the Add Library dialog box from which you can add a library
to the Component Library list. Also see Adding, Editing, or Deleting
a Library.
Add Table Opens the Add Table dialog box from which you can add a table to a
selected library in the Component Library list. Also see Adding a
Table to a Library.
Remove Removes the selected library or table from the Component Library
list.

202 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box

Table 3-18. xDX DataBook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Properties Allows you to change the characteristics of the selected library using
the Add Library dialog box. Also see Adding, Editing, or Deleting a
Library.
Update All Updates the table fields in the current configuration with the fields in
the database(s).
Set Order Opens the Reorder Libraries dialog box in which you can set the
order of the libraries in the Component Library list. You can move
selected libraries up and down, or arrange the entire list in
alphabetical order. Also see Reordering Libraries.
Component Libraries Shows the list of libraries in the configuration.
Field Name Shows the table headers in the selected database library.
Field Type (icon) Shows the field type: Normal, Symbol, Document, or Unused. See
Field Type Icons for graphic representations of the icons, or see
Field Type (text) below for descriptions.
Property Name Shows the property name as it appears in the symbol library.
Double-click the entry to edit it.
Load If checked, loads the property during verification. SeeDatabook
Tool Properties to Load.
Annotate If checked, shows the property in the Properties window for placed
components. See Databook Tool Properties to Annotate.
Name Visible If checked, shows the property name on the schematic with placed
components. See Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible.
Value Visible If checked, shows the property value on the schematic with placed
components. See Databook Property Names and Values Set to
Visible.
Verification Key Defines the field that must be satisfied during searches. All returned
results satisfy the conditions of this field, as well as satisfying any
combination of other conditions.
Check to select the field.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 203


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box

Table 3-18. xDX DataBook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Field Type (text) These options relate to the preceding Field Type (icon) entry. See
Field Type Icons.
Normal: A field (column) in the database whose values
represent normal properties and have no special meaning to the
Databook tool. The Databook tool passes the value of a field
whose field type is Normal to xDX Designer as a property value.
Symbol: A special field (column) in the database whose value
identifies the symbol that the Databook tool should show on the
schematic.
Only one field name can be a Symbol field type.
Document: A field (column) in the database whose values refer
to an external document, such as a path to a datasheet or web
page. Setting the field type to Document provides a link in the
Databook tool property value that you can click to view a
document or a web page.
The Databook tool does not annotate a property whose field type
is Document to the schematic. If you want to annotate a file
pathname or URL to the schematic, then set the field type to
Normal instead of Document.
Unused: A field (column) in the database whose values do not
appear in the Databook tool and are not available for loading for
verification or annotating to placed components.
Unique ID: A field (column) in the database that contains the
unique identifier, or primary key, for records in the library. Only
one field in the library can have the Unique ID field type.
Magnitude Specifies a magnitude to show numeric property values in the
Databook tool for the specified magnitude. Only active for
numerical data. See Editing Library Properties, Step 3g.
Valid Magnitude Specifies the valid magnitude for the selected property. The Valid
Magnitude column only contains choices if the Magnitude column is
set to Automatic.
For example, capacitor manufacturers do not use milli or nano
magnifiers when specifying capacitance. Therefore, you can exclude
milli and non magnifiers in the Valid Magnitude column.
Units Specifies an appropriate unit for the selected property to append to
the magnitude.
For example, you might want the Value property for a capacitor to
have always have an F, or the Value property for an inductor to
always have an H.

204 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box

Table 3-18. xDX DataBook - Configure Dialog Box Options - Libraries Tab
Option Description
Show Unit for IEC62 Specifies whether or not you want to show units in IEC62 format for
your components. This format uses the unit in place of the decimal
point, so a 2.2k resistor would appear as 2k2.
Use symbol data from Specifies to use the symbol associated with the part number. Active
Central Library only if you do not have a Symbol field in your database library and
you do have a Part Number field.
See Associating Symbols with Library Components.
Move Up Moves a selected row(s) in the table up one row.
Move Down Moves a selected row(s) in the table down one row.

Related Topics
Databook Tool Window
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box
Databook Configuration File Changes

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 205


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box -


Properties Tab
To access: In the xDX DataBook window (View > xDX DataBook) Search pane, right-click >
Configure > Edit Configuration, click the Properties tab.
Use this dialog box to control the characteristics of how the Databook tool interacts with the
Library.
Description
The Properties tab contains the following panes:

Component Instantiation/Annotation See table Configure Dialog Box - Properties


Tab - Component Instantiation/Annotation.
Component Annotation See table Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab -
Component Annotation.
Selected Component Annotation See table Properties Tab - Selected Component
Annotation.
Component Loading See table Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component
Loading.
Cross Probing See table Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Cross Probing.
Symbols See the table Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Symbols You can
specify which symbols to exclude when loading components into the Databook tool
from xDX Designer for verification. See Specifying Symbols to Exclude.
Advanced See table Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Advanced.
Objects
Table 3-19. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Instantiation/
Annotation
Option Description
Maintain Maintains the visibility of existing properties, based on the current
Property component if annotating, or symbol if adding a new part.
Visibility

206 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 3-19. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Instantiation/


Annotation (cont.)
Option Description
Annotate Annotates components with a property whose value defines the database
Special library name used when the part was added to the schematic or updated
Library (default property name is DXDB_LIBNAME).
Property
Note: When using the xDX Variant Manager tool to substitute schematic
components (for example, a resistor for a capacitor), change the
DXDB_LIBNAME property value to the name of the component library (for
example, Capacitor Library) to enable the Library pulldown menu in the
Databook tool Search pane, so you can select the component library. This
procedure is also useful whenever a component is loaded into the Databook
tool and you need to select a part from a different library.
Annotate Used in earlier releases when migrating from ViewDataBook II, when text
Undefined files were common and used a string like "NULL" or "N/A" or "-" in the
Values database instead of "" (or ,, in a CSV file). Use this option to configure the
Databook tool to treat that string as an undefined value as follows:
If checked, the Databook tool provides a property with the string, and a
netlister or downstream tool needs to interpret that value properly.
If unchecked, the property is not added to the schematic.
Ignore system Ignores regional settings when placing components.
decimal sign If checked, the decimal point for the component value is shown with a
setting and use comma (,) in the Databook tool, but placed with a period in the schematic.
For example, if the format of the component value is 2,2K in the Databook
tool, then its value is 2.2K when placed on a schematic.

Table 3-20. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Annotation


Option Description
Change Component Changes the component when a new symbol is specified.
Enabled Note: When this option is selected, the graphic displayed in the
symbol previewer replaces the graphic on the schematic.

For example, if an analog graphic library and a resistor graphic library


use the res symbol name, the graphic for both libraries is replaced on the
schematic (may not be the intended result).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 207


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 3-20. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Annotation


Option Description
Remove Stale Removes properties from the component when annotating properties
Properties from from the Databook tool into an existing component in xDX Designer if
Component the following condition(s) are met:
A property value is empty.
A property value matches the Undefined Value option value, and the
Annotate Undefined Values option is not selected.
The Annotate option (Libraries tab) is not selected for a property.
A more generic version of the component that does not contain the
entire set of defined properties is being annotated.
For example, when a component is loaded into the Databook tool
and properties are removed from the query, resulting in an increased
number of possible candidates.
Use European Displays all or selected properties in configuration using European
Notation for notation (based on International Electrotechnical Commission 62
Property Standards). Notation is applied to the Databook tool Search window
values and schematic symbol labels.

Table 3-21. Properties Tab - Selected Component Annotation


Option Description
Enable Annotation to Annotates properties to designated components in xDX Designer.
Selected Component
Ignore Blocks If checked, the Databook tool does not annotate properties to any
blocks that might be selected.

Table 3-22. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Component Loading


Option Description
Load Components Loads components into a new Databook window pane instead of the open
into New Window Search pane.
Symbol Properties Loads symbol properties when loading a component from xDX Designer.
Get Loaded The Databook tool scans the component and symbol properties when
loading a component from a schematic, and only adds annotated
properties to the component.
Use a property Selects a property type specified when loading a component from xDX
value for the tab Designer. The value xDX Designer uses when instantiating the
string component with any valid user-defined property is replaced, such as
REFDES.
Excluded Excludes the properties specified when loading a component from xDX
Properties when Designer.
Loading

208 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

Table 3-23. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Cross Probing


Option Description
Enable Cross Highlights the relevant components on the schematic as the Databook tool
Probing processes each group.
Zoom On Cross Zooms in on the component when selected in the Databook tool (zoom
Probing action dependent on the component tracking preference selected).

Note: Available only after you use a load component or verify operation
to load components from a schematic into the Databook tool.

Table 3-24. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Symbols


Option Description
Symbol Name Shows the name of the symbols you have added to the list to control
inclusion/exclusion.
Exclude Symbol Shows yes if you have checked the Exclude Symbol When Loading box
for the symbol, and no if the check box is unchecked.
Edit Opens the Symbol dialog box with the exclude status of the selected
symbol name.
Add Opens the Symbol dialog box for you to add a new symbol name and set it
to exclude.
Remove Removes the selected symbol from the list of symbol names.

Table 3-25. Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab - Advanced


Option Description Values
Fraction Determines how fractional numbers appear in xDX %.10f, %.16f, or
DataBook (format follows Visual C++ programming %f
language specifications).
For example, choosing %.10f displays all fractional values
with up to 10 digits to the right of the decimal point
(additional digits are rounded).
Tip: If you are unable to find a property value in xDX
DataBook using search or verify, type %g into the Fraction
Format menu text field (ensures that numerical data in the
relational database is set to the appropriate fractional
format and numerical values are not rounded).

Related Topics
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box
Configuring the xDX DataBook Script
Databook Configuration File Changes

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 209


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box


To access: In the xDX DataBook window (View > xDX DataBook) window, right-click >
Properties.
Use this dialog box to edit the Databook tool startup, search, appearance, and color properties.
Note
The design entry tool stores changes you make in the xDX DataBook Properties dialog box
in the DxDesigner.xml file. See DxDesigner.xml File Format on page 53.

210 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-26. Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options
Field (Tab) Description
Startup Defines the Databook tool startup behavior:
Enable database support (licensed) If checked, enables you to select
one of the following Database Connections:
Connect to databases at startup Establishes a connection to all
databases referenced in the .dbc configuration file at startup (default
database connection setting).
Connect to databases and update tables at startup Connects to all
databases in the .dbc file at startup and checks the databases for new or
removed table fields (.dbc file is modified to reflect any changes).
Connect to databases as needed Reduces startup time by not
connecting to a database until the first time you execute a query against a
library. The Databook tool then connects to the database referenced by
the library.
Strip from connect string when saving
If checked, specifies that you must enter the database password at
startup.
If unchecked, stores the database password in the DxDesigner.xml file,
so you do not have to enter the password at startup.
Do not show CL View when configuration is loaded If checked, hides
the CL View when the .dbc file is loaded (unchecked by default). When
you invoke the Databook tool and load a project file, only the Search
window appears.
Selecting this option simplifies opening a .dbc file for editing: In the
Databook tool Search window, right-click and select Configure > Edit
Configuration.

Tip: Click the Show CL View button to open the CL View for the
current session.

Note: When the .dbc file is not loaded, the CL View always appears.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 211


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-26. Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)


Field (Tab) Description
Search Defines parameters for the Databook tool searches:

Display
Display records with different symbols as a single row
If checked, displays records with identical fields, but different symbols,
in the same row.
If unchecked, displays records with identical fields, but different
symbols, in different rows.
Performance
Query results limit Specifies the maximum number of query results to
return (default is 400)
Query time out Specifies, in seconds, how long to wait before timing
out (default is 60 seconds).
Automatically detect bad search criteria Detects bad search criteria.
Automatically runs additional searches when the initial search does not
produce results.
Automatically query libraries when selected Performs a query on the
selected library. If unchecked, you must first select the library, then click
the search (!) icon in the Search window to get search results.
Verification
Ignore composites
If checked, specifies whether to eliminate composite symbols from
consideration during live or hierarchical verification.
If unchecked, all components, including composites, are verified.
Use Databook cache Specifies whether to use the Databook cache
during verification.
If checked, the Databook tool stores results of the initial search in
memory, which improves the speed of subsequent searches.
If unchecked, the cache is not used.
Note: Depending on your database size, use of the Databook tool cache
can result in consumption of large amounts of memory

212 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-26. Databook Tool Properties Dialog Box Options (cont.)


Field (Tab) Description
Appearance Display numeric values with magnitude (see Editing Library Properties)
If checked, converts numeric values and displays them using a magnitude
suffix (for example, displays a capacitance value of 10 nF).
If unchecked, displays the actual numeric value from the database (for
example, 10e-9).
Auto-size query results columns
If checked, automatically adjusts the width of each column in the Results
pane and shows complete cell data.
If unchecked, optimizes the size of the data cells.
Show <All> as the first item in the library combo box.
If unchecked, shows <All> as the last item in the library combo box.
Enable xDX DataBook Window Column ToolTips
If checked, shows cell contents for columns too narrow to display the entire
string value. Applies to both the CL View and Search windows.

Note: Exiting xDX Designer unchecks this option, and the CL View
and Search window columns open to their default sizes when you next
invoke xDX DataBook.
Display
Database Field Names Displays the field names from the database
table column headings for each library listed in the Search window.
xDX Designer Property Names Displays the xDX Designer property
names for each library listed in the Search window.
Tip: Select xDX Designer Property Names when linking multiple tables
and for viewing the property names instead of table names.
Colors Search Changes search text, highlighted text, link text, and background
colors.
Verify Changes verify text and background.
Restore Defaults Restores the colors to their original settings.
Each color property dropdown includes the following option:
Other Selects a color different from those available in the menu color
palettes

Related Topics
Databook Tool Window
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box
Searching for Components in Database Libraries

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 213


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Databook Tool - Query Builder

Databook Tool - Query Builder


To access: In the xDX DataBook window (View > xDX DataBook) Search pane, click Query
Builder on the Databook tool Search pane
Use this dialog box to build a set of conditions for the Databook tool to use in the search.
Objects
Table 3-27. Databook Tool Query Builder Options
Field Description
Condition Enables the drop-down list boxes from which you can create a
condition expression.
AND Specifies that the next condition should be ANDed with the
previous condition or group of conditions. Not active until at
least one condition exists.
OR Specifies that the next condition should be ORed with the
previous condition or group of conditions. Not active until at
least one condition exists.
( and ) Groups conditions.
<- Removes the most recent condition or logical operator.
Add Adds the expression to the list of conditions.
Cancel Cancels the current expression.

Related Topics
Creating a Databook Search Query

214 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX Archiver Wizard

xDX Archiver Wizard


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Archiver
Use this wizard to output a copy of a project and any related files to a specified archive location.
Description
The archive process generates two additional files: the DxArchiver.xml file, which contains
archive script information; and the manifest.xml file, which contains data file information.

Figure 3-13. xDX Archiver Wizard Dialog Boxes

Objects
Table 3-28. xDX Archiver Wizard Contents
Field Description
Options Page
xDX Designer project file Defines the project to archive.
Target directory Defines the location of the archive copy.
Compress using zip format If checked, compresses the output into a single .zip file.
Create pdf If checked, creates a single .pdf file that contains a line drawing
of each schematic sheet in the project.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 215


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX Archiver Wizard

Table 3-28. xDX Archiver Wizard Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Set all Dynamic Planes to If checked, changes physical planes setting from Dynamic to
Static Static.
Additional files Page
Add files to be archived Enables you to optionally add files to or delete files from the
archive. Use the icons to manipulate the files.
Note: xDX Archiver excludes the sAddress.adr file from ../
database/cdbsvr/ directory. Do not add this file to the
archive or your archive project will not open.
Results Page
Creating archive Lists the files copied to the archive location and any warnings
and/or errors associated with the archive.

Related Topics
DxArchiver

216 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab

xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab


To access: File > Export > PDF, General tab
Use this dialog box and tab to select basic settings for PDF output.
Description
The xDX PDF tool is used to read an xDX Designer schematic, generate a hierarchical
representation of the schematic design, and then save the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.

Figure 3-14. DxPDF Dialog Box - General Tab

Objects
Table 3-29. xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents
Field Description
Output File Specifies the output PDF file.
Name
Range Specifies the range to print as one of the following:
Project
Block (default). Use the pulldown to specify which block.
PDF Color Options:

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 217


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab

Table 3-29. xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Black on White Generates a PDF file with a white background, maps all colors to black, and
(Suppress Black suppresses (does not print) black text. This is the Default choice.
Text)
Color on White Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and white background.
(Black Text) DxPDF retrieves the color map from the setup in xDX Designer.
Note: Select a reasonable color scheme in xDX Designer before
selecting this option. From xDX Designer, click Setup > Settings,
Display (category), Objects (subcategory), and then specify colors that work
with the white background.
Color on Black Generates a PDF file with a color foreground and black background.
DxPDF retrieves the color map from the current setup.
Note: Before selecting this option, select a reasonable color scheme in
xDX Designer. From xDX Designer, choose Setup > Settings, Display
(category), Objects (subcategory), and then specify colors that work with
the black background.
Black on White Generates a PDF file with a white background and maps all colors to black.
(Prints Text in This option prints black text.
Black)
Color on White Generates a PDF file with a white background and prints color text.
(Prints Color Note: Select a reasonable color scheme in xDX Designer before
Text) selecting this option. From xDX Designer, click Setup > Settings,
Display (category), Objects (subcategory), and then specify colors that work
with the white background.
Add popup If checked, creates a shortcut menu in the generated PDF file for each
menu on component in the design. When you click a component in Adobe Acrobat,
components the shortcut menu displays the symbol name, properties, and the option to
push to the underlying schematic if the component is a composite, as shown
below:

Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as Symbol (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Visible If checked, displays a box around hyperlink text in the PDF. Click the link
Component/Net to go to the text associated with the hyperlink.
Hyperlinks
Start PDF If checked, starts the PDF Reader.
Reader After
Generation

218 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab

Table 3-29. xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Change ICTs to If checked, creates a bitmap of a schematic representation of the
schematics Interconnectivity Table (ICT), including the ICTs components and
connectivity. The components appear in a best-guess location, but the
placement is not editable.

Related Topics
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 219


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab


To access: File > Export > PDF, Advanced tab
Use this dialog box and tab to select advanced settings for PDF output.
Description
xDX PDF is used to read a xDX Designer schematic, generate a hierarchical representation of
the schematic design, and then save the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.

Figure 3-15. xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Objects
Table 3-30. xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents
Field Description
Stop At Stops the printing at the level specified by the property entered here.
Property Default: STD

220 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Table 3-30. xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab Contents (cont.)
Field Description
URL-valued Specifies properties whose values are potential URLs. xDX PDF generates
Properties links in the PDF file for the values of these properties. To add properties to
the list, type the property name(s) in the box. This causes the property name
to show up in the PDF output surrounded by a link box to the actual URL.
Rules:
You must use forward slashes (/) when specifying URL-valued
properties. Do not use backslashes (\).
If the property name contains more than one string, such as Arbitrary
Text, enclose the strings in double quotes.
If you are entering multiple property names, place a space between
names.
Schematic Sets the specific order in which to process sheets in a schematic hierarchy.
Sheet Order Rule: Make sure that each composite block has a component-level property
Property with a specific name whose value is an integer as the starting page number
for that set of schematic sheets.
Note: Point to the shortcut menu, such as Symbol (as shown above) to
display the sub-menu.
Minimum line Sets the width for all lines in the schematic including boxes, arcs, and so on.
thickness This value is a scale factor (default of 1.00 = 100%). If you want to increase
the line thicknesses two times over their present thickness, use a value of 2.00
(200%). To decrease line thicknesses by 1/2, use a value of 0.50 (50%).
Rule: This setting does not change text thickness.
Stroke font Specifies the line width for stroke fonts.
line width
Use exclusion If checked, excludes any sheets from the PDF file that you have specified to
info exclude. See Excluding Sheets from Printing or PDF Generation - xDX
Designer.

Related Topics
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab
Exporting Design Documentation in PDF Format - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 221


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab


To access: File > Export > PDF, Fonts tab
Use this dialog box tab to specify the fonts xDX PDF uses for each xDX Designer font type.
Description
By default, the xDX Designer project font settings dictate xDX PDF font mapping. Any settings
you specify on this tab override the default settings.

Tip
: To change xDX Designers default font settings, click Setup > Settings, Display
(category), Font Styles (subcategory).

xDX PDF reads an xDX Designer schematic, generates a hierarchical representation of the
schematic design, and then saves the design as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file.

You can map any xDX Designer font types to one of the following:

Native PDF font


System scalable font (Windows font)
xDX Designer stroke font emulation
Figure 3-16. xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

222 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

Objects
Table 3-31. xDX PDF Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Field Description
DxD Font Name Displays the available xDX Designer font types.
PDF Font Displays the font mapping for each xDX Designer font type. (You
can change the font mapping from the Font Mapping Dialog Box
on page 227.)
Browse (...) button Opens the Font Mapping dialog box for the associated PDF Font so
that you can change the font mapping.
Use xDX Designer font If checked, uses the font mapping defined in Setup > Settings,
mappings Display > Font Styles.
If not checked, uses the font mapping you select in the Font
Mapping Dialog Box on page 227.
Scale Factor Increases or reduces text size. The scaling factor is a percentage
value. The higher the value, the larger the text size.

Related Topics
xDX PDF Dialog Box - General Tab
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Advanced Tab
Font Mapping Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 223


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Find and Replace Text Dialog Box


To access: Edit > Find/Replace, or
Use this dialog box to search for text, or to search for and replace text.
Figure 3-17. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-32. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Find what Specifies the string of characters to search for.The pull-down list provides access
to previously used search strings.
Within Defines the scope of your search.
Found Reports how many instances of the string were found

224 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Table 3-32. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More >> Provides access to additional details to constrain or expand your text search.
(Less << hides the additional details.)
Look in - If checked, searches the specified area.
Look for - Defines the type of text to look for. The pulldown below the
options selects the scope of your search:
Current Values - Searches the scope displayed in the Properties dialog box.
The scope can be symbol, block, or instance.
All values - Searches all scopes. If the property has multiple values for
different scopes, the xDX Designer tool reports all values.
Symbol values - Searches for the value on the Central Library symbol.
Block values - Searches for values assigned to blocks in a flat hierarchy, or
to blocks at the top level of a hierarchical design. Does not search the
hierarchy below the block.
Instance values - Searches for values on instances of a symbol anywhere in
a flat or hierarchical design.
Options - Provides the following search limiters:
Match case - If checked, any hits must match the exact upper and lower
case of the search string.
Whole words - If checked, any hits must be a whole word. Ignores
instances where the search string is part of another word.
Use wildcards - If checked, allows the following wildcard characters:
* - for multiple characters
? - for any single character
Example 1:
Find Expression - ab*cd
Found String - abXYZcd
Replace Expression - klm*ryz
Replaced String - klmXYZryz
Example 2:
Find Expression - ad*y??
Found String - adXWYyZRF
Replace Expression - wert*tr??
Replaced String - wertXWYtrZR
Use regular expressions - If checked, excludes the Whole Words
selection. See the topic Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches on
page 481.
Search in selection - Searches only selected objects.
Select properties only - (Find tab only.)
Remove empty property - (Replace tab only.)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 225


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

Table 3-32. Find and Replace Text Dialog Box Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the search string and selects it
Find All Finds all occurrences of the search string and selects them. (Find tab only.)
Replace Specifies a character string to substitute for the found occurrences. (Replace tab
With only.)
Replace Replaces a single occurrence of the search string. (Replace tab only.)
Replace Replaces all occurrences of the search string. (Replace tab only.)
All

Related Topics
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches

226 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box

Font Mapping Dialog Box


To access: File > Export > PDF, select Fonts tab, click next to the appropriate font.
Use this dialog box to select the source for font mapping.
Figure 3-18. Font Mapping Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-33. DxPDF Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents
Option Description
Use xDX Designer Uses the settings from Setup > Settings, Display > Font Styles to
mapping map fonts.
Use stroke font Displays a dropdown list of stroke fonts from which to select.

Use PDF native font Allows you to choose a native PDF font.
Native PDF Font button Displays a list of the available native
PDF fonts from which to select.
Sample Font Listing button Opens a PDF document showing
examples of the available native PDF fonts.
Recommendation: For most efficient and portable results, use
Native PDF fonts.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 227


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Font Mapping Dialog Box

Table 3-33. DxPDF Dialog Box Fonts Tab Contents (cont.)


Option Description
Use system scalable
font Allows you to choose a system scalable font.
System Scalable Font button Displays a list of available
system scalable fonts (Windows fonts). Also allows you to
choose a style and size for the font, and shows a sample of your
selection. The system scalable font you select overrides the
selected stroke font.

Related Topics
xDX PDF Dialog Box - Fonts Tab

228 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Generate Symbol Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Generate Block Symbol
Use this dialog box to generate a new block symbol.
Figure 3-19. Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-34. Generate Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Block Input Specifies the currently selected block.
Symbol Specifies the symbol name. Uses the same name as the block name, by
Output default, to create the hierarchical association.
If Symbol Provides two options for handling the existing symbol:
Already Exists Overwrite It Selected, overwrites a symbol that has the name specified
in the Symbol Output field.
Update It If you make changes to an existing symbol, this updates the
symbol to include your changes.
Open Symbol If checked, opens the generated symbol for editing in the Symbol Editor.
in Symbol
Editor
Link the If checked, links the symbol to the block, and you cannot modify the Symbol
symbol to the name. The block and its corresponding symbol have the same name.
block If un-checked, you can create a new symbol starting from the interface of the
active block, but no link is preserved. Creates a new independent symbol.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 229


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Generate Symbol Dialog Box

Table 3-34. Generate Symbol Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Advanced Displays the Advanced Options dialog box, which allows you to set the
button following:
Symbol properties - Adds properties to the symbol you are creating. The
syntax for this field is: name=value. Use spaces to separate properties.
Symbol property size - sets the size of the symbol attribute.
(Use whitespace to separate pins in the input and output pin list.)
Input pin(s) - Specifies the names of inputs to the symbol. The xDX
Designer tool uses the values in this field as a last resort in the algorithm
that searches for I/O nets. Type the names of the input pins separated by a
space. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll through multiple name
entries.
Output pin(s) - Specifies the names of outputs from the symbol.
The following fields specify settings to override the values you assigned in
the Setup > Settings dialog box:
Pin spacing
Pin length
Pin label size
Pin sides
For each of the following pin types, select placement values of top, left,
bottom, or right for each:
IN, OUT, ANALOG, BI, OCM, OEL, TRI

Related Topics
Creating a Bottom-Up Hierarchical Design

230 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Insert Object Dialog Box

Insert Object Dialog Box


To access: Add > Insert Object
Use this dialog box to insert an object into your document.
Figure 3-20. Insert Object Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-35. Insert Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Create New If selected, specifies that you want to insert a new object into the
document.
Create from File If selected, specifies that you want to insert an existing object into the
document.
Object Type Select the type of information you want to insert into the document.
Display as Icon If checked, display the link to the object as an icon in the document.
Result Describes the result of the selected option.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 231


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Keyin Netlister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Keyin Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the Keyin Netlister.
Figure 3-21. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-36. Keyin Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting Keyin netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of:
Project
Board (specify which board form the pulldown list)
Block (specify which block form the pulldown list)
Options If checked, the Open the generated file option allows you to
specify the following:
Open with Specify the program you want to use to open the
file (use the browse button or specify the path to the viewer
program).
Run new viewer for each generated file Spawns a separate
view for each generated file.

232 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab

LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > LineSimLink, Options tab
Use this dialog box tab to configure the LineSim Link tool to export to HyperLynx for signal
integrity simulation, or to import any new data from HyperLynx.
Figure 3-22. LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab

Objects
Table 3-37. LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents
Field Description
Load Data from Start the retrieving process of the selected nets in the schematic.
xDX Designer
(button)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 233


Dialog Boxes and Windows
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab

Table 3-37. LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Connect to xDX Connect to xDX Designer when LineSimLink is started.
Designer at start Note: If this is selected, and you have nets selected in the schematic,
the retrieving process is automatically started when LineSimLink is
started.
Selected Nets Display of selected nets.
Note: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology
tab.
Tip: You can see all of the selected nets on the Schematic Topology tab.
Schematic Contents
Complete Export using the complete schematic including interconnections.
schematic
Parts only Export using only the parts in the schematic, excluding interconnections.
schematic
Transmission Line Properties
Layer Determines the following transmission line parameters derived from the
layer stack-up:
Copper thickness
Dielectric thicknesses above and below
Dielectric constants
LineSim assumes that a stack-up transmission line is routed on a board
with a plane layer. Stack-ups with no plane layers are allowed.
If a stack-up has not yet been defined for the current project, the default
is a six layer stack-up:
Top side - external layer available for traces
Ground Plane - not available for traces
Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
Inner signal layer - internal layer available for traces
Power Plane - not available for traces
Bottom side - external layer available for traces.
Default values for dielectric material type & thickness and copper weight
will be the same as those set by default in LineSim.
Length Defines the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in
a net) for simulation purposes. The default length is three inches (3000
mils).
Width Defines the default transmission line width. The default trace width is 6
mils (0.006 inches).

234 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab

Table 3-37. LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Passives Prefixes Shows all reference designator prefixes used for passive components.
The Type column is a fixed list of passive device types: Inductor,
Capacitor, Resistor, Ferrite Bead, Models (see LineSimLink - Passives
Prefixes - Models Usage on page 466).
Tip: Separate the list with a space, comma, or semicolon.
Tip: Separate the list with a space, comma, or semicolon.

Supply Nets Shows all nets in the design that are voltage supply nets.
To add a supply net, scroll to the bottom of the Supply Nets list, click
twice, slowly, in the Net box, and type the name of the net. Type the
voltage value in the Voltage box.
Filename Specify the path to the LineSim FFS export or import file in the box, or
you can select the browse button browse to the design project file.
Export to Opens HyperLynx and generates a LineSim schematic file.
HyperLynx Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same
(button) machine as xDX Designer.
Import from Imports the information from the listed file and populates the dialog box
HyperLynx fields. The xDX Designer tool compares the imported data with the
(button) currently loaded schematic topology.
Note: To activate this button, install HyperLynx on the same
machine as xDX Designer.
See also: Merge Differences Dialog Box on page 238

Related Topics
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link
Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 235


Dialog Boxes and Windows
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology


Tab
Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > LineSimLink, Schematic Topology tab
Use this dialog box tab to control the nets in the LineSim Link tool schematic topology.
Figure 3-23. LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

Objects
Table 3-38. LineSimLink - Schematic Topology Tab Contents
Field Description
Schematic Lists all of the nets loaded from xDX Designer.
Topology list

236 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Schematic Topology Tab

Table 3-38. LineSimLink - Schematic Topology Tab Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Automatically zooms to the selected net.
Tip: If a pin is selected, xDX Designer zooms to the pin parent
component.
Exclude/Include Deselects the selected electrical net or subnet in the Schematic Topology
Net (button) list (not in the schematic). If a subnet is excluded, it may cause other
subnets to become excluded if the chosen subnet is the only path
between other subnets.
Tip: Available only when an electrical net or subnet is selected

Change Direction: Specifies the direction for bidirectional pins.


Tip: The button contains the graphical representation of the pin
direction that will be applied when you click it.
Moves the selected pin up or down.

Related Topics
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link
Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 237


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box

Merge Differences Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: On the LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab on page 233, click Import from
HyperLynx
Use this dialog box to compare the current topology with the imported topology.
Note
HyperLynx must be installed on the same machine as the xDX Designer to access this
dialog box.

Figure 3-24. Merge Differences Dialog Box

238 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Merge Differences Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-39. Merge Differences Dialog Box - Schematic Topology tab Contents

Field Description
Current Topology Shows the topology retrieved from xDX Designer schematic or from
box previous import.
Imported Topology Shows the topology received from the current import.
box
Updated Properties Shows the updated property and values for the selected pin.
boxes
Accept (button) Back-annotates the model assignments.
Deny (button) Closes the dialog box without importing any new data.
Show stackup and Expands the dialog box to show more options.
trace changes
Changes in the Shows all changes made in the stackup.
stackup box
Layer Shows the layer on which the stackup resides.
Trace Width Shows the default transmission line length (trace length between pins in
a net) for simulation purposes.
Trace Length Shows the default transmission line width.

Related Topics
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 239


Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Library Symbol Dialog Box

New Library Symbol Dialog Box


Scope: Netlist project
To access: File > New > Library Symbol
Use this dialog box to configure a new symbol in a Netlist project.
Figure 3-25. New Library Symbol Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-40. Library Symbol Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Symbol name Enter a name that is applied to the symbol
Library Choose the desired library
Symbol creation method Choose one of the following symbol creation methods:
Open new empty symbol in Symbol Editor
See also: Symbol Creation.
Launch Symbol Wizard

240 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box

New Project Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > New > Project, or click the New Project button
Use this dialog box to select a Project Template for a new project, and then set parameters such
as the project name, project location, and library location (if applicable).
Description
The Project Templates list box appears on the left side of the New Project dialog box. The right
side of the dialog box changes based on which Project Template you choose.

Figure 3-26. New Project Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-41. New Project Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Name Specifies the name of the project
Location Specifies where the project is located on the network. You can
use the browse button to navigate to a specific location
Central Library Path This field may be previously filled in from a Project Template
that you selected. Or, you can manually specify a Central
Library or navigate to one with the browse button.
Enable concurrent design If checked, specifies a client-server Configuration Manager.
Server Name If you checked the previous box, you use this field to specify the
name of the server

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 241


Dialog Boxes and Windows
New Project Dialog Box

Table 3-41. New Project Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Layout Tool From the drop-down list, choose the layout tool that your netlist
(Netlist project only) output will be targeting for this project.
Advanced button: This brings up an Advanced dialog that
allows you to specify a path to:
Constraints Definition file (*.cns)
PCB Configuration file (*.cfg)

Related Topics
Creating a Design Entry Tool Project
Project Templates

242 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Open Block Dialog Box

Open Block Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Open > Block
Use this dialog box to open a block that is internal or external to the current project.
Description
The open block appears as a tab in the schematic window.

Figure 3-27. Open Block Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-42. Open Block Dialog Box Fields
Fields Description
Look in Specifies the project that contains the block.
Block name Specifies the name of the block.
Block of type Specifies a block type to use to filter the list.
Open Opens the specified block in the schematic window.
Cancel Aborts the procedure and closes the window.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 243


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Packager Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Package or the button.
Use this dialog box to configure the Packager, which prepares the project for forward
annotation by assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic
to a physical part.
Figure 3-28. Packager Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-43. Packager Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Project Displays the current project file or allows you to browse to a
project file.

244 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Table 3-43. Packager Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Packaging Options By default, the Packager maintains existing component packages and
minimizes the number of parts used by placing components into unused gates. Use the
following packaging options to control packaging behavior.
Operation Package Symbols Maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components. This
is the default setting.
Repackage All Symbols The Packager removes all the
Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
Repackage Unfixed Symbols Packages all components
except those that have a Frozen Package property value of Fix.
Verify Packaging Checks the design to verify that it will
package correctly. Writes errors to the partpkg.log file.
Optimization If you have chosen either of the Repackage options in the
Operation field, this field is not applicable and is greyed out.
From the pulldown, choose one of the following:
Design Allows symbols to be combined into packages
regardless of the symbols location within the schematic. This
option is the default.
Block This option only allows symbols within the same
block to be combined into packages.
Page This option only allows symbols on the same page to
be combined into packages.
Scope A drop-down list displays the blocks that make up a design and
the sheets that make up each block.
If you leave the Scope field blank, the Packager works on the
entire design.
If you choose a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets
in that block.
If you choose a particular sheet from one of the blocks, the
Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that
sheet.
Update PDB Properties Displays component properties from the parts database (PDB) on
on Symbol the schematic. Select this option if you are getting component
properties from the PDB, and not from the Databook tool. For
more information refer to Annotating Component Properties on a
Schematic With the Databook Tool.
Allow Alpha-only Prevents the Packager from replacing existing alpha-only
Reference Designators Reference Designators.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 245


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Table 3-43. Packager Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Log CDB Data Writes verbose information on the packaging process to the
Packager results tab and to a log file. To optimize performance,
enable this option to debug packager errors, and then disable once
the design is error-free.
Fill Reference Designator If checked, the Packager fills in Reference Designators (Ref Des)
Gaps when new unpackaged parts are added to the design.
Example: Given U100, U102, and U103: If a new part is added, it
is assigned Reference Designator U101 to fill in the gap between
U100 and U102.
If unchecked, Ref Des assignments continue at the top of the
existing numbering scheme when new unpackaged parts are
added to the design.
Example: Given the parts in the previous example: If a new part
is added, the gap between U100 and U102 is retained and the new
part is assigned Ref Des U104.
Report warnings for If checked, the Packager includes warnings for this condition in
single pin nets the PartPkg.log file and on the Packager results tab.
If unchecked (default), warnings for this condition are suppressed.
PDB Extraction Options -- When you package a design, xDX Designer downloads a local
copy of all Central Library parts used in the design. This is known as extraction You use PDB
Extraction Options to control extraction behavior.
Only Extract Missing Extracts only those parts that do not already exist in the local
Library Data copy. Does not check for newer versions of local parts.
Extract Missing with If selected, allows you to extract parts from the attached library
Selected Library Data that differ from those in the local project.
Select Opens the Select Parts to Update Dialog Box on
page 248.
Update Local Library Extracts only those parts that do not already exist in the local
Data with Newer Central copy. Overwrites existing local parts with newer versions if they
Library Data exist in the Central Library.
Rebuild Local library Deletes local data and re-extracts.
data; Preserve locally Exception: If you have imported any data directly into the local
built data copy (for example, an FPGA Pin File), that data is preserved.
Delete local data, then Deletes all local data and re-extracts.
rebuild all local library
data

246 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Packager Dialog Box

Related Topics
Packaging a Design
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 247


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

Select Parts to Update Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Package > Select
Use this dialog box to update the project with updated parts from the attached library.
Figure 3-29. Select Parts to Update Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-44. Select Parts to Update Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Out-of-sync parts Displays the out-of-sync part number, the timestamp of the part in
the project, and the timestamp of the part in the library.
Select All If checked, selects all rows in the table.

Related Topics
Packaging a Design

248 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box

Part Lister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister
Use this dialog box to control the Part Lister, which creates a Bill of Materials for the design.
Note
If you have components in your design with properties that are used by Part Lister and that
are also dependent on packaging (such as Ref Designator), consider packaging the design
before running the Part Lister. See Packaging a Design in the xDX Designer Users Manual.

Objects
The Part Lister dialog box contains the following panes:
o Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane on page 250
o Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane on page 252
o Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns on page 257
o Part Lister Dialog Box - Header on page 264
The following file stores the default settings for the Part Lister:
<install_path>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\templates\dxdesigner\<proj_type>\Part
ListerDefaults.ipl
A Part Lister initialization file stores the local settings you specify.
Related Topics
Part Lister Initialization File Format
Generating Bills of Materials

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 249


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister, General
Use the General pane to specify the name and location of the output Bill of Materials (BOM)
file, and the scope of the generated BOM.
Figure 3-30. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Objects
Table 3-45. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the name of the output file. You can use the folder icon to browse
to an existing folder.
The default name in the text box is the name of the open project, with an
appropriate extension based on the settings for Output in the Advanced
pane.
Scope
Select one of the following scopes for the Part Lister to operate on:
Project
Board (specify which board from the pulldown list)
Block (specify which block from the pulldown list)
Options

250 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

Table 3-45. Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Open the Check to open the generated file at the conclusion of the Part Lister
generated file process.
Open with Check, and then specify the tool to use to read the file.
Options Specify options for the tool you specified to read the file. For example, if
you specify notepad.exe in the Open with field, you could use the /A
option to open the file as ANSI.
Config Name Specify the name (or use the default provided) of the <name>.ipl
configuration file. The pulldown list provides a list of configuration files
found by Part Lister in the search order. If you do not provide a name, Part
Lister uses the first configuration file it finds in the search order. For more
information, see The Part Lister Configuration File.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 251


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister, Advanced
Use the Advanced pane to specify the output file format Part Lister produces. If your design has
variants, you can specify the variant database in this pane.
Figure 3-31. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Objects
Table 3-46. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents
Field Description
Output

252 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Table 3-46. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
format Specifies the type of output file from the pulldown as one of the following:
Text File (PLAIN) Produces a text file output such as:
Part Lister output for Board1

Generated on Monday, March 21, 2011

# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost

--------------------------------------------------

1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32

2 1 CONN14P U3

...

6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50

--------

8.14

HTML Produces an HTML file, such as:


Part Lister output for Board1 Generated on Monday, March 21,

2011
EXCEL (Prerequisite - Excel is installed.) Produces an Excel
spreadsheet, such

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 253

as:
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Table 3-46. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
file extension Specifies the file extension of the output file. Automatically updates
depending on the setting specified in the format pulldown.
Add Title Rows Specifies whether or not to include Column Titles (defined on the Header
pane) at the top of each column.
Examples:
If checked (The bolded lines in the following example show the title
rows added)
Part Lister output for Board1Generated on Thursday,
March 24, 2011
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost
----------------------------------------------
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32
...

If unchecked (The bolded lines shown in the previous example are


left out of the report as shown below:)
Part Lister output for Board1
Generated on Thursday, March 24, 2011
1 1 74LS374-SMD U1 5.32 ...
Text Output
Split into pages Enables use of the lines each field to specify the number of Text Output
lines produced before the Part Lister inserts a form feed.
Ignore Column If checked, the Part Lister output ignores all column settings in Text Output
Formatting specified in the Columns pane as shown in the following example:

#QTYPart NumberRef DesignatorCost1174LS374-


SMDU15.3221CONN14PU33274LS08-SMDU21.3242C1825-1U-63-10C1-
C252R10K-603R4-R563R47-2512R1-R30.508.14

If unchecked, the Part List uses the column settings as shown in the
following example:
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost --------------
-------------------------------- 1 1 74LS374-SMD U1
5.32 2 1 CONN14P U3 3 1
74LS08-SMD U2 1.32 4 2 C1825-1U-
63-10 C1-C2 5 2 R10K-603 R4-R5
6 3 R47-2512 R1-R3 0.50
-------- 8.14
Delimiter

254 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Table 3-46. Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Specifies a delimiter to use between the columns. Use the > button to select
either the \t (Tab) or the \ (Backslash) characters as a delimiter. Or, specify
your own delimiter in the text box, as shown in the second example below.
Examples:
(Null - no delimiter)
# QTY Part Number Ref Designator Cost ----------
------------------------------------ 1 1 74LS374-SMD
U1 5.32 2 1 CONN14P U3

| (the pipe character)


# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost ------
-------------------------------------------- 1 | 1
|74LS374-SMD |U1 | 5.32 2 | 1
|CONN14P |U3 |

See also: Before first column and After last column in the next table
row
Before first Adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text box in front of the first
column column.
After first If checked, the Part Lister adds the delimiter specified in the Delimiter text
column box after the last column.

|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |--------


--------------------------------------------| 1 | 1
|74LS374-SMD |U1 | 5.32| | 2 | 1
|CONN14P |U3 | |

Example: (If both Before first column and After first column are checked:)
Variant Database
Config Specifies the pathname to a variant component database configuration file
(.dbc). Enables you to create BOMs for variants of a design.
Config Name Specifies the name (or use the default provided) of the <name>.ipl
configuration file. The pulldown list provides a list of configuration files
found by Part Lister in the search order. If you do not provide a name, Part
Lister uses the first configuration file it finds in the search order. For more
information, see The Part Lister Configuration File.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 255


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns


Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

256 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister, Columns
Use this dialog box pane to configure the Part Lister output table that lists the parts used in a
design.
Description
Figure 3-32. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane

You define and control Part Lister output columns in the left-side list box of the Columns pane
as shown in Figure 3-33. The configuration file (PartListerDefaults.ipl by default) defines the
content and settings of the columns pane, as shown in Figure 3-32. The example in Figure 3-33
shows how you can add your own column to this list (such as Cost) and delete others (such as
Value and Description). The buttons above the columns list enable you to customize the
columns as follows:

Add a new column

Reorder a selected column by moving it up

Reorder a selected column by moving it down

Delete a selected column

When you select a column from the column list, the right side of the Columns pane changes to
show the current configuration of the selected column. The following table in this topic
describes the settings accessible on the Columns pane for a selected column.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 257


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Figure 3-33. Part Lister Columns Pane

Objects
Table 3-47. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents
Field Description
Type Choose a column type as one of the following:
Number The column represents sequential row numbers.
Quantity The column represents quantities.
System The column represents internal xDX Designer properties.
Property The column represents the value of a pre-defined property, as
selected in the Property pull-down list.
Text The column represents text, which you specify in the Text box.
Note: Depending on which type you choose, other settings are not
applicable.

258 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 3-47. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Property/ If Type = Property, this field provides a pull-down list of the available Common
Text/ Properties (.prp) used to gather values for the selected column.
System Additionally, this field supports the following properties not in the list of
Common Properties (manually enter one of these in the field rather than use the
pulldown):
Name
Id
Partition
Symbol Name
Sheet
Sheet Number
Block

If the Type = Text, you enter a text value that displays in the selected column.
If the Type = System, you choose an xDX Designer internal property from the
Property pulldown menu.
Display
Align From the pulldown, choose column alignment as one of the following:
Center
Left
Right
Width Specify the column width in characters. The value is an integer in the range 1-
1000. Any text longer than the specified width is right-justified, and the last
character is replaced with a hyphen (-).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 259


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 3-47. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Mode If Type = Property, select the column mode as one of the following:
Full Values for all objects are displayed as a list. The values are sorted
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times.
Slots Values for all objects display as a list. The values sort
alphanumerically. If there is more than one object with the same value, the
value repeats the appropriate number of times. The slot values are appended
after a slash character (such as: U1/1, U1/2, U2/1).
Compress All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are
removed. Ranges such as A1, A2, A3 shorten to A1-A3. Slots are never
appended.
Unique All values sort alphanumerically. Repeated values are removed.
A list such as IC1, IC1, IC2, IC3, IC3, IC5 shortens to IC1, IC2, IC3, IC5.
Total The column displays the total of all numeric values for all objects.
Non-numeric values are ignored.
Decimal If Type = Property, define the number of decimal places (digits after decimal
point). If the value displayed in the column is not a real number, the Part Lister
ignores this setting.
If you specify 0 in the Decimal field, all numbers in the selected column round
to the nearest integer value.
Hidden If checked, the output does not display the column. Note that even if a column is
not visible, the Part Lister might use it for sort order.
List If Type = Property and Display Mode = Full or Compressed, sets the separator
Delimiter used if a list of values displays in a column. Can be any string of characters. The
default is the space character.

260 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 3-47. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Sort If Type = Property and you define a Primary Key (see Part Lister option More >
Primary Key in the following row), then you can set whether the output sorts by
the contents of the column. Choose one of the following sort options:
None The selected column does not determine the sorting order.
Ascending The selected column content sorts in ascending order.
Descending The selected column content sorts in descending order.
Priority Prerequisite - Ascending or Descending is selected. This field
determines the sorting priority if more than one column has the Sort
attribute set to Ascending or Descending.
The valid value is an integer in the range 0-9. The value 9 means the
highest priority. The Part Lister sorts the column with the highest priority
first. If duplicate values occur in this first column, the Part Lister
continues the sort using lower priority columns. If there is more than one
column with the same priority, the order of column definitions (from left
to right in the output) determines the priority.
The sort is alphanumeric (meaning that A2 goes before A11) and case-
insensitive.
See also: BOM Output Example: Sorting Rows With One or More Columns
Designated as Primary

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 261


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Table 3-47. Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
More If Type = Property, you have the option of additional column settings as
follows:
Primary Key (Required) If checked, determines which column the Part
Lister uses as the primary sort. You must apply this primary sort key to at
least one column of type Property, such as the default column Part Number
as shown in the following Example Output.
If a Primary Key is not present on one of the columns, the Part Lister output
is blank.
Secondary Key If checked, determines which column to sort on if there
are identical values listed in the Primary Key row. Apply the secondary sort
key to at least one column of type Property, such as the default column Ref
Designator as shown in the following Example Output.
Sum row values If checked, totals the numerical value of all data in the
column. See the Cost column in the following Example Output.
If the result of the summing produces more than the maximum number of
digits allowed for a particular field (specified by width), the sum total
truncates on the right side. To indicate that a truncation has occurred, the
Part Lister places a hyphen ( -) on the right side of the total.
Example Output:
----------------------------------------------------------

|# |QTY |Part Number |Ref Designator |Cost |

-----------------------------------------------------------

| 1 | 1 |74LS08-SMD |U2 |1.32 |

...

| 6 | 3 |R47-2512 |R1-R3 |0.50, |

| | | | |0.50,0.50 |

| | | | |--------- |

| | | | |8.14 |
Config Specify the name (or use the default provided) of the <name>.ipl configuration
Name file. The pulldown list provides a list of configuration files found by Part Lister
in the search order. If you do not provide a name, Part Lister uses the first
configuration file it finds in the search order. For more information, see The
Part Lister Configuration File.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box

262 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns

Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane


Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 263


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

Part Lister Dialog Box - Header


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Tools > Part Lister, Header
Use this dialog box pane to specify the column headers in the Part Lister output table that lists
the parts used in a design.
Figure 3-34. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane

Objects
Table 3-48. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents
Field Description
Use Custom If checked, the text you enter in the Header text box appears at the top of
Header the Part Lister output.
Header

264 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Part Lister Dialog Box - Header

Table 3-48. Part Lister Dialog Box - Header Pane Contents (cont.)
Field Description
(text box) Enter and edit text in this box to customize the header text that appears at
the top of each Part Lister Report. The Part Lister provides the following
fields to help you customize the header:
$(NAME) - Name of the Project, Board or Block (see example below)
$(DATE) - As shown in the example below
$(TIME) - such as 14:45:28 (hh:mm:ss)
$(VARIANT) - If xDX Designer is in the Variant mode (meaning that
the variant view was created in the EVM window), this field displays
the data specified in the current variant.
Tip: To add a blank line between the Header and the first row, place a
<Return> after the Header followed by one or more spaces.
Example 1:
Part Lister output for $(NAME)

Generated on $(DATE)

The above default header text results in the following (as an example):
Part Lister output for Board1

Generated on Thursday, November 30, 2012

Tip: To add a predefined property to the text box from a list, in the
text enter $( (dollar sign + left paren). Double-click a property from
the list to add it to the text box.
Config Name Specify the name (or use the default provided) of the <name>.ipl
configuration file. The pulldown list provides a list of configuration files
found by Part Lister in the search order. If you do not provide a name, Part
Lister uses the first configuration file it finds in the search order. For more
information, see The Part Lister Configuration File.

Related Topics
Part Lister Dialog Box
Part Lister Dialog Box - General Pane
Part Lister Dialog Box - Columns
Part Lister Dialog Box - Advanced Pane

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 265


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box

Paste Special Dialog Box


To access: Edit > Paste Special
Use this dialog box to paste or embed clipboard contents to a xDX Designer schematic in a
specified format, or to create a link to information that can be updated in another application.
Figure 3-35. Paste Special Dialog Box - Examples 1 and 2

266 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Paste Special Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-49. Paste Special Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Source Displays the name of the source data and its location. If the data was
copied from an application that did not provide the source data and its
location to the Clipboard, such as a MS-DOS based application, Unknown
Source appears.
Paste If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document. See Example 1
in Figure 3-35.
Paste Link If selected, inserts the Clipboard contents into a document and creates a
link to another application as shown in Example 2 in Figure 3-35.
This button is available only when the Clipboard contents come from an
application whose contents data can be linked to the schematic editor.
Save the file containing the information you want to link before you copy
the information to the Clipboard.
As Specify the type of information you want to paste from the Clipboard.
Some of the possibilities are shown as follows:
Graphic A graphic representation of the Clipboard contents and the data needed to
edit an object. The name of the object in the list depends on the type of
contents on the Clipboard.
Formatted Text Text with Formatting for example, Microsoft Excel table formatting.
Picture A graphic representation of information, such as a Windows metafile.
Bitmap A graphic representation used by pictures from other applications, such as
Paintbrush for Windows.
Display As Icon If checked, displays the pasted object using an icon. Example 2 in
Figure 3-35 shows the pasted object using the Adobe Acrobat Document
icon.
If unchecked, displays the pasted object as a simulated representation.
Example 1 in Figure 3-35 shows the pasted object as a page from the
Adobe Acrobat Document.
Change Icon If you check Display As Icon, use this button to display the Change Icon
button dialog box, which allows you to choose a different icon.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 267


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window

Properties Window
To access: View > Properties, or
click the button, or
double-click an object, or
select an object and right-click > Properties
Use this window to view property information associated with the selected object. You can also
add or modify property values, control property visibility, and add properties to the selected
object.
Objects
The Properties window content changes based on the selected object as shown in the
followin example Properties window..
Figure 3-36. Properties Window - Example

Related Topics
Creating a User-Defined Property for the Netlist Project
Adding a Component Property
Creating a Redundant Circuit Using Symmetrical Packaging
Changing a Property or Name Value Visibility Status
Changing the Value of a Component Property
Restoring/Repositioning Symbol Properties to Defined Locations

268 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Properties Window

User Interface Customization


Property Editing Rules

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 269


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Property Definition Editor Dialog Box


This is accessible only from a Netlist project. A similar version of this dialog box is accessible
from the xDM Librarian 100 in the integrated PADSproject.
To access: Tools > Property Definition Editor
Use this dialog box in a Netlist project to define the available properties and their format in a
central library. Use this editor to define new properties, define property types and their
associated syntax, and change certain aspects of pre-defined system properties.
Description
The values of the properties are stored on the data objects and are not defined in the Property
Definition Editor. User-defined properties are used to add custom information to symbols and
parts in PADS DX Designer.

The Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents table describes the Property Definition
Dialog Box fields.

The Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor table describes the default
values and ranges used by the Property Definition Editor.

The Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor table describes the regular
expressions used by the Property Definition Editor.

270 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Figure 3-37. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box- Netlist Project Only

Objects
Table 3-50. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Properties file Provides the path to the .prp file. Use the New Properties File
button to specify a new properties file.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 271


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 3-50. Property Definition Editor Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Property list This list shows the existing properties defined in the current .prp file.
Check the box of each property you want placed in a schematic when
the Packager is used.
You can manage the list as follows:
Add a new property by clicking the New Properties button . An
entry appears at the bottom of the list. Fill in the new property
name and choose the Format as one of: Character String,
Integer, or Real number.
Delete a new property by clicking the Delete Property button.
Undelete a new property by clicking the Undo Delete button .
Click the Name or Format field name at the top of the list to
reorganize the list.
Advanced Click this button to expand the Property Definition Editor to view the
advanced features on the property you have selected in the Property
list.
Options applied in Edit certain characteristics of the selected property in this section of
design entry the dialog, such as Default Color, Default Font.
See the following table for more information.
Attach selected Specify the object type associated with the selected property such as:
property to Symbol, Pin, Net.
Include selected In xDX Designer, the Design entry option is the only choice.
property in property
lists for
Ignore notation Ignore notation settings when displaying property value. Check this
box to enable this feature.
Import (button) Use this button to display the Import Properties From File dialog.
Specify a file from which you can import previously-created
properties into your current project.
The following table lists the properties, default values, and range defaults in this section of the
dialog box.

272 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 3-51. Default Values and Ranges in the Property Definition Editor
Attribute Default Options
Property Number Old number Integer
Note: Property Number information
displays but cannot be edited. This
allows you to correct any problems which
occur if you have duplicate property
names.
Regular Expressions (see the Regular * (editable) Any regular expression string
Expressions Used by Property Definition
Editor table)
Maximum number of characters 132 (editable) 1 - 255
Maximum number of lines 1 (editable) 1 - xxx
Default Text Height .08 (editable) Any height
Visible No Yes / No
Instanced Allowed Single Single / Multiple
Overrideable Yes Yes / No
Default Font Default (editable) Dropdown of available fonts
Default Color Red (editable) Dropdown of available colors
Regular expressions can be built up from the single-character regular expressions in the
following table:
Table 3-52. Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor
Character Description
c Any ordinary character not listed in this table. An ordinary character matches
itself.
\ Backslash. When followed by a special character, the regular expression
matches the quoted character.
. Matches any single character.
[c..] A non-empty string of characters, enclosed in square brackets, matches any
single character in the string. For example [abcdef] matches any single
character from the set 'abcdef'. When the first character of a string is a caret (^),
then the regular expression matches any character except those in the
remainder of the string. For example [^12345] matches any character except
'12345'. A caret in any other position is interpreted as an ordinary character.
[]...] The right square bracket does not terminate the enclosed string if it is the first
character (after an initial '^'), in the bracketed string. In this position it is treated
as an ordinary character.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 273


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Property Definition Editor Dialog Box

Table 3-52. Regular Expressions Used by Property Definition Editor (cont.)


Character Description
[l-r] The minus sign between two characters indicates a range of consecutive ASCII
characters to match. For example, the range '[0-9]' is equivalent to the string
'[0123456789]'. The '-' is treated as an ordinary character if it occurs first (or
first after a initial '^) or last in the string.
e* Closure (repeat) a regular expression zero or more times.
e+ One or more occurrences of an expression.
e? Zero or one occurrences of an expression.
e1e2 Regular expression concatenation.
e1|e2 Match either e1 or e2.
(...) Regular expression may be enclosed in parenthesis to force operator
precedence. The operator precedence is '[]', '*+?', concatenation and the
operator with the lowest priority is '|'. Some special macros have been pre-
defined to ease the task of regular expression construction.

274 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General


Pane
Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View, General pane
Use this dialog box pane to configure the general settings of the xDX Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 3-38. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Objects
Table 3-53. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents
Field Description
Output File Sets the location where the .txt netlist output file is located.
Name

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 275


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Pane

Table 3-53. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Scope Choose one of the following scopes:
Project Netlist the entire project. If selected, the Output File Name
field changes to Output Folder with an empty line, which indicates the
project folder is the default.
Board Netlist just the board you specify from the associated pull-
down list. If selected, the Output File Name field changes to
<board_name>.qcv.
Block Netlist just the block you specify from the associated pull-
down list. If selected, the Output File Name changes to
<block_name>.qcv.
Options
Open the If checked, you have the choice of the following:
generated file Open with Check this option to specify the text viewer you want to
use, such as C:\Windows\System32\notepad.exe.
Run new viewer for each generated file Check this option to specify
a new text viewer for each netlist run.
Send generated If checked, the output appears in a separate Quick Connection View in the
data into Output Output window
Window

Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist - xDX Designer

276 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display


Pane
Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View, Display pane
Use this dialog box pane to configure the display settings of the xDX Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 3-39. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 277


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Objects
Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents
Field Description
Display Nets If checked, the QCV output displays nets based on the following settings:
Flat Mode If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name
above each group of related nets as shown in the following example
(Single Line Per Net is also set in this example):
FlatNet: PAR
NET : '/MICRO1/AMD_8111_TO_HUB1/PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6
NET : '/MICRO1/PAR'
NET : '/MICRO1/PCI_CONN1/PAR' J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1

Compress Flat Nets (Only available if Flat Mode is checked).


If checked, the output netlist displays the FlatNet name preceding the
compressed net and also eliminates the hierarchical pins. The
following example shows the compressed PAR net from above:
. . .
FlatNet: 'PAR' PAR-B1 U29-AF6 J_PCI-A43 PAR-B1
. . .

The three '/MICRO1/... net lines are listed without the FlatNet line
preceding them.
Class Mode If checked, groups nets by class in a separate section of
the netlist as noted by the following entry:
# begin (Default) NetClass nets
. . .

Display Properties/Net Classes If checked, adds Property and


NetClass information for each net such as the following:
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43Property:
NetClass=(Default)NET : '/$1I17/$1I49/PAR' J_PCI-A43
. . .

(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)

278 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets Single Line Per Net If checked, QCV configures the output to put
(continued) all large nets on one line (20 is the maximum number of pins displayed
per net before a line break is issued) as shown in the following
example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2 C49-2
...

(all /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on one, possibly long, line)

If unchecked, QCV configures the output to break large nets into


separate lines as shown in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' GND-B C206-2 C46-2 C209-2 C210-2
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C49-2 C52-2 C53-2 U32-A2 U32-A4
...

(The /RLDRAM1/GND nets are listed on multiple lines)

Only Global Net If checked, the QCV output only lists global nets
such as the following (in this example the Display Power/Ground
separately option was also checked:)
# begin Power&Ground net list
NET : '/$1I49/GND' C1-1
NET : '/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1

Separate No/Single Pin Nets (Only available if Only No/Single Pin


Nets is unchecked.) If checked, QCV configures the output to list the
No/Single Pin nets in a separate section of the netlist as noted by the
following entry:
# begin one pin nets list

Only No/Single Pin Nets (Only available if Separate No/Single Pin


Nets is unchecked.) If checked, QCV displays just the no/single pin
nets.
(Display Nets description is continued in the next table row)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 279


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets Display Power/Ground separately If unchecked, QCV displays the
(continued) power and ground nets in the list with other nets as shown with the
ground net RLDRAM1/GND in the following example:
NET : '/RLDRAM1/CLK' U32-J12 U33-J12 U34-J12 U35-J12
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2 C213-2
...
NET : '/RLDRAM1/NCS0' U32-L2 U34-L2 U36-L2 U38-L2
...

(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed with other non-power/non-ground


nets such as /RLDRAM1/CLK and /RLDRAM1/NCS0.)
If checked, QCV displays the power and ground nets separate from
other nets instead of being merged with them.
# begin Power&Ground net list
. . .NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' C206-2 C209-2 C210-2 C211-2
C213-2 ...

(The /RLDRAM1/GND net is listed in a section with other power/


ground nets.)

If checked, you have the following options on how to split the


Power/Ground nets: (For more information see:
Explicit/Implicit Power Supply Definition - xDX Designer
Differentiate Power from Ground
Split the Power/Ground into:
(Continued in the next table row)

280 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Nets Differentiate Power from Ground If checked, QCV separates the
(continued) Power and Ground nets into the following separate sections:
# begin Power nets list

NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ...

...

NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4

...

# begin Ground nets list

NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9


...

Split the Power/Ground into:


- Explicit - connected to a P&G (Power & Ground) tap
- Implicit - defined in the PDB (Parts Database)
If checked, QCV lists the Explicit Power and Ground nets in an
Explicit-designated section of the list. QCV lists the Implicit Power
and Ground nets in a separate section designated for Implicit Power
and Ground nets as shown in the following example:
# begin EXPLICIT Power&Ground net list

NET : '/MICRO1/1.25V' 184PINX72DDR_LWR1-DDR_VREF ...

NET : '/CLOCK_DIST1/GND' C24-1 C25-2 C26-1 C27-2 C55-2


...

NET : '/POWER_BLOCK1/0.9V' C34-1 U42-2 U42-4

...

# begin IMPLICIT Power&Ground net list

NET : '/RLDRAM1/GND' U32-A2 U32-A4 U32-A9 U32-B4 U32-B9


...

NET : '/RLDRAM1/0.9V' U32-A1 U32-C1 U32-C12 U32-T1 ...

...

(QCV lists the /RLDRAM1/GND net in a section with other Implicit


power and ground nets, meaning these were defined in the Parts
Database. QCV lists explicit power and ground nets in a section that
groups nets that are connected to a power or ground tap.)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 281


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display If checked, the output QCV netlist displays a separate components list
Components section that identifies components as shown in the following example:
# begin components list
COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1' 'Logic:ls374.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1' 'Discrete:RES.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C1' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
COMP: 'C1825-1U-63-10' 'C2' 'Discrete:c_linear_v.1'
. . .

Parts Mode (Only available if Display Components is checked.)


If checked, the QCV display limits the output (from preceding
example) to the following:
# begin components list

COMP: '74LS374-SMD' 'U1'

COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3'

COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R2'

COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R1'

. . .

Display Pins (Only available if Display Components is checked.)


If checked, the QCV display adds pin information for each listed
component as shown in the following example for the R3 component
taken from the preceding example:
COMP: 'R47-2512' 'R3' 'Discrete:RES.1' Explicit Pin:
'1' 'B1' 'QDATA(1)' Explicit Pin: '2' 'B2' 'QD1'

Display Properties (Only available if Display Components is


checked.)
If checked, the QCV adds property information associated with each
component.

282 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Pane

Table 3-54. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Display Un- If checked, the QCV output lists the unconnected pins in a separate section
connected Pins of the netlist as shown in the following entry:
# begin un-connected pins list

PIN : '/U3' U3-6

. . .

Note: This list does not include unconnected pins that terminate with a
No Connect Symbol.
Display Un- If checked, the QCV output lists the unconnected pins that terminate with
connected Pins a No Connect Symbol (by TERM):
via No Connect # begin un-connected pins list

PIN : '/U1' U1-11 (by TERM)

Note: This option only works if the Include terminated nets (No
Connect) option is unchecked on the Advanced page.
See also:
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets
(Net Stubs) - xDX Designer

Related Topics
The QCV Netlist Output Format
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 283


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced


Tab
Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Quick Connection View, Advanced tab
Use this dialog box tab to configure the advanced settings of the xDX Designer Quick
Connection View (QCV) generic netlister.
Figure 3-40. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Objects
Table 3-55. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Sort Choose how you want the output to be sorted as one of the following:
None No sort is specified
Ascending QCV orders each section of the output alphabetically A -
Z and numerically 1 - 9.
Descending QCV orders each section alphabetically Z - A and
numerically 9 - 1.
Filter Choose how you want the output to be filtered:
None, Ref. Des., Net Name, Part or Class.
For filters other than None, enter the appropriate value.

284 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

Table 3-55. Quick Connection View Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Special
Exclude Special If checked, exclude special components from the output.
Component
Use labels in If checked, labels appear in the output paths as shown in bold in the
paths following example:
'/HF_lpfilter/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
If unchecked, the output does not use labels in the paths, but uses a unique
identifier as shown in bold in the following example:
'/$1I72/GND' U1-10 U2-7 C2-1
Include If checked, the QCV output lists nets that terminate with a No Connect
terminated nets Symbol.
(No Connect) Note: If this option is checked, the Display Un-connected Pins via No
Connect on the Display page has no affect.
See also:
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets
(Net Stubs) - xDX Designer

Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist - xDX Designer
The QCV Netlist Output Format

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 285


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window

Replace Part Window


To access: Edit > Find and Replace > Replace Part, the Part pane,
or right-click the part to replace and choose Replace Part.
Use this window pane when replacing parts to set the source part number, the replacement part
number, the scope for the replacement and to specify how you want to map pins and properties
on the replaced part(s).
Objects

Field Description
Source Part Number Specify the part that you want to replace.
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the part to replace and choosing Replace Part, this
field is already filled in.
Scope, Initial selection Select the scope for the replacement as one of Project, Board,
pulldown Schematic, or Sheet.
Note: If you invoke the Replace Part window by right-
clicking the part to replace and choosing Replace Part, the
Scope defaults to Initial selection.
Replacement Part Specify the part that you want to use as a replacement. You can
Number either:
Type the name of the replacement part in the field.
Drag-and-drop the part from the Databook windows
component pane.
Assistant If checked, displays the Replace Assistant when you click the
Replace button. The Replace Assistant allows you to choose one
of the following:
Replace All Replaces all un-replaced source parts with the
replacement part.
Replace Replaces the currently selected source part with
the replacement part, and selects the next part in the selection
series.
Skip Skips over the currently selected part without
replacing it, and selects the next part in the selection series.
Cancel Cancels the replacement process.
Preserve Ref Designator If checked, preserves the existing reference designator on the
replacement part.
Note: If you do not check this box, you will need to run the
packager later.
Advanced Click the + sign to expand the advanced options. Click the - sign
to hide these options.

286 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Part Window

Field Description
Pin Mapping button Displays the Pin Mapping dialog box, which displays all of the
pins of the Source Part (left side) and the Replacement Part (right
side). This dialog box allows you more control over the pin
mapping. Use the choices at the top of the dialog box to configure
the dialog box to:
Map by Pin Number Maps the pin numbers of the Source
Part to pin numbers on the Replacement Part.
Map by Pin Name Maps the pin names on the Source Part
to pin names on the Replacement Part.
Map selected rows Maps just the rows you select.
Remove Mapping Removes all mapping.
The results of your mapping display in the Mapped Pins section of
the dialog box.
Properties button Displays the Property Mapping dialog box, which displays all of
the properties associated with the schematic source part and the
properties associated with the library definitions of the
replacement part. You can set the properties mapping to one of the
following:
Library Only On the replacement part, only use the
properties specified by the library part definition.
Schematic wins When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value on the schematic instance for the replacement part.
Library wins When a part instance property is duplicated
on the schematic and in the library part definition, use the
value in the library part definition for the replacement part.

Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol or Part

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 287


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box


To access: Select a symbol and choose Edit > Replace Symbol
or (right-click) > Replace Symbol
Use this dialog to set symbol replacement criteria.
Figure 3-41. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-56. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Replace selected Click the Browse button to open the xDX DataBook window, the CL
symbol(s)/part(s) View tab, from which you can choose a symbol to be used for the
with: replacement.
Preserve Ref If checked, the replacement symbol retains the pre-existing Ref
Designator Designator.
Replace part To modify the part number for the replacement select either of the
following:
Symbol only Only the symbol is replaced.
Replace part with Use the associated list box to select a new part
that is used to replace the selected part.
Replace selection Select one of the following:
in Active sheet Replaces the symbol in only the active sheet.
All open sheets Replaces the symbol in all open sheets.

288 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box

Table 3-56. Replace Symbol/Part Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Property values To manipulate property values on the replaced symbol, select one of the
following:
Use only library values The replaced symbol uses only the property
values defined in the library.
Merge (schematic values win) Property values from the new
symbol are merged with the property values of the replaced symbol. If
there are duplicate properties, the values from the new symbol from
the schematic will take precedence over the existing values.
Merge (library values win) Property values from the new symbol
are merged with the property values of the replaced symbol. If there
are duplicate properties, the values from the new symbol from the
library will take precedence over the existing values.

Related Topics
Replacing a Symbol or Part

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 289


Dialog Boxes and Windows
RINF Netlister Dialog Box

RINF Netlister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > RINF Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the RINF netlist output.
Figure 3-42. RINF Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-57. RINF Netlister Dialog Box
Field Description
Output File Name Specify the output file of the resulting RINF netlist.
Scope Define the scope for the netlist file as one of:
Project
Board (specify which board form the pulldown list)
Block (specify which block form the pulldown list)
Options If checked, the Open the generated file option allows you to
specify:
Open with Specify the program you want to use to open the
file (use the browse button or specify the path to the viewer
program).
Run new viewer for each generated file Spawns a separate
view for each generated file.

290 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Scale Dialog Box

Scale Dialog Box


To access: With a scalable object selected, choose Format > Scale
or click .
Use this dialog box to scale the selected object up or down using a scale factor that you specify.
Figure 3-43. Scale Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-58. Scale Dialog Box Option
Field Description
Scale Factor Select the scale factor to use. Use a number greater than 1 to enlarge and
a number between 0 and 1 to reduce.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 291


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Settings Dialog Box - Project


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category),
Use this dialog to define project-level settings such as project paths, which are stored in the
<design>.prj file.
Description
The project type template you choose determines the fields displayed.

Figure 3-44. Settings Dialog Box - Example Project Settings for Netlist
Template

Objects
Table 3-59. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents
Field Description
Central Library (Not available in a Netlist project)
Path Defines the path to the Central Library. Enter a pathname or browse to the
location.

292 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 3-59. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Special Specify the path to the Special Components
Components See also:
Adding and Manipulating Special Components - xDX Designer

Border Specify the path to the Border Symbols


Symbols See also:
Controlling Sheet Borders - xDX Designer
Bus Contents Specify the path to the Bus Contents
See also:
Bus Contents File Format on page 27
Property (Netlist project only)
Definitions Specify the path to the Property Definitions file (netlist.prp)
Enable If checked, specify a concurrent design server. If you change the status of
concurrent this box after you have created the project, you must restart xDX Designer
design for the change to take effect.
See also: Distributed Multi-User Configurations in the Concurrent Design
Administrators Guide
Server Name If the Enable concurrent design box is checked, provide the path to the
dedicated Client-Server Configuration Manager server.
To change the server, you must open the project and modify this field.
If the server becomes unavailable, the project will not open. You must edit
the name.prj file manually with a new server name.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 293


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 3-59. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Enable edit If the Enable concurrent design box is checked, set one of the following
mode for conditions:
opened sheets Enable edit mode for opened sheetsIf checked, the first designer to
open a sheet gets read-write access. Any subsequent designer opening
the same sheet gets read-only access designated by an information bar at
the top of the schematic window as follows
:

If the designer who has read-write access closes the sheet, the other
designers with the same sheet opened see the following text on the
information bar:

If unchecked, the first designer to open a sheet does not get read-write
access to the sheet. Instead, the information bar displays the following:

Any other designer who opens the same sheet sees the same bar.

The first designer who clicks the Click to Edit button gets read-write
access to the sheet. All other designers then see a message in the information
bar that describes who has locked the sheet as follows:

If the Hide button is clicked, the information bar is hidden, but a thin
yellow bar is visible at the top of the schematic window. Click on the bar to
expand the information bar again. If the text in the information bar changes
while it is hidden, it flashes a few times to let you know something changed.

See also: The Multi-User Environment


Layout Tool (Netlist project only)
Choose your layout tool from the pulldown list.
Use Custom (Netlist project only)
Constraints If checked, specify a location to a Constraints Definition file.
File

294 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project

Table 3-59. Settings Dialog Box- Project Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Use Custom (Netlist project only)
Configuration If checked, specify a location to a PCB Configuration file.
File If this option is checked and the configuration file path is specified using
absolute or relative settings, for example: 'C:\MyPath\name.cfg' or
'.\name.cfg', it will look for the file in the C:\Mypath folder or the project
folder respectively. In this case it will not search the paths if the file is
not found in the stated location but will output an error message.
If this option is checked and the configuration file path is not specified,
or the file name is entered with no path information such as
'namedfile.cfg', the xDX Designer tool looks first in the project directory,
then the WDIR path and finally in the standard directory. If the
configuration file is not specified, the search looks for a file named
'vendorname.cfg'.

If the file cannot be found, the PCB Interface dialog will warn the user.

If unchecked, the standard directory is searched for the configuration file


listed in the pcbsystem.ini file. If it is not found there, the WDIR variable list
is searched, read from left to right to find the listed configuration file.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 295


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board

Settings Dialog Box - Board


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Boards (subcategory), Board (Design# or
name)
Use this dialog box to configure a board.
Figure 3-45. Board# Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-60. Settings Dialog Box - Boards# Contents
Field Description
Top level block Specify the top level block from the drop-down list
Allow forward If checked, allow forward annotation.
annotation
Allow back If checked, allow back annotation.
annotation Note: If unchecked, the Packager (Tools > Package) ignores the
setting. The Packager updates both the Pin Numbers and Ref
Designators regardless of this setting.
Conflict resolution

296 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Board

Table 3-60. Settings Dialog Box - Boards# Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Front end always If this radio button is selected, the front end wins during conflict
wins resolution regardless of whether front or back annotation is taking
place.
Back end always If this radio button is selected, the back end wins during conflict
wins resolution regardless of whether front or back annotation is taking
place.
Library options
Search Path Scheme Set the search path scheme name.
Symbol Partitions Lets you list and manage the available symbol partitions. Use the
following buttons to help create and manage the symbol partition list:
- New (or use <Insert> key): Create a new entry in list box
- Delete (or use <Delete> key): Deletes selected entry
- Move Up (or use <Alt> + <up-arrow>): Move selected entry up
one level
- Move Down (or use <Alt> + <down-arrow>): Move selected
entry down one level
PDB Search Path Lets you list and manage the available PartsData path.
Uses the same navigator buttons as shown for the previous Symbol
Partitions list.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 297


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries


Scope: Netlist project
To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Symbol Libraries
Use this dialog box to specify the location(s) of legacy xDX Designer symbol libraries in either
a new or existing Netlist project.
Figure 3-46. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries

Objects
Table 3-61. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Libraries Fields
Field Description
Main window Enables you to add or delete names of and paths to legacy symbol libraries.
Import Imports selected legacy symbol libraries into the current project.

Related Topics
Adding Symbols to a Design - xDX Designer

298 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Special Components

Settings Dialog Box - Special Components


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Special Components (subcategory)
Use this dialog to create selection lists for specialized pin components to be added to
schematics.
Description
The pulldown list allows you to group the lists by type.

Figure 3-47. Settings Dialog Box - Special Components

Objects
Table 3-62. Settings Dialog Box - Special Components Fields
Field Description
Dropdown list Specifies the type of pin component to display in the window.
New (Insert) Enables you to select components, of the type specified in the
button dropdown list, to add to the display.

Related Topics
Adding and Manipulating Special Components - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 299


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Bus Contents (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to list the available bus contents and their values, modify existing bus
contents values, or create new bus contents.
Description
The results are stored in a bus contents file that you specify in Setup > Settings, Project
(category). For more information on Bus Contents and this file, see Bus Contents File Format
on page 27.)

Figure 3-48. Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents

Objects
Table 3-63. Settings Dialog Box - Bus Contents Fields
Fields Description
Name Lists the names of available buses. You can select the name to edit it.
Value Displays the values for each bus in the list. You can select the value to edit its
contents.

Related Topics
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Creating and Editing Pre-Defined Buses

300 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders and Zones (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to specify the border symbol for each border type (one of A Landscape, A
Portrait, A0 Landscape, A0 Portrait and so on) and the zone characteristics used to divide the
schematic into navigation zones.
Description
Control your border and zones visibility on the schematic with the following related Setup >
Settings, Display (category), settings (also see Figure 3-50):

Zoning Grid
Border (box)
Zone Labels (section), Border
Zone Labels (section), Left-Top Corner of Each Zone

Tip
: To see these various Zone indicators, it might be helpful to turn off (uncheck) the
schematic grid: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Display Grid
(checkbox).

Figure 3-49. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 301


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Figure 3-50. Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid

Objects
Table 3-64. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents
Field Description
(list of available Use the list of available border types to select which one you want to
border types) customize.
Add Click this button to specify a new border. The New Size dialog
appears to allow you to specify the height and width of the new border.

Delete Click this button to delete the selected border from the list.
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the first sheet is specified after this field
first sheet such as Borders: asheet.1

Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the first
sheet. Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you specified
in Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders Symbols (field).
Border symbol for The current border symbol for the next sheet is specified after this field
next sheet such as Borders: asheet.1

Click the Change button to specify a different border symbol for the
next sheet.Changes are stored in the Borders Symbols file that you
specified in Setup > Settings, Project (category), Borders Symbols
(field).

302 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Table 3-64. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Border Properties Click this button to bring up the Borders Properties dialog. From this
(button) dialog you can view any properties currently associated with the selected
border symbol.
Clear Border Click this button to clear the border symbol association from the selected
Symbols (button) border type as shown in the following example

Horizontal Zones Use the following settings to control the horizontal zones of the
schematic
Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper
limit on the left side, and decrease as they move to the right
Number of Zones - Specify the number of horizontal zones
Offset - Specify the horizontal offsets, both Top and Bottom (the
units specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are
used)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 303


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones

Table 3-64. Settings Dialog Box - Borders and Zones Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Vertical Zones Use the following settings to control the vertical zones of the schematic
Letters (A, B, C,...) - If selected, letters are used to denote the
vertical zones
Numbers (1,2,3,...) - If selected, numbers are used to denote the
horizontal zones
Descending - If checked, the letters or numbers start at the upper
limit on the lower side, and decrease as they move up
Number of Zones - Specify the number of vertical zones
Offset - Specify the vertical offsets, both Left and Right (the units
specified in Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), are used)

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Dialog Boxes and Windows
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones - xDX Designer
Controlling Sheet Borders - xDX Designer
Setting Zones to Match an Existing Border Symbol - xDX Designer

304 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Cross Reference (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure how your link references appear on the schematic.
Description
Tip
: To display cross reference annotations you must turn on (check the box) the Setup >
Settings, Display (category), Xref Annotation option.

To change the color of the cross reference, go to Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), Cross Reference (Object row).

Before your changes take affect on the schematic, you must execute Tools > Cross
Reference(SCOUT).

You set the Unit (inches, millimeters, centimeters) used in offsets from Projects > Settings >
Schematic Editor.

Figure 3-51. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 305


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Objects
Table 3-65. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option
Option Description
Annotation Format for Use the pulldown list to access the cross-ref variables: $sheet,
Links $hzone, $vzone, $sheet_number and $block. Using these variables
or a combination of text and these variables, you can configure the
cross reference annotation as desired.
Example: A setting of $(sheet)-$(vzone)$(hzone)-$(block)
produces the following:

Annotation Origin Use the pulldown menu to choose the origin point (or none) for the
placement of the annotation text as one of the following:
None
Upper left
Middle left
Lower left
Upper center
Middle center (This is used in previous example)
Lower center
Upper right
Middle right
Lower right
X-Offset Based on the annotation origin point, enter an X-offset value used
to offset the text on an x-axis in the specified units. A positive
number offsets the text to the right, a negative number offsets the
text to the left. In the example shown for the Annotation Format for
Links setting, the X-Offset was set to .45 inches.

306 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Reference

Table 3-65. Settings - Project - Cross Reference Option (cont.)


Option Description
Y-Offset Based on the annotation origin point, enter a Y-offset value used to
offset the text on a y-axis in the specified units. A positive number
offsets the text vertically up, a negative number offsets the text
vertically down. In the example shown for the Annotation Format
for Links setting, the Y-Offset was set to .30 inches.
Text Size Enter a value for the text size.
Max Line Length Sets the maximum length (in characters) of the cross reference
annotation.
Separator Specifies a separator between multiple link designators when a link
goes to more than one destination such as 2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS.
Allow Condensed If checked, multiple links to a given sheet are condensed. For
Annotations example, given the following destinations from a link:
2-B7;3-G4;3-D10;3-GS. Turning on this option condenses the
three entries that all go to page 3 as follows: 2-B7;3-G4/D10/G9.
Note that the condensed separator is set in the following setting,
which in this example is set to / (the default).
Condensed Separator If the Allow Condensed Annotations option is checked, then you
can specify the separator used between multiple link designators
when a link goes to more than one destination such as: 3-G4/D10/
G9.
Complies with ISO 5457 If checked, link references comply with ISO 5457, which specifies
the size and layout of preprinted sheets for technical drawings.

Related Topics
Linking and Embedding Objects - xDX Designer
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 307


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter

Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Net Name Delimiter (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control how net names are resolved into elements of buses.
Description
The setting is stored separately for each project in the name.prj file.

Figure 3-52. Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter

Objects
Table 3-66. Settings Dialog Box - Net Name Delimiter Contents
Field Description
Net Name Delimiter Select one of the following net name delimiters:
None
Round Brackets ()
Square Brackets []

Related Topics
Connectivity With Buses - xDX Designer

308 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Databook

Settings Dialog Box - Databook


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), xDX DataBook (subcategory), (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to specify the configuration file location for xDX DataBook
Figure 3-53. Settings Dialog Box - Databook

Objects
Table 3-67. Settings Dialog Box - Databook Contents
Field Description
xDX DataBook Specify the configuration file location for xDX DataBook. If
configuration you do not include a full path to the configuration file, but only
include the filename, The Databook tool searches for the file
first in the project directory, and then in the WDIR directories
from left to right.

Related Topics
Creating a Databook Configuration Files

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 309


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering


To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Sheet Numbering (subcategory)
Use this dialog to specify the way sheets are ordered for printing or PDF generation.
Description
Tip
For information about a setting that allows you to display the sheet numbering as part of the
Navigator sheet label, see the description for Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets
(subcategory), Label format, specifically regarding the use of the $(Number) sheet number
property.

Tip
Whenever you change the Sheet Numbering setting, the Navigator is dynamically updated.
The print and PDF generation process reflects the numbers shown in the Navigator.
However, before a sheet numbering change takes place in the border property
@PRINTORDER, you must first update the numbering with Tools > Update Other Objects >
Page numbers. Also, if you close and reopen xDX Designer, the @PRINTORDER property on
each Border is automatically updated.

Figure 3-54. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

310 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

Objects
Table 3-68. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering Contents
Field Description
Numbering Schemes
In-Depth If selected, the block order for printing is set to In-Depth as shown in the
example in the following diagram:

Vertical If selected, the block order for printing is set to Vertical as shown in the
example in the following diagram:

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 311


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the default export language and folder.
Description
Figure 3-55. Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

The Export HDL settings are further set with the following Settings dialog box panes:

Settings Dialog Box - VHDL on page 314


Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages on page 316
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map on page 317
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog on page 318
Objects
Table 3-69. Settings - Project - Export HDL Contents
Field Description
Default Export Set the default export language as one of either VHDL or Verilog.
Language
Export Folder Define the name of the export folder.

312 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL

Table 3-69. Settings - Project - Export HDL Contents (cont.)


Field Description
HDL Search Paths Specify where the design entry tool should search for the HDL files
attached to the design. If after you set these a file location is later
changed or no longer accessible, the Project Navigator window displays
those unfound files in a dark color as shown below:

To correct the unfound-file situation, specify a valid location to the files.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 313


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL

Settings Dialog Box - VHDL


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), VHDL
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the VHDL export settings.
Description
These settings are stored in a <project_folder>/hdlutils.ini file.

Figure 3-56. Settings Dialog Box - Export - VHDL

Objects
Table 3-70. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the VHDL netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the package name where the global signals are placed
Down To Generate entities down to specified Level property
Use VHDL-93 Naming If checked, use VHDL-93 extended identifiers in component, pin
Conventions and generic names
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-Bit wide nets, pins and ports/
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple If checked, the netlister placed each entity in a separate file. In
Netlists, One For Each such cases the field Output File changes to Output Folder
Entity

314 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL

Table 3-70. Settings - Project - Export HDL - VHDL - General Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Do not create parameters If checked, disables generation of component generics.
for corresponding
component attributes
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all not bound primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.

Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 315


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External


Packages
Scope: xDX Designer
To access:
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), VHDL (subcategory),
External Packages
Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), Verilog (subcategory),
External Packages (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to list packages to be inserted in the generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Objects
This dialog box includes one main window, in which you enter the information for packages
to insert in the generated VHDL or Verilog netlist.
Proper syntax for VHDL is:
library USER_lib;
use USER_lib.USER_package.all;

Proper syntax for Verilog is:


`include "package_name.v"

316 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map

Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map


Scope: xDX Designer
To access:
(For VHDL) Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), VHDL
(subcategory), Port Map (subcategory)
(For Verilog) Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), Verilog
(subcategory), Port Map (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to map xDX Designer pin types to HDL port mode types.
Objects
The pulldown list in the HDL Port Mode column provides the available types.
Figure 3-57. Settings Dialog Box - Port Map

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 317


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog

Settings Dialog Box - Verilog


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory), Verilog
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the Verilog export settings.
Figure 3-58. Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Verilog

Objects
Table 3-71. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents
Field Description
Log File Specify the output log file from the Verilog netlist operation
Global Signals Specify the module name where the global signals are placed
Timescale Enter the Time Unit/Time Precision into the Timescale field to
specify an alternate timescale for the Verilog netlist. The default
timescale is 1ns/1ns.
Down To Generate modules down to specified Level property as one or
more of STD, VHDL, or Verilog

318 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog

Table 3-71. Settings - Project - Export HDL - Verilog - General Contents


Field Description
Properties to Parameters Set one of the following choices to limit which xDX Designer
component properties are converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters:
None - If checked, no Verilog parameters are created
All - If checked, all component properties appear as Verilog
parameters
Selected - If checked, only the properties specified in the
Selected list will be converted to corresponding Verilog
parameters. You separate multiple properties in the list with
spaces. If a property name has a space in it, quote it with either
single or double quotes, such as: Part Number or Part
Number.
Generate Only 1-Bit Wide If checked, generate only 1-bit wide nets, pins and ports.
Nets, Pins and Ports
Generate Multiple If checked, the netlister places each module in a separate file. In
Netlists, One For Each such cases the field Output File changes to Output Folder
Entity
Automatic empty model If checked, creates empty models for all not bound primitives.
creation
Suppress Messages If checked, suppress messages in the output log.

Related Topics
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 319


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category)
Use this dialog to set units and grid parameters for the schematic window.
Description
Figure 3-59. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Set other schematic window characteristics from the following subcategories:


Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan and Settings Dialog Box - Text on page 327
Zoom on page 322 Settings Dialog Box - Nets on page 328
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets on
page 324

Objects
Table 3-72. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor Contents
Option Description
Schematic Units
Unit Set the xDX Designer unit of measurement as one of the following
settings from the drop-down list:
millimeters
centimeters
inches
Once set, xDX Designer uses the unit of measurement you have chosen
for measurements such as Default Sheet Size, New Sheets or Grid
Spacing.
Grid

320 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

Table 3-72. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor Contents (cont.)


Option Description
Display Grid If checked, displays the grid for the active schematic or symbol window.
Note: (Snap Objects to Grid) When you display the grid, schematic
objects you place or move snap to the grid.
Grid Type Set the grid type from the associated pulldown to either Lined or Dotted
for the active schematic or symbol window. The grid lines or dots display
one line per grid interval defined by the Grid Spacing.
Grid Spacing Set the grid display space increment for the active schematic or symbol
window.
Grid Interval If checked, display the grid interval markings for the active schematic or
Marking symbol window. The grid interval markings (either a + or heavier grid
line) display every ten grid intervals.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 321


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan and Zoom

Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan and Zoom


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan and Zoom
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the xDX Designer session characteristics for strokes, pan, and zoom.
Figure 3-60. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Strokes, Pan and Zoom

Objects
Table 3-73. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Strokes, Pan and Zoom
Contents
Fields Description
Pan and Zoom Sets the xDX Designer schematic window to pan and zoom in the style of
one of the following tools:
Default Pan and Zoom xDX Designer
PADS Pan and Zoom PADS layout tool
See also:
Pan and Zoom Within Schematics - xDX Designer

Strokes Either turns off strokes, which are predefined patterns of mouse movements
to execute commands or functions, or selects the mouse button you use to
draw the strokes in the schematic window. Choose one of the following:
Strokes off turns off strokes
Right Button Use right mouse button to execute stroke commands
Middle Button Use middle mouse button to execute stroke commands
See also: Key Bindings and Strokes on page 433

322 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Strokes, Pan and Zoom

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 323


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), New Sheets (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure new schematic sheets.
Figure 3-61. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets

Objects
Table 3-74. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Default Sheet Size

324 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Table 3-74. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Size Sets the default sheet size and orientation (Portrait or Landscape) for all
new schematics and symbols.
Specify one of the following sizes, specified in Landscape order as:
width x height (The Units setting determines the number value applied):
A - 11 (297.4mm) x 8.5 (215.9mm)
B - 17 (431.8mm) x 11 (279.4mm)
C - 22 (558.8mm) x 17 (431.8mm)
D - 34 (863.6mm) x 22 (558.8mm)
E - 44 (1117.6mm) x 34 (863.6mm)
A4 - 297mm (11.69) x 210mm (8.26)
A3 - 420mm (16.53) x 297mm (11.69)
A2 - 594mm (23.38) x 420mm (16.53)
A1 - 841mm (33.11) x 594mm (23.38)
A0 - 1189mm (46.81) x 841mm (33.11)
Custom - user-definable width and height
If you select Custom as the sheet size, you specify the width and height
settings.
Width Sets the sheet width. The width setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the width setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Height Sets the sheet height. The height setting is set automatically unless you
specify Custom as the sheet size. If you change the height setting without
selecting Custom as the sheet size, the sheet size is automatically changed
to Custom.
Sheet Orientation Sets the sheet orientation as one of the following:

Portrait

Landscape

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 325


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - New Sheets

Table 3-74. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - New Sheets Contents
Fields Description
Border Sheet Sets the automatic sheet border placement on new schematics. A default
Options schematic sheet must exist. If it does not, you must create a new default
border sheet.
Automatically add border to new schematic sheets: If checked,
places a hardwired border schematic from a required location on to
new schematics.
Enable user-configurable border symbols: If checked, places a user-
configured border symbol on to new schematics. This symbol can be
from any location in the search order
Use sheet 1 border for underlying schematics: Lets you choose to
use either the same user-configurable border for all sheets, or a
different border for the first sheet in a design.
Rules:
a. This setting has no effect on a top level schematic. You use this
setting to specify which border to use on the first sheet of a new
schematic when you push into a composite component.
b. If you select this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 1 is
used on the first sheet of the underlying schematic.
c. If you clear this setting, the border specified in Border for Sheet 2-N
is used for all sheets, including sheet 1.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

326 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Text

Settings Dialog Box - Text


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Text (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the default text origin and text size for new text on a schematic.
Figure 3-62. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Text

Objects
Table 3-75. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Settings - Text Contents
Field Description
Default Text Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties you
Origin create. Valid options are:
Lower Center
Lower Left
Lower Right
Middle Center (default)
Middle Left
Middle Right
Upper Center
Upper Left
Upper Right
Default Text Size Sets text size for all new text, labels, and properties you create.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 327


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets

Settings Dialog Box - Nets


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Nets (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set net characteristics on the schematic window.
Figure 3-63. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets

Objects
Table 3-76. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents
Field Description
Avoidance When Avoidance Routing (see Route Mode below) is active, sets the
Distance minimum distance between nets and components or other nets (avoidance
distance).
Net Length Set the length of a net stub of parts you place from xDX DataBook which
use the Add Component With Net Stubs option.
Snap Nets To Pin If checked, snaps nets to the nearest pin of a specified component.

328 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets

Table 3-76. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Nets Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Route Mode Specifies the routing mode for new connections as one of the following:
Straight
Straight routing specifies a straight connection between two points.
This as is form of routing can overlap or pass through components
and existing connections. Any incidental crossing of nets from
straight routing does not imply a connection, and does not create a
solder dot.
Orthogonal
Orthogonal routing begins with a horizontal or vertical orientation
depending on the point of origin as follows:
From a joint begins in a horizontal or vertical direction
following the cursor movement (left or right, horizontal up or
down, vertical)
From a pin automatically begins in a horizontal or vertical
direction, depending on the orientation of the pin
From a point on a net or bus segment begins in a direction
perpendicular to the orientation of the segment
Note: Orthogonal routing does not allow a connection to pass
through a component.
Avoidance
Avoidance routing specifies an automatic connection between two
points that avoids components. Specifying intermediary points along
the connection creates a more distinct specification of the path of the
connection.
The distance between components and the connection is the
avoidance distance. The xDX Designer tool automatically staggers a
connection by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the
components or other connections.
See also:
Setting Net and Bus Preferences - xDX Designer
Name New Nets If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names nets based on
Automatically the rules described in the topic:
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xDX Designer

Name New Buses If checked, the schematic capture tool automatically names buses based
Automatically on the rules described in the topic:
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 329


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Nets

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor

330 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters

Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters


To access: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Selection Filters (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the availability of objects, text, and graphics selections that display on
schematics.
Figure 3-64. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters

Objects
Table 3-77. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Editor - Selection Filters
Contents
Field Description
Custom filter Displays the names of the custom filters.
Graphics Checked options allows selection of lines, arcs, boxes, and circles.
Objects Checked options allows selection of border, pins, symbols, net and bus,
and rippers.
Text Checked options allows selection of text attached to names, properties
and text.
Add Displays the Add Filter dialog box, which allows you to create a new
custom filter name, and then apply its selection filters.
Remove Deletes the selected custom filter.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 331


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Selection Filters

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
Creating and Using a Custom Selection Filter

332 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor


Scope: PADS DX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings menu item, Symbol Editor (category)
Use this dialog box to configure the pin and property characteristics for local or library symbols
that appear in the Symbol Editor.
Figure 3-65. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Objects

Field Description
Pins:
Default length Set the default length of new symbol pins (in grid points) by
changing the existing number or clicking either the up or down
arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Default spacing Set the default spacing between new symbol pins (in grid
points) by changing the existing number or clicking either the
up or down arrow to increment/decrement the number.
Properties:
Automatic pin side If checked, the symbol editor dynamically changes the pin
recognition orientation and applies a pin type and side definition in the Pins
window when you place a pin on a symbol.
Pin property position Set the pin property position using the pulldown as either
Below Pin or Above Pin.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 333


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor

Field Description
Symbol property position Set the symbol property position using the pulldown as either
Below Symbol or Above Symbol.
Name visibility Set the name visibility using the pulldown as either:
Never show
Show hidden properties
Show placeholder
Symbol file format:
Use high precision If checked, the ASCII symbol file format uses point
coordinates and font sizes with a 1/100000 mm precision. This
is required if you are using metric symbols.
If unchecked, the symbol file format is compatible with
EXP2005.x or earlier software that used a 1/100 inch precision.

334 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol


Default Properties
Scope: PADS DX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings menu item, Symbol Editor (category), Symbol Default
Properties (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default properties to symbols.
Description
This dialog box enables you to configure symbols created by the Symbol Editor to add or
remove default symbol properties, assign a default value to all assigned properties, and control
the visibility and label position of each property. When assigning a default list of properties, sort
properties in the list to control the order of appearance.

Figure 3-66. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

Objects
Table 3-78. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 335


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties

Table 3-78. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol Default Properties
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
Below Symbol Assigns the label position underneath the left side
of the last added property, or symbol item.
Above Symbol Assigns the label position above the left side of the
last added property, or symbol item.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

336 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin


Default Properties
Scope: PADS DX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings menu item, Symbol Editor (category), Symbol Default
Properties (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default pin properties to symbols.

Description
This dialog box enables you to configure symbols created by the Symbol Editor to add or
remove default pin properties, assign a default value to all assigned pin properties, and control
the visibility and label position of each property. When assigning a default list of properties, sort
properties in the list to control the order of appearance.

Figure 3-67. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Objects
Table 3-79. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents
Field Description
Move Up / Move Down Moves selected entry up or down one level in
the list.
Delete Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 337


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties

Table 3-79. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Pin Default Properties
Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
Above Pin Assigns the label position above the pin.
Below Assigns the label position below the pin.

338 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties

Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol


HLA Properties
Scope: PADS DX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings menu item, Symbol Editor (category), Symbol HLA Properties
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to assign default HLA properties to symbols.
Figure 3-68. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties

Objects
Table 3-80. Settings Dialog Box - Symbol Editor - Symbol HLA Properties
Contents
Field Description
Delete Removes a highlighted property entry from the list. If no
properties are highlighted, Delete removes properties them from the list,
from the bottom row to the top row.
Name Displays a dropdown list of central library HLA properties.
Value Enter a value for the selected property.
You can enter real numbers, integers, or alphanumeric characters.
Note: Refer to Property Definition Editor for the property settings for
each property.
Position Defines the positioning of the visible property or symbol item (line, pin).
Above Symbol Assigns the label position above the symbol.
Below Symbol Assigns the label position below the symbol.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 339


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker

Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker


To access: Setup > Settings, Graphical Rules Checker (category) ( )
Use this dialog box to choose which rules to run with the Graphical Rules Checker (GRC).
Objects
Table 3-81. Settings Dialog Box - Graphical Rules Checker
Field Description Severity1
Object overlap Configures the GRC to report overlapping Note, Warning, Error
objects based on the value setting. Change
the value by double-clicking in the Values
field and selecting the objects you want
checked.
Net/Wire off grid Configures the GRC to report nets that are Note, Warning, Error
not snapped to the grid.
Pin off grid Configures the GRC to report pins placed off Note, Warning, Error
grid.
Text owner Configures the GRC to report text that is Note, Warning, Error
placed too far away from its parent object
based on the value setting. Change the
default value by double-clicking in the
Values column and editing the default value.
Text alignment Configures the GRC to report text or Note, Warning, Error
properties that are not aligned with each
other.
1. A Note is displayed as green, a Warning is displayed as blue, and an Error is displayed as red.

340 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category)
Use this dialog box to control the display and the behavior of the Interconnectivity Table (ICT).
Description
This section of the Settings dialog is divided into the following subcategories:

Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice on page 343


Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties on page 344
Figure 3-69. Setting Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Objects
Table 3-82. Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table Contents
Field Description
Symbol label Select how you want the Symbol label(s) to appear in the Interconnectivity
format Table using one of the formats in the expandable list. You can include
formatting characters between the variables such as space, semicolon, colon
and so on.
Show These two radio buttons toggle the components display configuration between
components the following:
in... Show components in columns, nets in rows
Show components in rows, nets in columns

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 341


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table

Table 3-82. Settings Dialog Box - Interconnectivity Table Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Autofit If checked, autofit is on.
Automaticall
y
Power supply If this is checked prior to placing a tap in an Interconnectivity Table (Add >
tap Power or Add > Ground), the connection to the corresponding global net
autoconnect (given by the value of the tap symbol property Global Signal Name) is
created. The global net is eventually added if it does not already exist.
Cells display
Direction If checked, the ICT cells display direction.
Pin number If checked, the ICT cells display pin numbers.
Pins drop-down list display
Direction If checked, the drop-down list displays the pin direction.
Pin number If checked, the drop-down list displays the pin number.

342 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Slice and Dice (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to choose how to slice and dice ICT nets.
Figure 3-70. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

Objects
Table 3-83. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice Contents
Field Description
Nets Choose how to slice and dice ICT nets as one of the following:
Show only nets connected between the components of Slice and Dice
Show nets connected between and to the components of Slice and Dice
Show all nets

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 343


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Interconnectivity Table (category), Properties (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control property visibility in the ICT.
Figure 3-71. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Objects
Table 3-84. Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties Contents
Field Description
Property Displays a list of available properties.
Visible If checked, specify which properties you want to be visible.
Buttons
Load Displays the Load Properties Scheme dialog box, which allows you to search
Scheme for, select, and load an XML-formatted file (filename.p4i) that contains a saved
configuration of which properties you want to be visible.
Save Displays the Save Properties Scheme dialog, which allows you to save the
Scheme current configuration of which properties are visible to a filename.p4i file.
Uncheck all If unchecked, marks all the listed properties as hidden
Check all If checked, marks all the listed properties as visible

344 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Properties

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - ICT - Slice and Dice

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 345


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks


To access: Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Blocks (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure the block display characteristics in Navigator window.
Figure 3-72. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Objects
Table 3-85. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks Contents
Field Description
Hierarchical or Controls how xDX Designer displays blocks in the Navigator as one of the
Flatten view following:
Hierarchical view
When a view is activated in the schematic window, the corresponding tree
node is selected, updating the Navigator tree contents window.

Flatten view
When the view activated in the schematic window stems from a design
root other than the root node currently selected in the Navigator tree, the
design root node for the active view is selected, updating the Navigator
tree contents window with a flattened view of the entire design.

346 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks

Table 3-85. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Blocks Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Display sheet If checked, the xDX Designer tool displays the sheet range of each block in
range the Navigator window as shown in the following example:

Label format Use this field to set the block label format in the Navigator window using any
combination of the following variables available from the pulldown:
$(Name)
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.

Info Tip Use this field to set the block info tip format (shown in the previous figure for
format Label format) in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables available from the pulldown:
$(Name)
$(View)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as space,
semicolon, colon and so on.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 347


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets


To access: Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Sheets (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure sheet display characteristics in the Navigator window and
control sheet copy behavior.
Figure 3-73. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Objects
Table 3-86. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets Contents
Field Description
Display sheets Depending on which selection you choose, this option displays icons for
each sheet and composite node within a design in the Navigator tree.

The selections are:


Always
Only if there is more than one
Never

348 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets

Table 3-86. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Sheets Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Label format Use this field to set the sheet label format in the Navigator window using
any combination of the following variables from the pulldown as shown
in the following figure:
$(Name)
$(Number)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as
space, semicolon, colon and so on.

See also: Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering on page 310


Info Tip format Use this field to set the sheet info tip format (shown in the previous figure
for Label format) in the Navigator window using any combination of the
following variables from the pulldown:
$(Name)
$(Number)
You can include formatting characters between the variables such as
space, semicolon, colon and so on.
Warn before If checked, a warning is displayed during a condition similar to the
replacing selected following:
sheets during If you have sheet 1 of a design selected in the Navigator and you paste
copy another sheet 1 into the design, the xDX Designer tool displays a warning
before it overwrites the selected sheet.
If you don't have sheet 1 selected before copying another sheet 1 into the
design, the xDX Designer tool copies the new sheet 1 and rename it to
sheet1_1.

Related Topics
Changing Sheet Print Order - xDX Designer
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet Numbering

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 349


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols

Settings Dialog Box - Symbols


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Symbols (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure symbol display characteristics in the Navigator window.
Figure 3-74. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Symbols

350 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Symbols

Objects
Table 3-87. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Symbols Contents
Field Description
Display ... Sets how the Navigator displays symbols as one of the following:
Display all components The Navigator tree displays all symbol
components as follows:

Display hierarchical only The Navigator tree displays only


hierarchical symbol components as follows:

Dont display components The Navigator tree does not show any
symbol components as follows:

Label format Selects how Symbol label(s) appears in the Navigator tree list using one
of the formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Label format: $(Name) ($(Symbol))
results in a Navigator appearance of:

Info Tip format: Selects how Information Tip (the textbox that appears when you mouse-
over a list item) appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the formats
in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Info Tip format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
($(Symbol) results with a Navigator Info Tip box appearance of:

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 351


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and


Buses
Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Navigator (category), Nets and Buses (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to configure net and bus characteristics in the Navigator window.
Figure 3-75. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Objects
Table 3-88. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents
Field Description
Display nets and If checked, display nets and buses in the Navigator tree.
buses

Net label format: Selects how net label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Name)
results in a Navigator appearance of:

352 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses

Table 3-88. Settings Dialog Box - Navigator - Nets and Buses Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Net info Tip Selects how net info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Net label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
results in a Navigator appearance of:

Bus label format: Selects how bus label(s) appear in the Navigator tree list using one of the
formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Name)
results in a Navigator appearance of:

Bus info Tip Selects how bus info Tip appears in the Navigator tree list using one of the
format: formats in the expandable list.
For example, the setting: Bus label format: $(Type): $(Path)/$(Name)
results in a Navigator appearance of:

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 353


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Display

Settings Dialog Box - Display


To access: Setup > Settings, Display (category)
Use this dialog box to set what xDX Designer displays on schematic sheets.
Figure 3-76. Settings Dialog Box - Display

Objects
Table 3-89. Settings Dialog Box - Display Contents
Field Description
Border If checked, displays a border box around schematic sheets shown in the
figure, Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid. This is not referring to a
border symbol.
Common If checked, displays the following on schematics:
Properties Pin Numbers
Reference Designators
Graphical Text If checked, displays graphical text on schematics.
Name If checked, displays label names on schematics.
Symbol Text If checked, displays symbol text on schematics.
Zoning Grid If checked, displays the schematic zoning grid shown in the figure,
Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid.
See also:
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones - xDX Designer

354 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Display

Table 3-89. Settings Dialog Box - Display Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Xref Annotation If checked, displays cross reference annotations in the entire design.
See also:
Navigating the Design Using Links - xDX Designer
Zone Labels If checked, displays the following zone labels on schematics as shown in
the figure, Border, Border Symbol and Zoning Grid:
Border
Left-Top Corner of Each Zone
See also:
Partitioning a Sheet into Zones - xDX Designer
Show tooltips If checked, displays tooltips on any or all of the following schematic
objects when you position the cursor over the object.
Components
Nets
Pins
These tooltips consist of the labels and properties.
Note: Navigator tooltips are always shown and are not dependent on
this setting.
Date Format Defines the @DATETIME property format (often a property placed on
the schematic border).

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles
DxDesigner.xml File Format

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 355


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

Settings Dialog Box - Objects


To access: Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set schematic or ICT object characteristics for color, text, fill style, line
style and font.
Figure 3-77. Settings Dialog Box - Schematic Objects

356 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

Figure 3-78. Settings Dialog Box - ICT Objects

Objects
Table 3-90. Settings Dialog Box - Objects Contents
Field Description
Objects Table Defines the characteristics of either schematic or ICT objects.
Gray cells unavailable.
Active cells Choose the desired characteristic from the
pulldown list or type in a value. The Width column values
range from 1 (thin) to 10 (widest).
Schematic Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of schematic
objects.
ICT Selected, enables you to set the characteristics of ICT objects.
Load Scheme Loads pre-saved object settings from a *.dxc file.
Save Scheme Saves the existing object settings in a *.dxc file.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 357


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles


To access: Setup > Settings, Display (category), Font Styles (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to set the font style for new schematic text.
Figure 3-79. Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Objects
Table 3-91. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents
Field Description
Style Choose the font style from the list of available fonts. The remainder of
the Font Styles options configure the selected style. Any text on the
schematic that has a property of Font set to a particular style is now easily
customized. For example, if you customize the Fixed font style with the
available settings described in the following table rows, any Font
property that you set to Fixed changes accordingly.
Add new style Press this button to create a new style, which you enter in the New style
(button) dialog box.
Delete style Press this button to delete the selected, custom style from the Style list.
(button)
Scale factor Use this option to provide a scale factor for the selected Style that is
applied to the Size property value that appears on all text objects.

358 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

Table 3-91. Settings Dialog Box - Display - Font Styles Contents (cont.)
Field Description
Font Choose the font face from the pulldown list to configure the selected
Style.
Charset If the font you chose for the selected Style has multiple character sets,
choose the desired set from the pulldown list.
Bold, Italic, Select any of these checkboxes to apply the characteristic to the selected
Strikeout, style.
Underline

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 359


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Designer Diagnostics

Settings Dialog Box - xDX Designer


Diagnostics
To access: Setup > Settings, xDX Designer Diagnostics (category)
Use this dialog box to run the xDX Designer Diagnostics tool automatically when you exit a
design session.
Figure 3-80. Settings Dialog Box - xDX Designer Diagnostics

Objects
Table 3-92. Settings Dialog Box - xDX Designer Diagnostics Contents
Field Description
Execute xDX If checked, the xDX Designer tool runs the automatic xDX Designer
Designer Diagnostics Diagnostics tool when the session exits.
on exit

Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity with the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors - xDX De-
signer

360 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Cross Probing (category)
Use this dialog box to control cross probing parameters.
Figure 3-81. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Objects
Table 3-93. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing Contents
Field Description
Limit selection to already If checked, only the open schematic sheets or open ICTs cross
open documents probe to other applications, such as xPCB Layout.
If checked, you can further control cross probing to any of the
following selected objects:
for Signal Nets If checked, allows cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
for Global Nets If checked, allows cross probing for signal
nets on open documents.
for Components If checked, allows cross probing for
components on open documents.
for Pins If checked, allows cross probing for pins on open
documents.
Zoom Fit to Selected If checked, the xDX Designer tool zooms in on the selected,
objects cross-probed object. This setting also works with dynamic links,
to zoom in on the target object when a link is traversed.
Highlight unplaced components
Enable If checked, cross probing highlights unplaced components.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 361


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing

Table 3-93. Settings Dialog Box - Cross Probing Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Limit to already open If checked, only unplaced components on open schematic sheets
documents or open ICTs are highlighted.

Related Topics
Cross Probing Between the Design Entry Tool and Other Tools

362 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup

Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Sheet/ICT Backup (category)
Use this dialog box to set up automatic sheet/ICT backups.
Figure 3-82. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup

Objects
Table 3-94. Settings Dialog Box - Sheet/ICT Backup Contents
Field Description
Create Automatic Sheet/ If checked, both sheets and ICTs are backed up each time you
ICT Backup open them. Use the Number of backups pulldown (between 4
and 20) to set the number of sheet/ICT backups to save before
overwriting them. If you keep the default of 0, the xDX Designer
tool saves backups without overwriting older ones.
See also:
Backing Up and Restoring a Sheet or ICT - xDX Designer
Warn before deleting all If checked, provides a warning before deleting all backups of the
sheet backups current sheet.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups
current board backups in the current board.
Warn before deleting If checked, provides a warning before deleting all sheet backups
project backups in the current project.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 363


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, Project Backup (category)
Use this dialog box to manage a projects backups and backup settings. Depending on the
settings, different triggers can cause the project database to create a backup copy in a zipped
file.
Description
Most of the settings available from the Project Backup dialog are also available from the iCDB
Project Backup utility. The one exception is that the xDX Archiver tool can be controlled from
the Project Backup dialog, but not the iCDB Project Backup dialog.

The Project Backup dialog box shows the settings for the available backup types. The backup
types and the controls of the dialog box are described in the following tables.

Each backup type are further grouped under three categories: system, upgrade, or user. The
System Administrator can set permissions for which category a client can change settings. For
more information on setting Backup settings permissions, see the descriptions for
SystemBackupsSettings, UpgradeBackupsSettings, and UserBackupsSettings in the topic
ProjectBackup.cfg Configuration File in the Concurrent Design Administrators Guide.

364 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Figure 3-83. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Objects
Table 3-95. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Types
Backup Type Category Description
AutoSave User Created every <Interval> if the content has changed
since the last AutoSave made by the current server
session.
Session Startup User Created on server session startup, before the database
is opened.
Session Shutdown User Created on server session shutdown, after the database
is closed.
Application User Compatibility replacement for AutoBackup
functionality. Triggered by applications in specific
situations (e.g. project close, save, etc.). The interval
<Interval> defines the minimum time period between
successive backups.
DxD Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with xDX
Designer Diagnostics.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 365


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Table 3-95. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Types (cont.)


Backup Type Category Description
CES Diagnostics System Created before repairing the design with Constraint
Manager Diagnostics
Database Upgrade Upgrade Created before iCDB database upgrade. The number
of backups to store is per software release version.
Clear All Constraints System Created before using Clear All Constraints in
Constraint Manager.
Update Reuse Block System Created before updating each Reuse Block in xDX
Designer.
Symbol Update System Created before each symbol update in xDX Designer.
Symbol Substitute System Created before each symbol substitution in xDX
Designer.
Constraints Upgrade Created before constraint definition upgrade.
Definitions Upgrade
I/O Designer System Created before schematic changes made by I/O
Schematic Changes Designer.
User User Created when you select this option.
xDX Archiver ? Created by xDX Archiver. See Project Archive
Project Repair System Created before repairing the design with Project >
Repair in iCDB Project Backup (accessible from
Start > All Programs > Mentor Graphics SDD >
System Tools > iCDB Project Backup).

Table 3-96. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Controls


Control Description
Limit Project Backup log Over time the size of backup log files can grow to a size that
file size between ___ kb reduces project performance. This setting limits the size of
and ___ kb. log files so they cannot grow unchecked. When the file
reaches the upper limit, it erases enough of the earliest
entries to make the size match the lower limit.
Enable backups This global switch enables/disables the iCDB Project
Backup functionality entirely. This control is grayed out if
you do not have permission to set this feature. See the
ActivateDeactivate key description in the Configuration
File Parameter Descriptions topic in the Concurrent Design
Administrators Guide.

366 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup

Table 3-96. Settings Dialog Box - Project Backup Controls (cont.)


Control Description
Edit Opens the Backup type settings dialog box so you can
change the settings for the selected type. The dialog box
will not appear if you do not have permission to changes
settings on that type of backup (see the topic
ProjectBackup.cfg Configuration File in the Concurrent
Design Administrators Guide).

In the Backup type settings dialog box, you can set the
number backups to save for each type, the frequency to
make the backups if the backup is time-based. You can set
whether or not to create log files for that type. You can also
set whether or not the backup type is active or not.
Defaults Sets all settings to default values.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 367


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), Integrated Simulator
(subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control HDL simulation parameters.
Figure 3-84. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Objects
Table 3-97. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator Contents
Field Description
ModelSim Enter the path to the ModelSimfolder that contains the executable (or
Executable Path browse to it).
Actions Before Simulation Initialization
Export HDL Files If checked, you do not need to manually run Simulation > Export
HDL Files ( ) before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation
( ).
Delete Design Units If checked, you do not need to manually run Simulation > Clean ( )
from HDL Design before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).
Compile Files If checked, you do not need to manually run Simulation > Compile
( ) before running Simulation > Initialize Simulation ( ).

368 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

Table 3-97. Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Use External If checked, you use the ModelSim User Interface (UI) to set up and run
ModelSim the simulation instead of the xDX Designer UI.
If unchecked, the xDX Designer tool provides a dialog to set up and
run the simulation.
Whether this is checked or not, you still need to provide the path to the
ModelSim executable in the ModelSim Executable Path field.
Executable File and If the following Use External Text Editor option is checked, this field
Parameters becomes available to provide a path (or browse to it) to your own text
editor.
In addition to the path to the executable, include the parameter $(File)
as in the following example to enable xDX Designer to start the editor
on the correct HDL file:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File)

If your text editor invocation supports a second argument to invoke on


a specific line number, you can add the argument $(Line) as in the
following example:
C:\Program Files\TextPad.exe $(File) $(Line)
Use External Text If checked, you can provide a path to your own text editor in the field
Editor above.
If unchecked, the xDX Designer tool provides a text editor that you can
use.

Related Topics
Simulation Control Dialog Box
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 369


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: Setup > Settings, HDL/FPGA Integration (category), FPGA Tools (subcategory)
Use this dialog box to control the FPGA tool configuration settings.
Figure 3-85. Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools

Objects
Table 3-98. Settings Dialog Box - FPGA Tools Contents
Field Description
Current Tool Choose which tool you want to execute (Xilinx or Altera) when you
click the Launch FPGA Tool button on the HDL/FPGA
Integration toolbar.
Overwrite Tools Files If checked, prepares the project file in the FPGA tool with the HDL
List file list when you run the Launch FPGA Tool.
Export Before Launch If checked, exports HDL files when you run the Launch FPGA Tool.
Xilinx Executable Enter the path to the Xilinx folder that contains the executable (or
Path browse to it).
Altera Executable Enter the path to the Altera folder that contains the executable (or
Path browse to it).

Related Topics
Digital Block Simulation Process Overview
Settings Dialog Box - Integrated Simulator

370 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup

Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup


To access: Setup > Settings, Run on Startup (category)
Use this dialog box to define forms or scripts to run when a project starts.
Objects
Table 3-99. Settings Dialog Box - Run on Startup Contents
Field Description
Forms Lists the forms that are available in the active project.
Scripts Lists the scripts that are available in the active project.
Inserts a new form or script in the current list.
Removes a form or script from the current list.
Move a selected line item up in the list.
Move a selected line item down in the list.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 371


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Databook Data Source

Settings Dialog Box - xDX Databook Data


Source
To access: Setup > Settings, xDX DataBook Data Source (category)
Use this dialog box to enter a user name and password for a xDX DataBook data source.
Description
Oracle data sources require a user name and password, while they are optional for ODBC data
sources. The user name and password are encrypted and saved in the /<WDIR>/
DxDesigner.xml file.

Figure 3-86. Settings Dialog Box - xDX DataBook Data Source

Objects
Table 3-100. Settings Dialog Box - xDX DataBook Data Source Contents
Field Description
Save user If checked, the user name and password you provide below will be encrypted
name and and saved to the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file.
password
Data source Use the pulldown list to select the available data sources that have been
configured for your project. See Creating a Databook Configuration File

372 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - xDX Databook Data Source

Table 3-100. Settings Dialog Box - xDX DataBook Data Source Contents
Field Description
User name Only active if you checked the Save user name and password checkbox.

Note: If you do not set a user name and password, the Databook tool
prompts you for a user name and password when you try to open a
configuration file to a password-protected data source.
Password Only active if you checked the Save user name and password checkbox. See
the Note in the previous User name description.

Note: You cannot re-set the password through the dialog box. To re-set the
password, in the /<WDIR>/DxDesigner.xml file, delete the XML code
between the <USERDATA>...</USERDATA> tags.
Connection Displays the connection type.
type
Alias Displays the alias for the database.
Server Displays the server name if one is assigned.
Database Displays the Database name.

Related Topics
Databook to Data Sources Connections

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 373


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Licensing

Settings Dialog Box - Licensing


To access: Setup > Settings, Licensing (category)
Use this dialog box to choose which installed features to load when the application is started.
Objects
You have two methods to enable the desired licenses:
o Check out all available features
o Select options individually
Figure 3-87. Settings Dialog Box - Licensing Example

Related Topics
Enabling Licensed Features - xDX Designer

374 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Settings Dialog Box - Advanced


To access: Setup > Settings, Advanced (category)
Use this dialog box to set advanced xDX Designer settings.
Figure 3-88. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Settings Example

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 375


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Objects
Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents
Field Description
Area Select by If checked, when you draw a box to select objects on a sheet, the objects do
Overlap not need to be totally enclosed in the box to be selected. Even if just a
portion of an object is inside the selection box, the object is selected.
If unchecked, an object must be totally enclosed by the selection box to be
included in a selection.
See also:
Selecting Schematic Objects - xDX Designer
Auto Pan If checked, automatically pans the screen when dragging a component
around. This eliminates the need for using F6 to pan each time you move an
object.
Automatically If checked, the design entry tool automatically synchronizes net names, bus
synchronize names, with connected links. With this setting, the design entry tool always
Links and net keeps them synchronized no matter which name you change.
names If unchecked, you can use different names between nets or buses and
connected links.
Box Sets the drawing size of all boxes on dangling net endpoints. This option
Size[<Units>] indicates what Units have been set.
Default: 0.050 (with inches set as the Units setting, or 1.27mm)
Bus Box Size Sets the drawing size of all boxes on dangling bus endpoints. This option
[<Units>] indicates what Units have been set.
Default: 0.013 (with inches set as the Units setting, or 0.33mm)
Bus Dot Sets the drawing size (radius) of all bus connection dots. This option
Size[<Units>] indicates what Units have been set.
Default: 0.00 units
Copy Scope: xDX Designer
Constraints on If checked, the xDX Designer tool copies constraints data during Copy
Copy Sheet Block and Copy Sheet operations.
If unchecked, only schematic data is copied.
Copy Scope: xDX Designer
Constraints If checked, constraints copied in Copy Block and Copy Sheet operations
Overwrites All overwrite existing values of constraints in the project to which a block or
Values sheet is copied.
If unchecked, constraints copied in Copy Block and Copy Sheet operations
do not overwrite existing values of constraints in the project to which a
block or sheet is copied.

376 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Copy and Paste Scope: xDX Designer
Sheet using If checked, Constraint Manager opens automatically in Conflict Resolution
Conflict Manager (CRM) when you paste a sheet in xDX Designer.
Resolution
See also: Correcting Constraint Manager Diagnostics Errors in the
Constraint Editor System (CES) Users Manual
Crosshair Set the appearance of the schematic cursor as one of the following from the
Cursor pulldown:
None
Small
Full Extent
Delete Set the design entry tool action for mismatched Symbol/Pin port connectors
mismatched as one of the following:
Symbol/Pin Ask You are given a choice at the time the mismatch is found
port connectors
Yes Delete the found mismatched port connectors
No Do not delete the found mismatched port connectors
Display Only If checked, the design entry tool displays only the schematic sheet name on
Sheet Names in schematic tabs as shown below:
Tabs

If unchecked, the design entry tool displays the schematic name followed by
the sheet name on schematic tabs as shown below:

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 377


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Dot Sets the drawing size (radius) of all net connection dots. The design entry
Size[<Units>] tool determines the connection dot size from the radius setting and the net
line width. This option indicates what Units have been set.
If the net has a line width=1, the design entry tool displays the connection
dot using the radius value (0.025 in the second example in the following
figure.)
If the net has a line width>1, the design entry tool increases the connection
dot size according to the net size. The design entry tool adds the radius value
to the edge of the net line edge as shown in the first example in the following
figure:

Xpedition Style If checked, the design entry tool uses Xpedition Layout-style key bindings.
Keybindings If unchecked, the design entry tool uses default key bindings.
See also:
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style on page 437
Key Bindings - Default on page 433

378 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Fixed Text If unchecked (off), the design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in
Rotation the following example (on the left). Rotating the text 180 degrees
maintains the original orientation. Rotating the Text string either 90 or
270 degrees produces the results shown in the example on the left.
If checked (on), the design entry tool handles text rotation as shown in
the following example (on the right). For each rotation of the text (90,
180, and 270 degrees), the orientation is changed as shown.
Example 3-1. Fixed Text Rotation

Note: If you change the setting from checked (on) to unchecked (off)
after you have added text, any text appearing in the 180 degree state or
the 270 degree state (as shown on the right in the example above) changes to
the equivalent state as shown at the left in the example when you apply the
new setting.
See also:
Changing Object Orientation - xDX Designer
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date symbols. The
date symbols software compares the symbol in the host design and central library to
ensure they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the symbol is different
than that in the host design, the design entry tool places a magenta box
around the out-of-date symbol.
See also:
Updating Sheets With Changed Library Symbols - xDX Designer
Flag out-of- If checked, enables checking and highlighting of out-of-date reusable
date Reuse blocks. The software compares the reusable block in the host design and
Blocks central library to ensure they are the same. If the time/date stamp of the
reusable block symbol is different than that in the host design, the design
entry tool places a magenta box around the out-of-date reusable block.
See also:
Updating Sheets With Changed Library Symbols - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 379


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Flip/Mirror Controls the Flip or Mirror operation when more than one object is selected
objects as follows:
separately If checked, the design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of
objects against each objects symmetry axis
If unchecked, the design entry tool flips/mirrors the selected group of
objects against the symmetry axis of the entire selected group.
See also:
Changing Object Orientation - xDX Designer
Inverted Pin Controls the size of the bubble on inverted pins. This option indicates what
Bubble Units have been set.
Size[<Units>]
Language Set the User Interface language to one of the following:
Default
English
Japanese
Portuguese
Chinese
Pintype Arrows Select between the following appearance of pintype arrows between full
arrow and half arrow (European) styles:
None .........(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 0,
...................EURO_ARROWS, not applicable)
Full Size....(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 0)
Half Size...(PINTYPE_ARROWS, value = 1,
...................EURO_ARROWS, value = 1)
Notes:
The design entry tool only displays pintype arrows for symbols that have
block types of Module and Composite. The design entry tool does not
display pintype arrows for a block type of Pin.
If a pintype does not exist on the symbol pin, the design entry tool will
not display Pintype Arrows.
Different pin types are represented by different arrows. A list of these are
shown in the PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples table in the Settings Dialog
Box - Advanced topic.

380 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Preserve If checked, the design entry tool preserves packaging information such as
packaging info reference designators, instance values, pin numbers, and pin slots when
on copy copying a schematic, a schematic sheet, a block, or a design.
If unchecked, the packaging information resets to default or empty values
(depending on the information type) when you copy a schematic, sheet,
block, or design.
Propagate Ports If checked, any pins that you add to a block automatically causes
to Schematic corresponding ports to be added to the lower-level schematic when you
execute (right-click) > Push Schematic from the block. In addition, when
you place parts containing multiple part database slots (multiple parts in one
package), the placed part automatically assigns a slot number and
corresponding pin values.
If unchecked, you must manually add missing ports to a lower-level
schematic from a block using Add > Missing Ports. In the case of multiple
parts in one package, you can manually assign slots using the pdbslot
command or let the Packager make the assignment during packaging.
See also:Connecting Hierarchical Levels in a Top-Down Design
Reset If checked, when you execute Tools > Update Symbols, the design entry
Component tool sets the local symbol scale factor to 1 for any updated symbols. For
Scale on example:
Symbol Update 1. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
2. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
3. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool resets the local scale factor to 1 on all
symbols requiring an update. The design entry tool reflects only the 0.8
scale factor set in the Symbol Editor.
If unchecked, when you execute Tools > Update Symbols, the design entry
tool maintains the original local scale factor of any updated symbols, and
also applies any changed scale factor from the library. Using the same
scenario in the previous example:
1. Set the scale factor on a symbol to 0.8 in the design entry tool.
2. Change the scale factor in the Symbol Editor for that symbol to 0.8.
3. Update the symbol in the design entry tool.
Results: The design entry tool applies both the local scale factor and the
Symbol Editor scale factor to the updated symbol. For this example, the
design entry tool rescales the symbol to 0.64.
See also:
Scale Symbol Dialog Box in the xDX Designer Symbol Editor Users Guide
Updating Sheets With Changed Library Symbols

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 381


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-101. Settings Dialog Box - Advanced Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Reuse Blocks If checked, Constraint Manager uses the host design rules for clearances and
Use Host widths instead of merging them with the reuse block design.
Design Rules

Run If checked before opening a project that was created with an earlier version
Diagnostics of the design entry tool (xDX Designer), the Diagnostics Tool automatically
after update runs after successfully updating the project to the current version of the
design entry tool.
See also:
Checking Data Integrity with the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting
Reported Errors - xDX Designer
Selection Specify a positive integer to set the number of pixels that determine the
Distance[<Unit selection distance boundary to an object on a schematic. This option
s>] indicates what Units have been set.
Show Ripper If checked, display the bit numbers on a ripped bus.
Indexes See also:
Display Full Signal Name on Ripper
Connectivity With Buses - xDX Designer
Unique names If checked, the design entry tool automatically creates a unique label for a
on copy copied net, component, or pin.
Use Full Bus If checked, the xDX Designer tool displays the full net name when you rip
Name on nets from a bus as shown below:
Ripper

If unchecked, xDX Designer just displays the bus ripper index value when
you rip nets from a bus as shown below:

Prerequisite:
The Show Ripper Indexes option must be set before you can display the
signal name.
See also:
Connectivity With Buses - xDX Designer

382 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Settings Dialog Box - Advanced

Table 3-102. PINTYPE/Arrow Type Examples


PINTYPE Arrow Type Example
ANALOG Hollow

BI Solid
IN Solid

OCL Filled Diagonal

OEM Hollow

OUT Solid

TRI Hollow

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 383


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Simulation Setup Dialog Box

Simulation Setup Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access:
In Navigator window, open the popup on the selected HDL Design. Choose Simulation
Settings.
Tools > Simulation Options
Use this dialog box to set up the SDF (Standard Delay Format) options for a ModelSim
simulation session.
Figure 3-89. Simulation Setup Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-103. Simulation Setup Dialog Box - SDF Tab Contents
Field Description
Files In this list, add one or more standard delay format (SDF) files,
which describe various interconnect delays to run back-
annotated simulations.
Disable SDF Warnings If checked, set the simulator to disable these warning reports.
Reduce SDF Error To If checked, set the simulator reduce the severity of error found
Warnings to warnings.
Multi-Source Delay From the pulldown, set to one of: latest, min or max. Or leave
blank for none.

384 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Update Other Objects Dialog Box


To access: Tools > Update Other Objects
Use this dialog box to choose what type of object you want to update. You also select the Range
or scope of the update so that you do not interfere with others who might be working on the
same project concurrently, or because you want different results at different levels of the
project.
Figure 3-90. Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-104. Update Other Object Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Type (select one or more of these types to update)
Properties See also:
Controlling Sheet Borders - xDX Designer
Bus Signals See also:
Creating and Editing Pre-Defined Buses - xDX Designer
Bus Rippers See also:
Using a Customized Ripper Graphic - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 385


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Update Other Objects Dialog Box

Table 3-104. Update Other Object Dialog Box Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Print Order If you select a sheet from the Navigator and apply the (right-
click) > Exclude from Printout option, you must update the
associated Border property @PRINTORDER using this Print
Order option. Note, this option is automatically set when you
check the Cross Reference option.
See also:
Excluding Sheets from Printing or PDF Generation - xDX
Designer
Changing Sheet Print Order - xDX Designer
Range (before choosing one of these, you need to open a sheet within the desired range)
Project (All project types) If you want to propagate the change throughout the entire
project, open any schematic sheet in the project.
Board (PADS, or Netlist If you want to update all sheets under a particular board, open
project) any sheet within the board.
Schematic (Netlist project) If you want to update all sheets within a particular schematic,
open one of the sheets within the desired schematic.
Sheet (All project types) If you only want to update one particular sheet, open that sheet.

386 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Verify Dialog Box


To access: Tools > Verify , or from the Navigator, right-click a board design and choose
Verify
Use this dialog box to configure the Design Rule Checker (DRC) Verify tool.
Description
The Verify dialog box Settings pane (shown in Figure 3-91) configures the DRC scope and
shows which Defaults file and which Configuration file the Verify tool uses. See the tables in
this topic for more information. Also see Design Objectsfor a description of the design
hierarchy.

The remainder of the Verify dialog box is groups of rules checks divided into panes such as
Migration, Connectivity, Electrical, and so on. See the remaining tables in this topic for more
information on these panes.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 387


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Figure 3-91. Verify Dialog Box - Settings Pane

388 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Figure 3-92. Verify Dialog Box - Rules Panes

Objects
Table 3-105. Verify Settings - xDX Designer - Pane Contents
Field Description
Board If chosen, the DRC checks the selected board.
( Integrated
PADSor
Netlist project
Schematic If chosen, the DRC checks the schematic of this block or design.
Sheet If chosen, the DRC checks the first sheet of this block or design.
All hierarchy If chosen, checks all hierarchy. Works with Schematic or Sheet options.
underneath
Level Choose either STD, VHDL, or Verilog to limit how far DRC descends into the
Property hierarchy.
Show If chosen, the DRC report shows hierarchical paths.
hierarchical
paths
Configuration Shows the path to either the Verify.ini or NetlistVerify.ini file that stores your
File local DRC dialog box default settings.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 389


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verify Dialog Box

Table 3-105. Verify Settings - xDX Designer - Pane Contents (cont.)


Field Description
Defaults Displays a pulldown that allows you to do one of the following:
button Save Current xDX Designer saves your Verify dialog box settings to the
local VerifyDefaults.ini file. xDX Designer stores only the settings that differ
from the <SDD_HOME>/standard/VerifyDefaults.ini file in your local copy.
Default xDX Designer restores the Verify dialog box settings to those
specified in: <SDD_HOME>/standard/VerifyDefaults.ini.

Related Topics
DRC Settings Section - VerifyDefaults.ini File
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order
DRC Rule Notes and Examples

390 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Dialog Boxes and Windows
Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

Verilog Netlister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > Verilog Netlist
Use this dialog box to create a Verilog netlist file(s) for a design. This netlister first runs the
iCDB Compiler utility to generate a Common Database for the design, and then runs the
appropriate utilities to generate the Verilog netlist (.v) files, which are used for simulating the
design.
Description
These utilities are run automatically when invoked from the Verilog Netlister dialog so you do
not have to invoke each utility separately.

If state, flowchart, or table blocks exists in the design, the appropriate HDL Generator is run on
the blocks to generate a Verilog netlist (.v). All settings are stored in a hdlutils.ini file that the
Verilog netlister creates in the project directory.

Figure 3-93. Verilog Netlister Dialog Box

Objects
Table 3-106. Verilog Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output File Specify the output file of the resulting Verilog netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate Verilog files for all schematics in the design

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 391


Dialog Boxes and Windows
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

VHDL Netlister Dialog Box


Scope: xDX Designer
To access: File > Export > VHDL Netlist
Use this dialog box to configure the iCDB-to-VHDL netlister. This utility extracts data from the
Integrated Common Database (iCDB) and outputs it in VHDL IEEE 1076-1987 format.
Figure 3-94. VHDL Netlister Dialog Box

Description
You set up the netlister from Setup > Settings, Project (category), Export HDL (subcategory),
VHDL (subcategory).

The VHDL Netlister produces an ASCII output file with a .vhd extension in the Generated HDL
directory specified in the project. Any existing .vhd file with the same base name is overwritten.

Objects
Table 3-107. VHDL Netlister Dialog Box Contents
Field Description
Output Folder Specify the output folder/file of the resulting VHDL netlist
From Block You can enter a specific schematic name or leave this field empty
to generate VHDL files for all the schematics in the design

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - External Packages
Settings Dialog Box - Export HDL - Port Map
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

392 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 4
Design Entry Tool Commands

There are two types of design entry tool commands:


Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary on page 393 - Commands that
can be executed from a DOS or Linux shell without invoking the design entry tool user
interface
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands on page 406 - Design entry tool
commands that can be executed within the user interface from the command line.
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command


Summary
The following table lists a number of design entry tool commands you can execute from a
command shell (DOS).
Note
Use the help or h switch as indicated with the following commands to see a list of options
and their description.

Table 4-1. A - Shell Level Design Entry Tool Command Descriptions


Command Description
AllegroNetlist Saves the current sheet in a Cadence Allegro netlist format in a .tel
(-help) file.

DxArchiver In the PADS DX Designer tool, the Archiver utility collects and
(-h) stores schematics, symbols, and other data associated with a specific
design or project in the design entry tool.
Also see: Project Archive
edifExporter Export an EDIF netlist.
(-h)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 393


Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary

Table 4-1. A - Shell Level Design Entry Tool Command Descriptions (cont.)
Command Description
icdbPartsLister Configure the Part Lister tool for creating a list of the parts used in a
(-h) design.
Also see: Generating Bills of Materials
icdbPartsLister on page 396
KeyinNetlist Save the design as an xPCB Layout Keyin netlist.
(-help)
package Configure and run the Packager, which prepares the specified
project for forward annotation by assigning reference designators to
map each component in the logical schematic to a physical part.
See also: package on page 398
RinfNetlist Save the current sheet in a Zuken RINF netlist format in a .frp file.
(-help)
QuickConnectionView Write the design out as a netlist to an ASCII file.
(-help)
sch2pdf Generate PDF files for the design entry tool schematics from the
(-h) DOS or UNIX command line.

vdrc (-usage) Start the Design Rule Checker (DRC).


See also: vdrc (Design Rule Checker) on page 405
Verify Dialog Box on page 387

394 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands

Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Commands


The design entry tool provides a number of commands you can execute from a command shell
(DOS) instead of from withing the designer entry tool UI.
icdbPartsLister. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
DxArchiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
sch2pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
vdrc (Design Rule Checker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 395


Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister

icdbPartsLister
You invoke the Part Lister from the command line.
Usage
icdbPartsLister [-p | -proj]=file.prj [-b | -board]=name
[-s | -block]=name [-a | -architecture]=name
[-c | -cfg]=file.ipl [-o | -out]=file
[-l | -level]=level

Arguments
-p or -proj=file.prg
Specify the path to the file.prj project file
-b or -board=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project, specify the specific board
(name) or optionally choose a block as shown in the next argument
-s or -block=name
If you do not want to run the Part Lister on the entire project or a specific board, specify a
block (name)
-a or -architecture=name
Use this option to choose a specific VHDL architecture (name)
-f or -function=name
Use this option to choose a specific function
-c or -cfg=file.ipl
Choose a file.ipl file that contains the Part Lister options
-o or -out=file
Specify the output file path
-l or -level=level
Specify a custom level
Examples
Example: if your design is called circuit1, you could invoke the Part Lister with:

icdbPartsLister circuit1 -i circuit1.ipl -o circuit1.lst

However, since the name of the initialization and output files are arbitrary, you may create
several different initialization files to produce various output files, such as separate parts lists
and cost summaries. If you wanted to generate cost summaries for several different designs, you
might have an initialization file for this purpose, so you could invoke the Part Lister with:

icdbPartsLister circuit1 - i costlist.ipl -o costlist.lst

396 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
icdbPartsLister

The Part Lister looks in your current project directory (by default) for the initialization (.ipl) file
you are calling out. If the Part Lister does not find the .ipl file in the current project, it then looks
in your STANDARD directory as defined in your WDIR environmental variable. If the Part
Lister still cant find the .ipl file, it generates an error message indicating the problem.

Related Topics
Shell-Level Design Entry Tool Command Summary

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 397


Design Entry Tool Commands
package

package
Shell-level command
Configure and run the Packager, which prepares the specified project for forward annotation by
assigning reference designators to map each component in the logical schematic to a physical
part.
Usage
package -j<path_to_proj> [-n<design_name>] [-ob | -op] [-Block=<block_name>]
[-Add | -Refresh | -Replace | -CleanBuild] [-Update[=<file>]] [-u<directory>] [-p<file>]
[-b<file>] [-l<file>] [-d] [-i] [-a] [-NoFill] [-W1PinNets]
[-r] [-s] [-CW] [-y]
[-k] [-1 | -2] [-help]
Arguments
-j<path_to_proj>
Required. Specify the path to the project file.
-n<design_name>
Specify the design or configuration name.
Packaging Optimization
If neither the -ob or -op options are used, symbols are combined into packages regardless of
the symbols location within the schematic. Or specify the Packaging Optimization as one
of the following:
-ob Only allows symbols within the same block to be combined into packages.
-op Only allows symbols on the same page to be combined into packages.
-Block=<block_name>
Define the scope of the packaging operation. If you omit this option, the Packager works on
the entire design. If specify a block, the Packager narrows the scope to all sheets in that
block. If you specify a particular sheet from one of the blocks such as <schematic_name>1,
the Packager narrows the operation scope even further to just that sheet.
-Add
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Does not check for newer
versions of local parts.
-Refresh
Extract only those parts that do not already exist in the local copy. Overwrites existing local
parts with newer versions if they exist in the Central Library.
-Replace
Delete local data and re-extracts. Exception: If you have imported any data directly into the
local copy (for example, an FPGA Pin File), that data is preserved.

398 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
package

-CleanBuild
Delete all local data and re-extracts.
-Update[=<file>]
Specify a file that contains a list of parts that get updated during packaging. If no file is
specified, update all parts.
-u<directory
Specify a Central Database.
-p<file>
Specify the target Parts Database (cad.pdb).
-b<file>
Specify the output BAM (db_wasis.BAM).
-l<file>
Specify a file for the logfile output.
-d
Write verbose information on the packaging process to a log file. To optimize performance,
enable this option to debug packager errors, and then disable once the design is error-free.
Packaging Operation
If neither the -i, -r, or -s options are set, the Packager maintains any existing packaging. The
packager only packages new or unpackaged components. Otherwise, set the packaging
operation as one of the following:
-i The Packager removes all the Frozen Package properties and packages all components,
including previously packaged components.
-r Packages all components except those that have a Frozen Package property value of
Fix.
-s Checks the design to verify that it will package correctly. Writes errors to the
partpkg.log file.
-a
Prevents the Packager from replacing existing alphanumeric Reference Designators.
-NoFill
If you do not specify this option, the Packager fills in Reference Designators (Ref Des)
when new unpackaged parts are added to the design. For example; Given U100, U102, and
U103... If a new part is added, it is assigned Reference Designator U101 to fill in the gap
between U100 and U102.
If you specify this -NoFill option, the Packager assigns Ref Des numbers to continue at the
top of the existing numbering scheme when new unpackaged parts are added to the design.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 399


Design Entry Tool Commands
package

For example; Given the parts in the previous example, if a new part is added, the gap
between U100 and U102 is retained and the new part is assigned Ref Des U104.
-W1PinNets
The Packager includes warnings for this condition in the PartPkg.log file and on the
Packager results tab. If this option is not specified, warnings for this condition are
suppressed.
CW
Close window on completion.
-y
Update BAM files only. The Packager will not update the Central Database.
-k
Select this option if you are getting component properties from the parts database (PDB),
and not from Databook.
-1
Low level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
-2
High level of debug output is sent to the standard output.
-help
Display the package command argument usage to the command window.
Related Topics
Packager Dialog Box
Packaging a Design

400 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver

DxArchiver
Run this command from any system command window in the PADS DX Designer tool.
This command archives the design entry tool project data files in a specified location and
format. The archive process also generates two .xml files: the DxArchiver.xml file, which
contains archive script information; and the manifest.xml file, which contains data file
information.
Usage
DxArchiver noGUI p file_name [t directory] [c file_name] [l log_file] [-setStatic] [-zip]
[-createpdf] [h]
Arguments
-noGUI
Tells DxArchiver not to use the wizard
-p file_name
Specifies the path and name of the design entry tool project (.prj) file to archive.
-c file_name
(Optional) Specifies the path to the DxArchiver.xml file.
-t directory
(Optional) Specifies the target directory
-l log_file
(Optional) Creates a log file of the archive.
-setStatic
(Optional) Changes physical planes from Dynamic to Static.
-zip
(Optional) Compresses the contents and creates a single .zip file of all the archive files.
-createpdf
(Optional) Creates a .pdf file of all the schematic sheets in the project file.
-h
Displays help.
Examples
Display help for the DxArchiver command:
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\wv\win32\bin\DxArchiver.exe -h

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 401


Design Entry Tool Commands
DxArchiver

Archive the project using only the command defaults:


DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxDWIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj

Archive the project and use the script from Archive.xml file in the target directory. Also,
compress the contents of the archive into a single .zip file and create a .pdf file of the
schematic sheets.
DxArchiver -noGUI -p C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj
-c C:\project_archives\DxArchiver.xml -t C:\project_archives
-zip -createpdf

Add additional folder/file information to an existing DxArchiver.xml file (bold).


<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<DxArchiverProject version="1">
<DxProject Path=
"Path="C:\DxWDIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj"/>
<!--Equivalent to
-p C:\DxDWIR\DxExpStart\DxTutorial\DxTutorial.prj -->
<TargetDirectory Path="C:\gary_archives"/> <!--Equivalent to -t
C:\gary_archives -->
<Compression Type="Zip"/> <!--Equivalent to -zip -->
<PDF Type="1"/> <!--Equivalent to -
createpdf -->
<AdditionalFiles>
<File Path="C:\project_archives\Archiver_test"/>
</AdditionalFiles>
</DxArchiverProject>

Related Topics
xDX Archiver Wizard

402 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf

sch2pdf
In addition to using the DxPDF interface, you can also generate PDF files for schematics from
the DOS or UNIX command line. The command line program is named sch2pdf.exe.
Usage
sch2pdf -project <project_file> [-eevm <filename>] [-a <output_filename>]
[-c <colorCode>] [-g* global_override] [-i <hyperlink>] [-l <level>]
[-o <order>] [-s] [-p] [-f] [-v] [-u <font_name>]
[-schematic <name>]
Parameters
Command line options are described in the following tables.
Table 4-2. Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
-a Overrides the default output filename of <design>.pdf
-c Refer to Color Code in the following table for a list of colorCode options.
-eevm Switches on generation PDF in eevm mode
-f Displays a PDF file in Adobe Acrobat with a list of fonts supported on your
system
-i Interprets component attribute values as potential URLs
-p Adds a pop-up menu on components
-project Path to the .prj project file
-s Starts the Adobe Acrobat viewer and displays the output file
-schematic Specify the name of only one particular schematic to be generated.
-u Disable font mapping for a particular named font.
-v Makes all hyperlinks visible in a PDF document
Command line color codes are described in the following table:
Table 4-3. Command Line Color Codes For Generating a PDF File
Color Code Description
0 Black on white, suppresses black text
1 Color on white
2 Color on black
3 Black on white, prints text in black

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 403


Design Entry Tool Commands
sch2pdf

Other command line options are described in the following table:


Table 4-4. Additional Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
global override Overrides memory allocation defaults. Use only on very large designs that
do not otherwise complete.
hyperlink Component property names whose values are checked as legal URLs
level Property to stop descending composite symbols (specifies multiple levels
separately)
order Component property names whose values override sheet order (use with
Scout)
Advanced options for use on very large designs are shown in the following table:
Table 4-5. Advanced Command Line Options for Generating a PDF File
Option Description
ga Maximum number of annotations
go Maximum number of objects
gp Maximum number of pages

Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands
DxPDF interface - xDX Designer

404 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
vdrc (Design Rule Checker)

vdrc (Design Rule Checker)


In addition to using the Verify dialog box, you can also run the DRC from the DOS or UNIX
command line. The command line program is named vdrc.
Usage
vdrc -proj <project_file.prj> -block <block_name> -def <definition_filename>
[-dxd_std] [-group <group_name>] [-hier] [-page <sheet_name>]
-set <settings_filename> [-ssc] [-usage]
Arguments
Table 4-6. Command Line Options for vdrc Command
Option Description
-proj (Required) Specify a path to the project_file.prj file. The vdrc command uses
the .prj file contents to determine settings such as the Bus Contents and others,
which will override any duplicate settings that might appear on the command
line.
-block (Required) Specify the block that vdrc will check.
-def (Required) Specify the path to the default Verify configuration file. This file
contains settings usually specified by an administrator for multiple users or to
determine standardized checks. If you do not specify this file, vdrc uses the
default file stored with the installation for your type of project, such as
C:\...\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini or C:\...\standard\VerifyDefaultsSD.ini .
-dxd_std If specified, the vdrc output is formatted for , with HTML tags with links to the
objects.
-group Specify the Verify group_name in order to execute all checks within the
specified group such as Connectivity, Electrical, and so on.
-hier If specified, vdrc checks the specified block and all hierarchy below the block.
-page If you specify a page sheet_name, only that sheet will be verified.
-set (Required) Specify the path to the user settings stored in a Verify.ini
configuration file. If you do not specify this path, the settings defined in the
Default Verify configuration file will be used. See the -def option above.
-ssc Applicable only if you have xSD Systems Designer installed. Checks the
architectural view in a xSD Systems Designer design.
-usage Displays the vdrc command usage information.

Related Topics
Design Entry Tool Commands
Verify Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 405


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands


The design entry tool commands are grouped alphabetically. Online viewers can click on a
letter below to access each alphabetic group:

Table 4-7. A - Command Line Commands


Command Description
A
ansize n = 0 through 4
Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to an.
When you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to an.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet
size.)
adistance Sets the avoidance distance between components. The routing distance can
be specified with the aroute command. A connection is automatically
staggered by the avoidance distance as the route hugs to the components or
other connections.
ainvis Makes the specified attribute invisible in the active schematic or symbol
window. If you enter the ainvis command on the command line and execute
the command, the Make Attribute Invisible dialog box appears. You can
either enter an attribute name in the Name field to make a specific invisible,
or you can leave the wildcard (*) symbol in the Name field to make all
properties invisible.
align Aligns the selected components to a side of the window.
Syntax: align side
where side equals one of: left, right, top, or bottom.
anvis Makes the name portion of the specified properties visible in the active
schematic or symbol window. The Make Attributes Name Visible dialog
box appears. Enter the attribute name in the Name field and click OK. You
can use the wildcard characters when entering the attribute name.
aoff Changes the attributes settings to off.
aon Changes the attributes settings to on.
arc Adds an arc in the schematic or symbol drawing. Arcs are dynamically
created by specifying the endpoints and stretching the segment to specify the
arc.
Also see:
Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet - xDX Designer

406 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-7. A - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
aroute Changes the routing mode to full avoidance routing. Executing this
command changes the routing mode specified in the DxDesigner.xml file
(key name=ROUTE value=2) to avoidance routing.
array Creates an array for one or more selected objects. Arrays are created by
selecting the command and defining the relative or absolute spacing.
Using positive values for the spacing settings creates the array to the right
and/or upward in the window.
Also see:
Creating a Graphical Component Array - xDX Designer
arrowson Turns on Pintype Arrows
arrowsoff Turns off Pintype Arrows
asize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to a. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to a.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet
size.)
avis Makes the specified attributes visible in the active schematic or symbol
window.
To make an attribute visible, enter the avis command from the command
line. The Make Attributes Visible dialog box appears. Enter the attribute
name in the Name field and click OK. You can use the wildcard characters
when entering the attribute name
avvis Makes the value portion of the specified attributes visible in the active
schematic or symbol window.
To make a value visible, enter the avvis command from the command line.
The Make Attribute Value Visible dialog box appears. Enter the attribute
name in the Name field and click OK. You can use the wildcard characters
when entering the attribute name.

Table 4-8. B - Command Line Commands


Command Description
B
bb This command brings up the Change Bounding Box dialog that allows you to
modify the bounding box of your current drawing.
L1X: Lower left x-coordinate (should typically be 0)
L1Y: Lower left y-coordinate (should typically be 0)
UrX: Upper right x-coordinate (should typically be width of drawing)
UrY: Upper right y-coordinate (should typically be height of drawing)

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 407


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-8. B - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
bcast Turn broadcasting on or off.
bcomposite Set blocktype composite.
bcopy Copies the selected objects or areas of the drawing into the clipboard,
overwriting the previous contents of the clipboard.
Also see:
Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects - xDX Designer

bcut Removes the selected objects or areas from the window into the buffer,
overwriting the previous buffer contents.
Also see:
Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects - xDX Designer

boff Turns the border for the active window off.


bon Turns the border for the active window on.
box Adds a box to the schematic or symbol drawing. The box is dynamically
created when you drag the mouse.
Also see:
Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet - xDX Designer

bpaste Copies the contents of the buffer to an indicated location in the active
window.
Also see:
Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects - xDX Designer

bsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to b. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to b.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
bus Adds a bus in the active schematic window.
A bus is a collection of nets that can operate as a group or as individual nets
within the bus. A bus is created between components, from a single
component, or between nets.
Also see: Connectivity With Buses

408 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-9. C - Command Line Commands


Command Description
C
cattribute Displays the Properties window (if not already open) for the selected schematic,
component, net, symbol or pin.
cb Lets you change the border on the open schematic. When you execute the
command, a Change Border dialog box appears. Fill in or browse to the path to
the border you want to use.
ccomp Changes the symbol that the selected component represents.
Syntax: ccomp new_component_name
If you do not enter new_component_name, the Change Component dialog box
appears to prompt you to enter the component name and whether you want to
preserve REFDES. Preserve REFDES defaults to no.
chgattr The Change Attribute dialog box appears so you can change only the selected
property.
chglabel The Change Label dialog box appears so you can change only the selected label
(name).
chgtext The Change Text dialog box appears so you can change only the selected text.
cinst Updates the pin numbers of all selected components. This command does not
updated the REFDES attribute information.
circle Adds a circle to the active schematic or symbol window.
Also see:
Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet - xDX Designer

color Changes the color or selected objects in the active window to the color you
specify.
Example: color blue
If you enter only the command color, the Change Color dialog box appears to
prompt you to enter the color.
component Adds a component to the schematic drawing.
If you dont specify the component name, the Add Component dialog box
appears so you can enter the component name.
copy Copies the selected object or group of objects.
Also see:
bpaste
Duplicating and Moving Selected Objects - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 409


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-9. C - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
csize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to c When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to c (Executing
this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
ctoff Toggles the display of all text, labels, and properties associated with all
component symbols to off. Text, labels, or properties you add on the component
level are unaffected.
cton Toggles the display of all text, labels, and properties associated with all
component symbols to on. Text, labels, or properties you add on the component
level are unaffected.
cuapply Update components to match symbols, mark as compliant, and clear optional
highlight. When you execute the command, the Apply Symbol Updates to
Components dialog box appears. Select whether to apply the command to All or
Selected, then select the desired slot.
cucheck Check components for compliance with their symbols. When compliant, the
component on the design matches the symbol in the library. Highlight & select
all out-of-date components.
cycle Automatically changes a specialized pin to the next component of the same type
of a user-configured list.
PADS DX Designer

Table 4-10. D - Command Line Commands


Command Description
D
db Delete border.
dbevoff Turns the database validation of read verbosity of the SCH/SYM parser off.
Off - tallies the number of messages when done reading the design.
On - generates all error/warning messages.

dbevon Turns the database validation of read verbosity of the SCH/SYM parser on.
On - generates all error/warning messages.
Off - tallies the number of messages when done reading the design.

defshoff Toggles off default border functionality. New schematics will not have a
default border applied to them.
defshon Toggles on default border functionality. New schematics will have a default
border applied to them.

410 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-10. D - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
defsh1off Toggles off use of different border for underlying schematics. They will have
the same border as sheets 2 N.
defsh1on Toggles on use of different border for underlying schematics. They will use
the sheet 1 border.
defshcfg Use borders from user-configurable file and location.
defshfix Use borders from fixed file and location.
delete Deletes the selected objects in the active document. The delete command can
be reversed using the undo command.
If you delete a component, net segment, or bus segment from a schematic, all
connections become dangling connections.
If the object you delete has dangling connections, by default these wires
(including attached labels and properties) are also deleted. If you want to
preserve net labels and properties from deletion in this case, use CTRL+ Del.
directory Lists all the schematics and the symbols used on the schematics (in memory)
and identifies from which library the schematics and symbols were accessed.
dirsym Lists all the symbol files in project directories as specified in the name.prj
file.
Enter the dirsym command in the command line field and execute the
command.
Restriction: dirsym truncates file names to the first 16 characters.
doff Toggles the display of objects during object manipulation operations to off.
The default value for detail is the current value set in your DxDesigner.xml
file.
When you use this command, a bounding box is displayed to represent the
object until the operation is complete. If you use the don command, the
objects are continually displayed while you are performing object operations,
such as: adding, pasting, moving, copying, or rotating.
don Toggles the display of objects during object manipulation operations to on.
The default value for detail is the current value set in your DxDesigner.xml
file.
When you use this command, the objects are continually displayed while you
are performing object operations, such as: adding, pasting, moving, copying,
or rotating. If you use the doff command, a bounding box is displayed to
represent the object until the operation is complete.
Tip: Using this command slows down object movement. If you find the speed
of object operations slow, change this option setting. Click the right mouse
button or the spacebar while dragging an object to toggle detail settings on the
fly.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 411


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-10. D - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
dsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to d. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to d.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)

Table 4-11. E - Command Line Command


Command Description
E
egoff Exclude globals fm unique labels off.
egon Exclude globals fm unique labels on.
esize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to e. When
you execute this command, the sheet size automatically changes to e.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.)
execute Execute a command ID.
commandid
exit Exit the design entry tool session

Table 4-12. F - Command Line Commands


Command Description
F
fcloseall Saves all open symbol and schematic windows.
If a file has been modified, a dialog opens asking if you want to save it.
form Run a form.
full Shows the full view of the schematic or symbol displayed in the active
window.

Table 4-13. G - Command Line Commands


Command Description
G
gmove Fast move.
goff Turns off the grid display for the current schematic or symbol window. The
grid will not display if the spacing number specifies too many dots to be
drawn.
Also see: Display Grid

412 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-13. G - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
gon Turns on the grid display for the current schematic or symbol window.
Also see: Display Grid
grid Toggles the grid display on and off.
Also see: Display Grid
ground Add ground pin to schematic
gspace Changes the grid display space increment for the current schematic or symbol
window. Grid increments are 0.01 inch.

Table 4-14. I - Command Line Commands


Command Description
I
ib Insert a border on the open schematic. When you execute the command, the
default border for the sheet size and orientation (portrait or landscape) of the
schematic is inserted.
in Zooms in on the design.
io Select pins that exist on a symbol corresponding to the open schematic for
which you want to instantiate hierarchical I/O pins

Table 4-15. L - Command Line Commands


Command Description
L
label Adds a label to the selected object. Using the label command, you can add a
label and specify the name, expand, visibility, scope, and sense values for the
label.
PADS DX Designer
line Adds a line between two points or a series of line segments in the schematic
or symbol window.
Also see:
Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet - xDX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 413


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-15. L - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
linvis Makes the display of the specified labels invisible in the active schematic or
symbol window.
If you do not select a label before or during the execution of the command,
the Make Label Invisible dialog box appears to let you specify the label. You
can use wildcard characters to specify a group of labels.
PADS DX Designer
loff Turns off the display of the labels associated with nets, components, and pins
for the active schematic or symbol window.
logmemory Log memory.
lon Turns on the display of the labels associated with nets, components, and pins
for the active schematic or symbol window.
longstrings Searches the schematic sheet and reports labels, properties, text, or OATs that
are longer than 127 characters.
lsense Changes a label to signify a logical inversion by drawing an inverted bar over
the label in the active schematic or symbol window. If a selected label already
has the overbar, this command removes the overbar from the label.
PADS DX Designer
lvis Makes the display of the specified labels visible in the active schematic or
symbol window.
If you do not select a label before or during the execution of the command,
the Make Label Visible dialog box appears to let you specify the label. You
can use wildcard characters to specify a group of labels.
PADS DX Designer

Table 4-16. M - Command Line Command


Command Description
M
move Attaches selected objects to the cursor for movement. Also allows use of the
arrow keys for fine placement.
To complete the move after executing the command, click the left mouse
button.

Table 4-17. N - Command Line Commands


Command Description
N

414 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-17. N - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
name Changes the name of the selected attribute.
Example: name NEW_ATT_NAME
If you do not enter NEW_ATT_NAME, the Change Attribute Name dialog box
appears for you to enter the new attribute name in.
PADS DX Designer
narray Automatically completes adding nets to a bus when any one net has been
placed and labeled. Execute this command after you have selected the net.
Syntax:
narray direction
Where direction is one of the following:
righttoleft
lefttoright
toptobottom
bottomtotop
naspace Auto net array space.
net Adds a net that connects two component pins and/or nets in the schematic
window. You also use this command to connect or continue a dangling net.
Also see:
Connecting Components with Nets - xDX Designer

Ripping Nets From a Bus - xDX Designer

noff Turns off the display of the internal names associated with objects in all
schematic or symbol windows. If a net or component is labeled, the internal
name is not displayed.
non Turns on the display of the internal names associated with objects in all
schematic or symbol windows. If a net or component is labeled, the internal
name is not displayed.
nsym New local symbol.
Also see: Creating and Editing Local Symbols

Table 4-18. O - Command Line Commands


Command Description
O

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 415


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-18. O - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
o1 through o9 Sets the default origin point for all new text, labels, and properties that you
create. The origin number represents the positions shown:
1-------------------4--------------------7

| | |

| | |

2-------------------5--------------------8

| | |

| | |

3-------------------6--------------------9
odetail Lists a detailed description of each object or selected objects for the active
schematic or symbol. If you do not select any objects, the list contains all the
objects in the active window.
PADS DX Designer
offsheet Add offsheet connector.
onsheet Add onsheet connector.
oroute Changes the routing mode to full orthogonal routing. Executing this
command changes the routing mode specified in the DxDesigner.xml file to
orthogonal routing.
out Zooms out on the design.

Table 4-19. P - Command Line Commands


Command Description
P
pdbslot Applicable in integrated project types only:
A dialog appears to allow you to changes or update the slot of the selected
component or group of components to a specified slot of the package in the
Parts Database. The Slot pulldown list provides a list of available slots with
pin numbers.

placedetail Report on placeholders.


poff Turns off the display of pin numbers.
pon Turns on the display of pin numbers.

416 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-19. P - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
pop Returns back through the stack of previously issued psch, psym and psheet
commands. The pop command will take a numerical argument specifying the
number of levels to pop. If no argument is specified, the value of 1 is
assumed. There is no need to select an object prior to issuing a pop command,
as it will use the stack to determine the results.
Special Condition:
When you open a sheet from a sheet node in the Navigator Tree, executing a
Pop command will always return you to sheet 1. This is true for all sheets,
including sheet 1.
Why:
Navigator opens the design root, and then pushes to the desired sheet
Workaround:
Open the schematic from the File > Open menu, or from a design root in the
Navigator Tree.
Also see:
Navigating With the Toolbar and Right-Click Menus - xDX Designer

power Add power connection.


psch Pushes through the hierarchy into a schematic block.
You must select the component before selecting the command to push down
to the corresponding schematic.
Also see:
Navigating With the Toolbar and Right-Click Menus - xDX Designer

psheet Pushes through sheets of a schematic or symbol set in sequential order, or


pushes to a specified sheet.
To push through the sheets in sequential order, enter the psheet command
in the command line field and execute the command.
To push to a specified sheet, enter the psheet command with the sheet number
in the command line field and execute the command. For example, psheet 12.
Also see:
Navigating With the Toolbar and Right-Click Menus - xDX Designer

psym Pushes through the hierarchy into a symbol block.


You must select the component before selecting the command to push down
to the corresponding symbol.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 417


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-20. Q - Command Line Commands


Command Description
Q
quit Quit PADS DX Designer.

Table 4-21. R - Command Line Commands


Command Description
R
read Refreshes memory with the active block. This affects only the open schematic
or symbol.
reflect Reflects the selected object(s) as a mirror image across a designated
horizontal or vertical line. You use the mouse to designate the line you want
the object reflected around.
The reflection line is snapped to the nearest orthogonal line and objects are
reflected about the line 180 degrees.
Also see:
Changing Object Orientation - xDX Designer

refresh Updates the data in the active window. Use this command if the visual display
of the data has been disrupted.
RenameNet Rename net.
roff Turns off the display of reference designators.
ron Turns on the display of reference designators.
rotate Rotates the selected object(s) to the left in 90-degree increments.
Also see:
Changing Object Orientation - xDX Designer

run Runs a script from the command line. Enter the run command followed by the
name of the script.

Table 4-22. S - Command Line Commands


Command Description
S

418 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-22. S - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
scale Scales the size of a selected object or group of objects up or down by the scale
factor you specify in the Scale dialog box.
Toolbar:
Menu: Format > Scale
Also see:
Resizing Sheet Objects - xDX Designer

schematic Opens a new or existing schematic window for the creation and editing of
schematics and symbols.
PADS DX Designer
scomp Selects the component by a specified symbol name.
PADS DX Designer
sdistance Selects the distance, in screen pixels, surrounding an object that the cursor
must be placed within to select an object in a schematic or symbol window.
setenv Set environment variable.
sicdb Select ICDB index.
seticdbstore Set ICDB store retries.
retries
size Changes text, properties, or labels to a specified size in the schematic or
symbol window.
PADS DX Designer
slabel Selects the specified labels in a schematic or symbol window.
PADS DX Designer
slot Applicable in Netlist project type only:
Changes or updates the slot of the selected component or group of
components to a specified slot of the package.

sname Selects objects (such as components, nets, pins, and buses) in a schematic or
symbol window by specifying either the Internal name(s) or label(s).
PADS DX Designer

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 419


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-22. S - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
snap Snaps objects in the open schematic to the grid you have enabled and defined
in the Setup > Settings (dialog) > Grid (section) (see Settings Dialog Box -
Strokes, Pan and Zoom on page 322.)
The Snap command takes one parameter, which you specify as all or
selected, to indicate the scope of the command. For this command to be
active, grid must be selected, and a grid spacing must be defined.
Example:
snap selected

snaps selected objects to the grid you have defined.


soff Turns off the Snap to Pin option.
son Turns on the Snap to Pin option.
sroute Changes the routing mode to straight routing.
stext Selects the specified text string in a schematic or symbol window.
You can use wildcard characters when specifying the text string.
PADS DX Designer
stretch Stretches the selected object in any direction. Stretchable objects are: Lines,
Boxes, Circles, Arcs, and Pins.
Also see:
Resizing Schematic Objects - xDX Designer

string Changes the name of selected string. This command will change the name of
any selected label, attribute, name, or text string.
PADS DX Designer
stub Add net stubs and optional labels to selected components.
Syntax:
stub Parameter

Where:
Parameter = No - if you do not want to label the stubs.
Parameter = Label - if you want to add labels to the stubs. These labels
take the names of the associated symbol pins.
svalue Selects the objects associated with the specified attribute value(s), as well as
the associated objects (such as, components, nets, pins, or buses) in a
schematic or symbol window.
PADS DX Designer

420 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-22. S - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
system Open a system window.

Table 4-23. T - Command Line Commands


Command Description
T
text Adds text in the active schematic or symbol window.
Annotations can be inserted anywhere in a symbol or schematic drawing.
Text within a schematic or symbol drawing has no association with the
graphical or connectivity data.
Also see:
Creating and Editing Graphical Objects on a Sheet - xDX Designer

toff Turns off the visibility of text in a schematic. The default for this setting is on.
ton Turns on the visibility of text in a schematic. The default for this setting is on.

Table 4-24. U - Command Line Commands


Command Description
U
ubat Update the default values for properties assigned to the border for the open
schematic.
undo Reverses changes you make in a symbol or schematic drawing, such as
stretching or moving an object.
uoff Turns off the creation of unique labels from internal names when
components, nets, buses, or pins are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the
buffer.
uon Turns on the creation of unique labels from internal names when components,
nets, buses, or pins are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.

Table 4-25. V - Command Line Commands


Command Description
V
value Changes the value portion of the selected attribute(s) to the specified value.
PADS DX Designer
voff Turns off the display of simulation values.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 421


Design Entry Tool Commands
Design Entry Tool Command Line Commands

Table 4-25. V - Command Line Commands (cont.)


Command Description
von Turns on the display of simulation values.

Table 4-26. W - Command Line Commands


Command Description
W
wclose Closes the active symbol or schematic drawing. If you made changes to the
document since it was last saved, you are asked if you want to save the
changes. If you close a document without saving, you lose all unsaved
changes.
If you have several windows open on the same document, this command
closes all windows viewing the same document. To close one of several
windows viewing the same document, use the Close command on the
Document Control menu.
wtext Open text file.

Table 4-27. Z - Command Line Commands


Command Description
Z
zoom Zoomed in on a specified area of the window.
Also see:Panning and Zooming Default-Style
zselect Zooms in on the selected area of the window.
Tip: If you want to zoom in more tightly than the default, you set the
VL_FULL_ZOOM environment variable, using the syntax
VL_FuLL_ZOOM=1. If you do not set this environment variable, you will
zoom in at a medium distance from the selected area.
Also see:Panning and Zooming Default-Style
zsize Changes the schematic or symbol sheet size of the active window to a custom
size. When you execute this command, you specify the custom sheet size.
(Executing this command does not change the project settings for sheet size.
Rule: Execute the zsize command in one of the following ways:
Press the Tab key immediately after entering each of the Width and Height
values and then press Enter.
When you have entered the values, do not press Enter. Instead, click OK.
Use the following syntax in the Command Line box:
zsize width height

422 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 5
Property Characteristics

You use properties to create symbol definitions for interpretation when wirelisting, verification,
or passing to layout.
You can add properties to:
Symbols (unattached) Component pins
Symbol pins Net Segments
Schematics (unattached) Bus segments
Components

Note
You cannot place custom properties on boxes, lines, arcs or circles.

The following topics describe the characteristics of properties:

For information on specific properties, refer to the Properties Glossary.

Visibility Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423


Property Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Property Name and Value Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Netlist Interpretation of Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
User-Defined Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Multiple and Duplicate Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Multiple Property Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Property Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Visibility Options
Visibility options for properties are controlled by check boxes in the Properties window.
You can make properties visible or invisible at the symbol and/or schematic level. If you are in
a symbol window and properties are visible, they are also visible on the schematic window. If
you specify properties visible on the symbol, you cannot make them invisible on the schematic.

Having the properties set as visible while you are placing them on the symbol is helpful.
However, as a general rule you should change the display of the property to invisible after you
have placed them on the schematic so they do not clutter the schematic drawing.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 423


Property Characteristics
Property Format

Note
Making a property invisible does not delete the property. It only helps to reduce the clutter
from the schematic display.

If you want the Ref Designator (REFDES) property to be invisible on the schematic, deselect
the Ref Designator check box (one for the property name and one for the property value) in the
Properties window.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics

Property Format
The format for properties is: NAME = VALUE You must specify the property name exactly as
you want the netlist to interpret it. For example, to associate reference designator information
with a symbol, add an property, such as REFDES=U?. REFDES is the property name and U? is
the property value.
There are several ways to define an property value:

Explicit value - the value is constant (exactly as you enter it)


Multiple value - the value represents multiple properties
Variable value - the value changes
Expression value - the value is dependent on characteristics of the design
Related Topics
Property Characteristics

Property Name and Value Restrictions


Do not create property names beginning with $ or *, since the design entry tool reserves names
beginning with $, and since * is the wildcard character. Also avoid using % and ? in property
values.
Do not use mathematical characters such as /, *, -, or +, in property values (except when
specifying variable definitions for parameterized properties). You must enter the property
NAME in upper case. Under certain conditions, you can enter the property value in upper, lower
or mixed case. However, you must remember that third party tools which use the
PADS DX Designer netlists do not all support mixed case property values. These tools may
require upper case values. Check with your tool provider to confirm whether you can use mixed
case with the tool.

424 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Property Characteristics
Netlist Interpretation of Properties

Related Topics
Property Characteristics

Netlist Interpretation of Properties


The design entry tool has a flexible scheme that allows an unrestricted number of properties.
Netlisting interprets almost all properties, with each layout tool looking for a particular set of
properties.
Either flattened or hierarchical, netlists interpret explicit and multiple property values. Only
flattened netlists interpret variable and expression property values.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics

User-Defined Properties
You can create any property to define unique information about your design such as optional
labels or part numbers used in the design.
The PADS DX Designer tool cannot interpret user-defined properties. The netlist process lists
the properties in the netlist file if you add them before the netlist is executed. You can interpret
user-defined properties for application specific functions using scripting or the
PADS DX Designer utilities.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics

Multiple and Duplicate Properties


Most objects can have multiple properties (properties with different names) associated with
them. Duplicate properties on a single object, properties with the same name, usually have
different values.
The design entry tool allows the following objects to have multiple properties (properties with
the different names) on a single object. Duplicate properties (properties with identical names)
on a single object usually have different values.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 425


Property Characteristics
Multiple Property Values

The design entry tool allows duplicate properties as outlined below:


Table 5-1. Legal Duplicate Properties
Object Duplicate
Symbol Unrestricted duplicates (if you name symbols, every named symbol must
have a unique name)
Schematics No duplicates
Components No duplicates (except SIGNAL, PROBE, EQUATE, and PINSWAP
properties)*
Pins No duplicates
Net/bus segments No duplicates (except PROBE property)*

* Duplicate properties must be enabled in the configuration file if you wish to run the PCB
Integration program. Refer to the PCB Integration Help for more information.

Most symbol properties are not accessible from the component level. You can add identical
properties to the component and change the property value on the component to override the
property value on the symbol. See Multiple Property Values on page 426.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics

Multiple Property Values


The format for multiple property values is: name = value,value,value
Separate multiple property values with commas or colons. For example, #=[a,b,c,d] or
TPHL=10:17:25.

Related Topics
Property Characteristics
Multiple and Duplicate Properties

Property Ranges
A property value can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning,
ending, and incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands an property value with a
range to create a series of properties.
The format for property value ranges is:

NAME[F:L:I]

426 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Property Characteristics
Property Ranges

where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the numbers in the
range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.

Separate the numbers with colons. You must enclose the range in brackets, and you can only
express the range in numeric characteristics.

Given the values shown in the following table:


Table 5-2. Property Ranges Example
This Range... Becomes Properties...
#=[1:4] #=1, #=2, #=3, and #=4
#=[1:20:2] #=1, #=3, #=5, #=7, #=9, #=11, #=13, #=15, #=17, #=19
#=A[1:3],#=B[1:3],#=C[1:3] #=A1, #=A2, #=A3, #=B1, #=B2, #=B3,
#=C1, #=C2, and #=C3

In PCB design, multiple values of the property #=1,4,8,12, when attached to a symbol pin and
used in conjunction with a PARTS=4 property, indicate that this pin represents:

pin 1 of the first part of the package


pin 4 of the second part of the package
pin 8 of the third part of the package
pin 12 of the fourth part of the package
Related Topics
Property Characteristics

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 427


Property Characteristics
Property Ranges

428 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 6
Names

A name is a string of characters you apply to sheet objects.


You can apply the same name to more than one net. Using the same name for more than one net
establishes connectivity between those nets.

You can apply the same name to more than one bus.

You must name all pins on a block and you must name the ports of the underlying schematic to
correspond to the pins. The design entry tool uses these name matches to maintain connectivity
between a symbol and the underlying schematic.

You do not have to name symbols, but if you do, the name for each symbol must be unique to
avoid packager errors. You should not name module symbols, although naming composite
symbols (blocks) can make the design easier to read. You will receive packager errors if more
than one symbol has the same name. For more information on local symbols and their types,
refer to Creating and Editing Local Symbols - xDX Designer.

The following topics describe name characteristics:

Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429


Unnamed Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Name Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Compound Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Unique Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Pin Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Bus Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Illegal Characters in Name Identifiers


This topic identifies illegal characters in block names and net names.

Block Names
For blocks appearing in the Navigator, it is recommended that you only use name strings that
include numerals (0-9), lowercase letters (a-z), uppercase letters (A-Z) and underscore (_).

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 429


Names
Unnamed Objects

Illegal characters in a block name include the following:

* , @ # $ % ^ & < > ' ( ) = ? . <space>

Net Names
Name strings used for net names can consist of any characters (including spaces).

Illegal characters in a net name include the following:

@ $ ' \ " ; \\ < > { } *

Related Topics
Names

Unnamed Objects
Unnamed Objects are nets, buses, or symbols to which you have not applied a name. Whether or
not you name them, the design entry tool automatically assigns a unique internal ID to each
object. All internal IDs begin with $ (for example, $1N12). If you name an object and set the
name to visible, the design entry tool displays the name.
If you copy a net, bus, or symbol, the name you applied to the original is also assigned to the
copy, but the design entry tool automatically changes the internal ID to keep it unique.

Pin names are defined by the Central Library symbol and you cannot change them in the design
entry tool.

Related Topics
Names

Name Ranges
Names can express a numerical range for a bus or a pin by specifying beginning, ending, and
incremental integer values. The design entry tool expands names with a range to create a series
of names.
The format for name ranges is:

NAME[F:L:I]
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.

430 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Names
Compound Names

The following shows legal range formats:

out.[1:5] - creates out.1, out.2, out.3, out.4, and out.5


a[10:3:2] - creates a10, a8, a6, a4
a[1:2]b[2:1] - creates a1b2, a1b1, a2b2, a2b1
A radix qualifier may follow the range specification to indicate a binary, hexadecimal, or octal
specification. Separate the qualifier from the range specification with a slash.

The name identifier A[8:C/H] is equivalent to A8, A9, AA, AB, and AC.
You can specify a bus range only with numeric characters. For example, data[b7:b0] is not a
valid format. If the bus range you want to label is decimal (for example, 7:0), use the format
data[7:0].

Related Topics
Names

Compound Names
Use compound names or bundles to label busses or pins that are not expressible as a single
range. You form a compound name with several name identifiers (with or without ranges). You
separate the names using commas. The system expands compound name identifiers separately
from left to right.
To enter a compound name, use the following format:

NAME[F:L:I], NAME,NAME[F:L],...
where F is the first number, L is the last number, and I is the interval between the
numbers in the range. If no interval is specified, the interval is 1.
o A[0:3],B,D[1:4] - is equivalent to A0,A1,A2,A3,B,D1,D2,D3,D4
o A[2:1],B[3:0],C - is equivalent to A2,A1,B3,B2,B1,B0,C
Related Topics
Names

Unique Names
The design entry tool creates different types of names when components, nets, busses, or pins
are copied, arrayed, or pasted from the buffer.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 431


Names
Pin Names

Related Topics
Names

Pin Names
You specify pin names and ranges (width) with name identifiers. Pin names establish and
maintain connectivity between components. The pin range of a multi-bit pin must be identical to
the range of a connecting bus.
The exception to this is when the component has the $ARRAY property. All pins on a symbol
must have a label for identification during any netlisting process. For symbols that do not
normally have labels, such as resistors and capacitors, make the labels invisible.

Related Topics
Names

Bus Names
Bus names specify the nets contained in the bus. The names of the nets connected to the bus can
either correspond to the bus name or the nets can be aliased to different names.
Note
The Setup > Settings, Project (category), Net Name Delimiter (subcategory) allows you to
control how net names are resolved into elements of buses. See Settings Dialog Box - Net
Name Delimiter on page 308.

Related Topics
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xDX Designer
Naming Connectivity Objects Such as Nets and Buses - xSD Systems Designer
Bus Contents File Format
Names

432 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 7
Key Bindings and Strokes

The following topics describe the predefined keybindings that are available in the
PADS DX Designer design entry tool:
Refer to the Key Binding definition description for your design capture tool session setup to see
how the strokes are mapped to specific commands. Also see the following:

Executing Commands Using Key Bindings and Strokes - xDX Designer



Key Bindings - Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Key Bindings - PADS Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Key Bindings - Default


Default PADS DX Designer design entry tool default key bindings are stored in various .vbs
files.
Table 7-1 on page 433 shows the default PADS DX Designerdesign entry tool key bindings that
are loaded from \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\vdbindings.vbs. These
bindings are in effect if you set the following: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category),
Strokes, Pan and Zoom (category), Default Pan and Zoom.

(Equivalent DxDesigner.xml entry: <key name="KEYBINDINGS" value="0"/>)

Table 7-2 on page 436 shows the default PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer key bindings stored
in the vdbindings.vbs file.

Table 7-3 on page 436 shows the default PADS DX Designerdesign entry tool Stroke
definitions stored in the vdbindings.vbs file.
Table 7-1. List of vdbindings.vbs Key Bindings
Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Working with files
New Project CTRL+N Save File CTRL+S
Open Block CTRL+O Close File CTRL+F4
Print File CTRL+P Close design entry tool ALT+F4

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 433


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - Default

Table 7-1. List of vdbindings.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Opening dialogs and menus
Add menu ALT+A Setup menu ALT+S
Edit menu ALT+E Settings dialog CTRL+ALT+G
File menu ALT+F Tools menu ALT+T
Find and Replace Text CTRL+H View menu ALT+V
dialog
Format menu ALT+O Window menu ALT+W
Help menu ALT+H
Opening windows
Open DataBook window CTRL+ALT+D Open Properties ALT+Enter
window
Open Xpedition Cell CTRL+ALT+K Open Command Line Space
Preview window window
Adding objects to schematics
Add arc A Add line L
Add block f Add off page pin CTRL+Alt+Space
Add box B Add on page pin CTRL+Alt+Shift+
Space
Add bus b Add net n
Add circle C Add power pin Shift+Space
Add ground pin CTRL+Space Add text T
Add Hierarchical I/O Pin CTRL+Shift+
Space
Editing
Copy CTRL+C or Move now CTRL+E or m
CTRL+Insert
Cut CTRL+X or Paste CTRL+V or
Shift+Delete Shift+Insert
Delete Delete or d or Reattach net CTRL+R
Backspace
Flip Vertical CTRL+Shift+F Redo CTRL+A or
CTRL+Backspace or r

434 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - Default

Table 7-1. List of vdbindings.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Flip Horizontal (Mirror) CTRL+F Rotate 90 degrees CTRL+Shift+R
Undo Alt+Backspace or
CTRL+Z or u
Selecting objects
Select mode s or ESC
Navigating in the design - Schematic window
Move to next schematic Page Down or Push into schematic h
sheet in sequence Page Up
Cycle between open CTRL+Tab Push into symbol with y
Schematic window tabs Symbol Editor
Cycles a specialized pin CTRL+Y
to the next component of
the same type of a user-
configured list
Viewing the design
Pan (to cursor) F6 or Insert Zoom area CTRL+W or F9 or z
Zoom in F7 Zoom full Home or F4
Refresh F5 or CTRL+D Zoom out F8
or END
Restore Zoom Shift+F10 Zoom on selected Z
Save Zoom Shift+F9
Getting help (For current help, use Help > Documentation in InfoHub instead of the
following)
Launch DxDesigner help CTRL+F1 Next Help Shift+F5
Help on features F1 Next error message Shift+F4
Help on, context Shift+F1
Miscellaneous
Left mouse button CTRL+Shift+F2 Scroll around Arrow buttons (up,
or CTRL+F2 or schematic down, left, right)
F2
Middle mouse button F3

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 435


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - Default

Table 7-2. List of PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer vdbindings.vbs Key Bindings

Action Key Binding Action Key Binding


Adding objects
Add net CTRL+I Add block CTRL+G
Editing
Delete Delete Expand pins CTRL+Page Down
Edit start Insert or F2 Redo CTRL+Y
Collapse pins CTRL+Page Up Undo CTRL+Z
Selecting objects
Select all CTRL+A

Table 7-3. List of vdbindings.vbs Stroke Definitions


Command Graphic Numerical Sequence
Add Line 852

Delete Selected 74123698


or
741236987

Help (Use Help > 123658


Documentation in InfoHub for or
up-to-date information.)
12368

Last Command Recall 12369

Flip Horizontal (Mirror) 9632147

Refresh 74123

Rotate 90 3698741

Undo 7412369

436 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-3. List of vdbindings.vbs Stroke Definitions (cont.)


Command Graphic Numerical Sequence
View Full 951

Zoom In 357

Zoom Out 753

Related Topics
Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style
Key Bindings - PADS Style

Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style


The xPCB Layout key bindings described in this section are stored and loaded from
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\exped_wvo.vbs on Windows and /
<mgc_home>/<release>/SDD_HOME/standard/exped_pv.vbs on Linux. These bindings are in
effect if you select the following: Setup > Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan
and Zoom (subcategory), Xpedition Pan and Zoom.
The bindings are described in the following tables:

exped_wvo.vbs (Windows) file:

Table 7-4 on page 437 - Key bindings


Table 7-5 on page 440 - PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer key bindings
Table 7-6 on page 440 - Stroke definitions
exped_pv.vbs (Linux) file:

Table 7-7 on page 441 - Key bindings


Table 7-8 on page 443 - PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer key bindings
Table 7-9 on page 443 - Stroke definitions
Table 7-4. List of Windows exped_wvo.vbs Key Bindings
Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Working with files

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 437


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-4. List of Windows exped_wvo.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
New Project CTRL+N Save File CTRL+S
Open Block CTRL+O Close File CTRL+F4
Print File CTRL+P Close design entry tool ALT+F4
Opening dialogs and menus
Add menu ALT+A Setup menu ALT+S
Edit menu ALT+E Settings dialog CTRL+ALT+G
File menu ALT+F Tools menu ALT+T
Find and Replace Text CTRL+F or View menu ALT+V
dialog CTRL+H
Format menu ALT+O Window menu ALT+W
Help menu ALT+H
Opening windows
Open DataBook window CTRL+ALT+D Open Properties ALT+Enter
window
Open Xpedition Cell CTRL+ALT+K Open Command Line Space
Preview window window
Adding objects to schematics
Add arc A Add line L
Add block f Add off page pin CTRL+Alt+Space
Add box B Add on page pin CTRL+Alt+Shift+
Space
Add bus b Add net n
Add circle C Add power pin Shift+Space
Add ground pin CTRL+Space Add text T
Add Hierarchical I/O Pin CTRL+Shift+
Space
Editing
Copy CTRL+C or Move now CTRL+E or m
CTRL+Insert
Cut CTRL+X or Paste CTRL+V or
Shift+Delete Shift+Insert

438 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-4. List of Windows exped_wvo.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Delete CTRL+Delete Reattach net CTRL+R
or Delete or d
or Backspace
Edit String S Redo F7 or
CTRL+Backspace or r
Flip Vertical F5 Rotate 90 degrees CTRL+Shift+R or F3
Flip Horizontal (Mirror) F4 Undo Alt+Backspace or
CTRL+Z or F6 or u
Selecting objects
Select mode s or ESC Select all CTRL+A
Navigating in the design - Schematic window
Move to next schematic Page Down or Push into schematic h
sheet in sequence Page Up
Cycle between open CTRL+Tab Push into symbol with y
Schematic window tabs Symbol Editor
Cycles a specialized pin CTRL+Y
to the next component of
the same type of a user-
configured list
Viewing the design
Pan (to cursor) Insert Zoom full Home
Restore Zoom Shift+F10 Zoom out F8
Save Zoom Shift+F9 Zoom on selected Z
Zoom area CTRL+W or F9
or z
Getting help (For current information, use Help > Documentation in InfoHub instead of the
following)
Launch DxDesigner help CTRL+F1 Next Help Shift+F5
Help on features F1 Next error message Shift+F4
Help on, context Shift+F1
Miscellaneous
Left mouse button CTRL+Shift+F2 Scroll around Arrow buttons (up,
or CTRL+F2 or schematic down, left, right)
F2

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 439


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-5. List of Windows PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer exped_wvo.vbs Key
Definitions
Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Adding objects
Add net CTRL+I Add block CTRL+G
Editing
Delete Delete Expand pins CTRL+Page Down
Edit start Insert or F2 Redo CTRL+Y
Collapse pins CTRL+Page Up Undo CTRL+Z
Selecting objects
Select all CTRL+A

Table 7-6. List of Windows exped_wvo.vbs Stroke Definitions


Command Graphic Numerical
Sequence
Add Line 852

Delete Selected 74123698


or
741236987

Help (For up-to-date information, use 123658


Help > Documentation in InfoHub or
instead)
12368

Last Command Recall 12369

Flip Horizontal (Mirror) 9632147

Refresh 74123

Rotate 90 3698741

440 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-6. List of Windows exped_wvo.vbs Stroke Definitions (cont.)


Command Graphic Numerical
Sequence
Undo 7412369

View Full 951

Zoom In 357

Zoom Out 753

Table 7-7. List of Linux exped_pv.vbs Key Bindings


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Working with files
New Project CTRL+N Save File CTRL+S or
Open Block CTRL+O Close File CTRL+F4
Print File CTRL+P Close design entry tool ALT+F4
Opening dialogs and menus
Add menu ALT+A Setup menu ALT+S
Edit menu ALT+E Settings dialog CTRL+ALT+G
Find and Replace Text CTRL+F or Tools menu ALT+T
dialog CTRL+H
File menu ALT+F View menu ALT+V
Format menu ALT+O Window menu ALT+W
Help menu ALT+H
Opening windows
Open DataBook window CTRL+ALT+D Open Properties ALT+Enter
window
Open Xpedition Cell CTRL+ALT+K Open Command Line Space
Preview window window
Adding objects to schematics
Add arc A Add label l
Add block F Add line L

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 441


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-7. List of Linux exped_pv.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Add box B Add off page pin CTRL+Alt+Space
Add bus b Add on page pin CTRL+Alt+Shift+
Space
Add circle C Add net n
Add ground pin CTRL+Space Add power pin Shift+Space
Add Hierarchical I/O Pin CTRL+Shift+ Add text t
Space
Editing
Copy CTRL+C or Move now CTRL+E or m
CTRL+Insert or
c (copy now)
Cut CTRL+X or Paste CTRL+V or
Shift+Delete Shift+Insert
Delete Delete or d or Reattach net CTRL+R
Backspace
Flip Vertical CTRL+Shift+F Redo CTRL+Backspace or
or F5 F7 or r
Flip Horizontal (Mirror) F4 Rotate 90 degrees CTRL+Shift+R or F3
Undo Alt+Backspace or
CTRL+Z or u or F6
Selecting objects
Select mode ESC Select All CTRL+A
Navigating in the design - Schematic window
Move to next schematic Page Down or Push into schematic h
sheet in sequence Page Up
Cycle between open CTRL+Tab Push into symbol with y
Schematic window tabs Symbol Editor
Cycles a specialized pin CTRL+Y
to the next component of
the same type of a user-
configured list
Viewing the design
Pan (to cursor) Insert Zoom area CTRL+W
Zoom in (define area) z or F9 Zoom full Home or F10

442 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-7. List of Linux exped_pv.vbs Key Bindings (cont.)


Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Refresh F5 or CTRL+D Zoom out F8
or END
Restore Zoom Shift+F10 Zoom on selected Z
Save Zoom Shift+F9
Getting help (For current help, use Help > Documentation in InfoHub instead of the
following)
Launch DxDesigner help CTRL+F1 Next Help Shift+F5
Help on features F1 Next error message Shift+F4
Help on, context Shift+F1
Miscellaneous
Left mouse button CTRL+Shift+F2 Scroll around Arrow buttons (up,
or CTRL+F2 or schematic down, left, right)
F2
Middle mouse button CTRL+Shift+F3
or CTRL+F3

Table 7-8. List of Linux PADS DX Designer ICT Viewer exped_pv.vbs Key
Bindings
Action Key Binding Action Key Binding
Adding objects
Add net CTRL+I Add block CTRL+G
Editing
Delete Delete Expand pins CTRL+Page Down
Edit start Insert or F2 Redo CTRL+Y
Collapse pins CTRL+Page Up Undo CTRL+Z
Selecting objects
Select all CTRL+A

Table 7-9. List of Linux exped_pv.vbs Stroke Definitions


Command Graphic Numerical Sequence
Add Line 852

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 443


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

Table 7-9. List of Linux exped_pv.vbs Stroke Definitions (cont.)


Command Graphic Numerical Sequence
Delete Selected 74123698
or
741236987

Help (Use Help > 123658


Documentation in InfoHub or
instead)
12368

Last Command Recall 12369

Flip Horizontal (Mirror) 9632147

Refresh 74123

Rotate 90 3698741

Undo 7412369

View Full 951

Zoom In 357

Zoom Out 753

Related Topics
Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - Default
Key Bindings - PADS Style

444 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - PADS Style

Key Bindings - PADS Style


The following table lists the PADS keybindings you enable with the Key Bindings property of
the PADS Design Configuration. These bindings are in effect if you select the following: Setup
> Settings, Schematic Editor (category), Strokes, Pan and Zoom (subcategory), PADS Pan and
Zoom.

Table 7-10. PADS Keybindings in PADS DX Designer


Key Binding Description
Ctrl+N File > New
Ctrl+S File > Save
Ctrl+Z Edit > Undo
Ctrl+Y Edit > Redo
Ctrl+X Edit > Cut
Ctrl+C Edit > Copy
Ctrl+V Edit > Paste
Ctrl+E Edit > Move
Del Edit > Delete
Ctrl+W View > Zoom
Home View > Board
Shift+Z View > Selected
Ctrl+D View > Redraw
End View > Refresh
F4 View > Full
F5 View > Refresh
F6 Pan (centers screen on
cursor)
F9 Zoom selected area

Related Topics
Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - Default
Key Bindings - xPCB Layout Style

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 445


Key Bindings and Strokes
Key Bindings - PADS Style

446 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Chapter 8
Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference

The topics in this section provide reference information for some of the design entry tool
diagnostic tools.
Diagnostics Tool Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
DRC Rule Notes and Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Diagnostics Tool Tests


You can run Tools > PADS DX Designer Diagnostics to check for basic errors in your design.
Table 8-1 on page 447 shows the tests that the Diagnostics Tool executes.
Table 8-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests
Checks for Description
Symbol types Verifies that symbols are either of type pin or type port, but not
both.
Message:
Invalid symbol definition type <name>.
Invalid nets Verifies that each sheet-level net is part of a logical net.
(Logical nets constitute the connectivity and the design entry
tool displays them in Navigator).
Messages:
Invalid unconnected net found
Invalid net found
Invalid buses Verifies that all buses in the project include graphical data.
Message:
Invalid bus found

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 447


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 8-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)


Checks for Description
Sheet order data Verifies that custom sheet order values, if specified, are not
corrupt. Corrupt sheet order values could result in incorrect
xDX PDF output.
Message:
Inconsistent sheet ordering data for <name> schematic.
Sheet internal identifiers Validates internal properties that store sheet IDs.
Message:
Sheet <name> has a missing identifier which is needed to
generate object IDs.
Component graphical data Verifies that all components have graphical data. You can create
logical-only components that do not contain graphical data in
Constraint Manager or xPCB Layout, but these logical-only
components must not exist on the schematic.
Message:
Components <name> without graphical data found on
schematic <name> and need to be deleted.
Net connections Verifies that the project does not include nets connected to non-
existent pins.
Message:
Net <name> connected to a non-existent pin.
Rippers Verifies bus ripper data consistency.
For example, the signals listed on an internal property as being
connected with a bus may be inconsistent with actual signals
present in the bus.
Messages:
Ripper refers to non-existent bus, and should be deleted.
Ripper refers to a signal which is not a member of the bus, the
signal reference should be deleted from the ripper.
Reuse blocks Verifies that the reuse blocks instantiated in the design are
marked as read-only.
Message:
Missing read-only flag for block <name>.

448 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Diagnostics Tool Tests

Table 8-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)


Checks for Description
Empty blocks Checks if there are any empty blocks present. If a block (such as
a schematic or an ICT) present in the Integrated Common
Database (iCDB) does not have any data, you cannot open the
block from the Navigator. You can safely delete the empty
blocks, because they do not impact connectivity in any way and
do not contain any data.
Message:
Empty invalid block <name> found and needs to be deleted.
Top level name consistency Verifies that the name of the top level block stored in the project
file uses the same case as the name in the database.
Message:
Block names differ: <name1> in database, <name2> in project
file.
Duplicate internal IDs Verifies that xDX Designersymbols pins have unique IDs.
Message:
Symbol <name> has pins with duplicate IDs needed for
Backup/Rollback.
Bus signal connections Verifies that no shorts exist due to incorrect naming of rippers.
Message:
Invalid connection of <net_name1> to <net_name2> on
schematic <sch_name>.
Component names Verifies that no component name contains the invalid '$'
character. The fix removes '$' characters from names.
Message:
Invalid Component Name(s) <name1>, <name2>, on
schematic <sch_name>.
Pass-through pins Verifies connectivity of component pass-through pins:
Pins correctly connect to one logic net.
Connections to the master pin (with flag ForwardPCB) do
not repeat.
Message:
Incorrect connection of pass-through pin to net on
schematic

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 449


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Rule Notes and Examples

Table 8-1. Diagnostics Tool Tests (cont.)


Checks for Description
Connectivity Verifies that schematic sheet graphical data is synchronized
with logical data. The fix recompiles schematic graphical data
to synchronize with the logical data.
Message:
Connectivity not up to date with schematic sheet.

Related Topics
Checking Data Integrity with the Diagnostics Tools, and Correcting Reported Errors

DRC Rule Notes and Examples


The following table provides supplemental Design Rule Checker (DRC) information for the
design entry tool.

Table 8-2. DRC Rule Notes and Examples


Rule Group Rule ID Rule Notes/Examples
Connectivity drc-107 Unconnected pin(s)
You configure drc-107 with the provided options to report
unconnected pins. The options include:
Two pin components You set drc-107 to either Include two
pin components, Exclude two pin components, or Only check
two pin components.
Input, Output, Bi-directional, Tri-state If Enabled, any
unconnected component pin of one of these types generates a
report.
Others If Enabled, any unconnected component pin not of
type Input, Output, Bi-directional, or Tri-state generates a
report.
All inputs If Enabled, components found with all inputs
disconnected generate a report.
All outputs If Enabled, components found with all outputs
disconnected generate a report.
All pins If Enabled, components found with all pins
disconnected generate a report.
Also see:
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets
(Net Stubs) - xDX Designer

450 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Rule Notes and Examples

Table 8-2. DRC Rule Notes and Examples (cont.)


Rule Group Rule ID Rule Notes/Examples
Connectivity drc-108 Hanging/Dangling net
This check applies to nets with a connection on only one end (net
stubs).
Also see:
Preventing Errors for Unconnected Symbol Pins and Dangling Nets
(Net Stubs) - xDX Designer
Connectivity drc-121 Net Connectivity Consistency
Use a different symbol for each type of check. If you use the same
symbol for all checks, and then run all checks at one time, you may
see unexpected interactions and associated erroneous messages.
Connectivity drc-126 Bus/Bus Content versus wide pin width match
Examples:
Assume a Bus Content MYBUS=A,B,C[3:0],D, which contains a
total of seven signals.
A mismatch occurs if MYBUS connects to DD[2:0], which only
has three signals
A mismatch occurs if ADDR[4:0] (five signals) connects to
ADDRESS[5:0] (six signals)
Option: Bit to bit match
Examples:
If this option is enabled:
A mismatch occurs if ADD[4:0] <==> ADDRESS[5:1] Same
number of signals but shift in the bit numbers
A mismatch occurs if ADD[4:0] <==> ADDRESS[0:4] Same
number of signals but reverted range

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 451


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Rule Notes and Examples

Table 8-2. DRC Rule Notes and Examples (cont.)


Rule Group Rule ID Rule Notes/Examples
Electrical drc-201 Open collector pin not pulled up
drc-202 Open emitter pin not pulled down
Checks that an Open Collector or Emitter pin is connected to either
power or ground through a pull-up or pull-down component
(resistor defined in VerifyDefaults.ini).
By default, these checks look for a resistor symbol name that
includes the string res based on the following definition in the
Defines section in the VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Defines>
<Option Name="resistors" Value=*res*.*" />
</Defines>

In the resistors definition, the wildcard characters (*) preceding and


following "res", causes a match to occur for symbol names such as
res.1, vres.1, hres.1, resistor.1 or anything similar.
If your pull-up or pull-down resistor does not have the string res
in the symbol name, you need to add a similar definition line (as
shown in the previous example) in the Defines section of your local
Verify.ini file to include your symbol name.
drc-201 has an option to allow you to specify the Pull-up net(s),
such as: VCC VDD (one or more strings separated by a space).
drc-202 has an option to allow you to specify the Pull-down net(s),
such as: GND VSS VEE (one or more strings separated by a space).
Electrical drc-203 Component Polarity Check
This check applies to incorrectly named polarized nets connected to
a power supply.

Examples:

452 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

Table 8-2. DRC Rule Notes and Examples (cont.)


Rule Group Rule ID Rule Notes/Examples
Electrical drc-204 Voltage Drop Tolerance Check
The nets connected to the pins carrying the DRC Positive and DRC
Negative properties must:
Be defined in the power_nets/ground_nets section of the
VerifyDefault.ini file that is in the standard folder of the
installation tree.
Use the following naming convention to identify positive or
negative voltage as well as a voltage reference (ground) of 0
volt:
The nets must start with a + or sign followed by numbers with
eventually appropriate units.
An error occurs when the calculated power is less than the Min
Value or greater than the Max value.
Note that the DRC Positive and DRC Negative properties can be
renamed provided the VerifyDefault.ini file defines them
accordingly.
Also see: Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks on page 460
Electrical drc-205 Power Tolerance Check
This check applies to resistors and requires that the resistor symbol
is polarized using the DRC Positive and DRC Negative common
properties.
The DRC calculates the voltage drop the same way as drc-203 and
drc-204. The DRC calculates power as (Voltage drop) X (Voltage
drop) / resistor_value. It means that the DRC expects the Value
property to have a value. The DRC compares the calculated power
to the Min/Max values you specify (for example, Min Value; Max
Value = 200mW/500mW).
The DRC reports an error when the calculated power is less than the
Min Value or greater than the Max value.
Also see: Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks on page 460

DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular


Expression Syntax
The property and label syntax use the following regular expression syntax for pattern matching:
A regular expression is zero or more branches, separated by |. If any one of the branches
contains a pattern match, the regular expression is a match.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 453


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

A branch is zero or more pieces, concatenated. The DRC regular expression interpreter
searches for a match for the first piece of the branch, followed by a match for the second
piece, until the regular expression interpreter reaches the end of the branch.
A piece is an atom followed by one of the following quantifiers:
o * the interpreter looks for a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom.
o + the interpreter looks for a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom.
o ? the interpreter looks for a match of the atom, or the null string.
An atom is a regular expression in parentheses, which can contain any of the following:
o a range
o . (causes the interpreter to match any single character)
o ^ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the beginning of the input string)
o $ (causes the interpreter to match the null string at the end of the input string)
o a \ followed by a single character (causes the interpreter to match that character)
o or a single character with no other significance (causes the interpreter to match that
character)
A range is a sequence of characters enclosed in brackets ([]). The interpreter normally
matches any single character from the sequence. If the sequence begins with ^, the
interpreter matches any single character not from the rest of the sequence. A hyphen (-)
separating two characters in the sequence is shorthand for the full list of ASCII
characters between them (for example, [0-9] matches any decimal digit). To include a
literal ] in the sequence, make it the first character (following a possible ^). To include a
literal - in the sequence, make it the first or last character.
Related Topics
DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity Resolution

DRC Regular Expression Ambiguity


Resolution
Regular expression ambiguity resolutions include:
If a regular expression matches two different parts of the input string, the DRC regular
expression interpreter matches the part that begins earliest. If both matching parts of the
input string begin in the same place, but match different lengths, or match the same
length in different ways, the following occurs:
o The interpreter evaluates the possibilities in a list of branches, in order, from left-to-
right.

454 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

o The interpreter evaluates the possibilities for *, +, and ? by looking at the longest
first.
o The interpreter considers nested constructs from the outermost in, and the interpreter
considers concatenated constructs from the leftmost-first.
o The interpreter chooses the match in the earliest part of the input string, in the first
chosen part.
o If there is more than one choice, the interpreter makes the next choice in the same
manner by looking at the earliest possibility, subject to the decision on the first
choice.
For example, (ab|a)b*c could match abc in one of two ways. The first choice is between ab and
a. Since ab is earlier, and does lead to a successful overall match, the interpreter chooses ab.
Since the b is already spoken for, the b* must match its last possibility-the empty string-since it
must respect the earlier choice.

In the particular case where no |'s are present and there is only one *, +, or ?, the result is that the
interpreter chooses the longest possible match. So ab*' presented with an input string xabbbby,
matches abbbb. Note that if ab* is tried against xabyabbbz, it matches ab just after x, due to the
begins-earliest rule. (In effect, the decision on where to start the match is the first choice made
by the interpreter, hence subsequent choices must respect the decision even if this leads the
interpreter to less-preferred alternatives.)

Related Topics
DRC Property and Label Syntax Using Regular Expression Syntax

DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order


When you invoke the Design Rules Checker (DRC) Verify tool (Tools > Verify), the Verify
dialog box opens. The Verify tool uses one or more .ini configuration files found along the
search path to configure the Verify dialog box (both the Settings and Rules tab).
The Verify tool uses the settings from the first defaults file found along the search path, and
then overwrites duplicate settings with any differences found in subsequently found .ini files.
You can view which defaults file(s) the Verify tool uses on the Verify dialog box Settings pane.

These .ini files use XML formatting. If you or an administrator has the proper file permissions,
you can modify the \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini file to
reconfigure the initial Verify defaults for anyone invoking the tool from
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\...

You can modify writable %WDIR%\<path>\VerifyDefaults.ini defaults file to affect multiple


Verify tool users in multiple projects.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 455


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

The search order is a little different with an integrated project type that uses concurrent design
in comparison to a design that is not a concurrent design. In a concurrent design, it is not
desirable for each users local Verify settings to be saved to the same Verify.ini file located in
the concurrent design project directory. To prevent users from overwriting each others local
Verify settings, the tool saves each users Verify settings in a unique location in the first
writeable WDIR found along the search path, designated as the following:

\<1st_writeable_WDIR_path>\<release>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini

Verify Tool Search Order for a Netlist Project


The Verify tool checks the following netlist project type files in the order listed:

1. \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3> (The Verify tool loads
and merges .ini file content and compares, key by key, whether a new value is found.
Then the tool overwrites the existing one.)
3. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini (Netlist project)
4. \<project_dir>\NetlistVerify.ini (Netlist project - Locally saved settings)
Note: Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini or NetlistVerifyDefaults.ini
settings appear in your local NetlistVerify.ini file.

Verify Tool Search Order for an Integrated Project (No Current Design)
For an Integrated project type that does not use the Remote Server Configuration Manager
(RSCM), the Verify tool checks the following files in the order listed:

1. \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3> (The Verify tool uses the
first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this path)
3. \<project_dir>\VerifyDefaults.ini
4. \<project_dir>\Verify.ini - Locally saved settings

Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.

Verify Tool Search Order for an Integrated Project (Concurrent Design)


The following list presents the files in the order that the Verify tool checks for them in an
integrated project that uses a Remote Server Configuration Manager (RSCM) for concurrent
design.

456 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

1. \<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaults.ini (Integrated
project)
\<mgc_home>\<release>\SDD_HOME\standard\VerifyDefaultsSD.ini (xSD Systems
Designer project)
2. %WDIR%\<path1>;%WDIR%\<path2>;%WDIR%\<path3> (Integrated project
The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaults.ini file found in this path)
(xSD Systems Designer project The Verify tool uses the first VerifyDefaultsSD.ini
file found in this path)
3. \<first_writeableWDIR>\config\<unique_id>\Verify.ini (Integrated project - Locally
saved settings) \<first_writeableWDIR>\config\<unique_id>\

Note
Only settings that differ from the VerifyDefaults.ini settings appear in your local
Verify.ini file.

Example 1 - Concurrent Project


Figure 8-1 shows an example of a search order for a concurrent Integratedproject type.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 457


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

Example 8-1. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Concurrent Design)

Example 2 - Non-Concurrent Project


Figure 8-2 shows an example search order for a project type that does not use the Remote
Server Configuration Manager (RSCM).

458 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
DRC Verify Tool Defaults File Search Order

Example 8-2. DRC Verify Tool File Precedence Order (Non-Concurrent Project)

Related Topics
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format
Verify Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 459


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks

Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks


For electrical checks drc-203, drc-204, and drc-205, the Tools > Verify utility calculates
numerical values for the voltage drop or the power across components and identifies pin
polarity.
You must meet the following conditions in order to enable the voltage drop or the power
calculation:
o Net names must follow a convention: names of nets connected to a power supply
must start with a + (for positive voltage) and with a (for negative voltage)
followed by a numerical value (for example, using the string +5V*, the extracted
value used for calculation is +5).
o Names of nets connected to a ground must be listed as ground_nets in the <Defines>
section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file. The value used for calculation is 0.
o Verify that the <Defines> section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file defines power_nets
values for every power supply value you might use in the design, such as those
shown in the following example:
<Option Name="power_nets" Value="VCC +2.5V* -2.5V* +3.3V"/>

The Verify utility identifies pin polarity through drc_positive and drc_negative options
in the <Defines> section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file, which default to properties,
respectively, DRC Positive and DRC Negative.
You must check that the properties associated with drc_positive and drc_negative exist
as Pin properties in the Central Library .prp file. The Central Library .prp file is editable
with Tools > Properties Definition Editor. For more information on how to add the pin
properties, see Creating a User-Defined Property.
For drc-204 and drc-205, if you want to specify a Min Value;Max Value setting
exception to the value specified in the Verify dialog box setting (shown below) for
certain components:

a. You must first define a user symbol property in the Central Library .prp file called
DRC Voltage (drc-204) or DRC Power (drc-205). The property names are
determined in the following drc_voltage and drc_power options of the <Defines>
section of the VerifyDefaults.ini file:
<Option Name="drc_voltage" Value="DRC Voltage" />
<Option Name="drc_power" Value="DRC Power" />

460 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks

b. Place the DRC Voltage or DRC Power property on a component(s) with a value
(such as 50mV;5.0V) that specifies the exception to the initial drc-204 or drc-205
Min Value;Max Value setting.
Related Topics
Verify Dialog Box
Creating a User-Defined Property
VerifyDefaults.ini (DRC Defaults) File Format

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 461


Design Entry Tool Diagnostics Reference
Prerequisites for DRC Electrical Checks

462 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Appendix A
Supplemental Information

The following topics provide supplemental reference information:


Design Entry Tool COLORS Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
LineSimLink - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Pin (Port) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Property Editing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Verilog HDL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Verilog HDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Using Parameters in Verilog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Example VHDL Netlist Output File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
The QCV Netlist Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Search Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Design Entry Tool COLORS Element


Each object and layer defined in the design entry tool and stored in the DxDesigner.xml file
contains a COLOR definition line similar to the bolded line in the following example:
<NET>
<key name="VISIBLE" value="1" />
<key name="SELECTABLE" value="1" />
<key name="COLOR" value="0x00ff00" />
<key name="FILL_STYLE" value="1" />
<key name="LINE_STYLE" value="0" />
</NET>

Figure A-1 shows the default colors you can choose to assign to an object.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 463


Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element

Figure A-1. Default Colors Choices for Objects and Layers

Note
Each object type uses the color defined in Setup > Settings, Display (category), Objects
(subcategory), and the DxDesigner.xml file if the Color property (on that object) is set to
Automatic as shown in Figure A-2. Otherwise, each selected object color can be set individually
in the Properties window.

Figure A-2. Choosing Automatic Color Property Value in the Properties Window

The color choices are translated to a hex value in the DxDesigner.xml file. The hex value
defines the Red, Green, and Blue intensities to make up each unique color value. The following
example defines a value of black. The first two numbers following the 0x are the intensity
setting for Red (00, meaning no Red color), the next two are for green, the final two are for blue.

<!-- R-G-B- -->


<value>0x000000</value>

To help with converting colors from pre-Release 2007 PADS DX Designer designs, the
COLORS element definition section of the DxDesigner.xml file is divided into two sections,
one for SCREEN and one for PRINTER to correspond with pre-Release 2007 color settings as
shown in Figure A-3. When converting a pre-Release design to the current Release, this
DxDesigner.xml section helps to map the old settings to a new value set (or maintain the
original defaults).

464 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Design Entry Tool COLORS Element

In addition to the default colors, you can define your own custom colors by clicking the Other
button from the color palette to bring up the Color dialog box.

Figure A-3. Pre-Release-2007 Color Settings Mapped in Current


DxDesigner.xml

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Display
Settings Dialog Box - Objects
Settings Dialog Box - Font Styles

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 465


Supplemental Information
LineSimLink - Passives Prefixes - Models Usage

LineSimLink - Passives Prefixes - Models


Usage
Passive components are exported to LineSim as a package/connector symbol. For information
about assigning models to the symbol, refer to the topic Selecting Package and Connector
Models in the LineSim User Guide.
The property SIM_MODEL_FILE is used to connect a simulation model file with the symbol in
the design capture tool. The property SIM_MODEL names the model in a simulation model
file. If these two properties are not present, LineSimLink uses the Part Name property to
identify the model file with .sp at the end of the filename.

For example, you might use the SIM_MODEL_FILE property to identify a SPICE or
Touchstone model file for a connector component.

When the models are changed in HyperLynx, importing from HyperLynx using LineSimLink,
the SIM_MODEL_FILE and SIM_MODEL properties are changed to the new value.

Related Topics
LineSimLink Dialog Box - Options Tab
Exporting to HyperLynx with LineSim Link
Importing from HyperLynx with LineSim Link

Pin (Port) Types


Scope: Symbol Editor
Pins define the electrical connection between the symbol and wiring in a schematic design.
Each pin in a symbol object must have a type definition to enable placement and wiring in a
schematic design.

Description
Pins can represent either a single electrical connection point, multiple electrical connection
points, or a bus pin. The following table defines the available pin type definitions and direction
that appear in the Symbol Editor Pins window.
Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor
Pin (Port) Type Description
IN (Input) Digital input pins.
OUT (Output) Digital output pins that are not TRI (Tristate), OEM (Open emitter), or
OCL (Open collector).

466 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Property Editing Rules

Table A-1. Pin (Port) Types Used in the Symbol Editor (cont.)
Pin (Port) Type Description
BI (Bidirectional or Digital pins that are both input and output (process input and output
Bidir) signals).
TRI (Tristate) Digital three-state output pin.
OCL (Open Open collector output pin.
collector)
OEM (Open emitter) Emitter coupled logic (ECL) output pin.
POWER Supply pin, typically used for power pins on symbols (positive and
negative rails). Apply this pin type to positive and negative tap
symbols.
GROUND Ground pin, typically used for ground pins on symbols. Apply this pin
type to ground tap symbols.
ANALOG Pin used for analog devices and for analog pins on digital devices (for
example, DAC output pins and ADC input pins).
TERMINAL Terminal pin for VHDL-AMS (Analog Mixed Signal).
Unknown symbol pin Pin that requires a pin (port) type association.
type

Property Editing Rules


You create new properties with the Property Definition Editor in xDM Library tools.
In an integrated design, for more information see Defining Properties for Use in Schematic and
Layout Designs in the xDM Library Tools Process Guide.

In a Netlist project, you can create and edit properties with the Property Definition Editor from
the Tools > Property Definition Editor menu. For more information see Property Definitions
in the Netlist Project.

When you place a symbol on your design, you can select which of the symbol properties to use,
then add or edit them.

You control property and value visibility with the following order of precedence, with 1
having the highest precedence and 3 the lowest:

1. Component level settings (when placed on the schematic)


2. Symbol level settings (assigned by the librarian)
3. Property Definition Editor level settings

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 467


Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters

For editing purposes, there are three types of properties. The rules for editing them appear in
Table A-2 on page 468.
Table A-2. Property Editing Rules
Property Type Example Editing Actions Allowed
Symbol Property Partition Change Values
Added by the librarian to the symbol
Component Property Description Change values
Added by the user to the placed Delete
component
System Property Id None
Added by the tool

Related Topics
Properties Window

Verilog HDL Parameters


In order to make lower-level blocks reusable, parameters are often used within them (for
example, as length and width values for a MOSFET). By passing named parameters to a lower-
level block and assigning them different values for each instance, the resulting properties of the
lower-level block can be changed without changing its definition.
The Verilog Netlister supports parameter passing by attaching a Parameter Value text property
to a lower-level block instance (that is, a block symbol or symbol with a Block Name text
property in the schematic). Any parameters defined in the Parameter value are passed to the
lower-level block and visible to all components in the lower-level block. The text of the
Parameter value might look like this:

MY_L=10
MY_W=20

If you specify more than one parameter on the same line, enclose each parameter in quotes. For
example:

"MY_L=10","MY_W=20"

468 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters

For SPICE, numbers can be suffixed with one of the following letters, using upper-case or
lower-case, to provide magnitude scaling:

f - 1E-15
p - 1E-12
n - 1E-9
u - 1E-6
mil - 25.4E-6
m - 1E-3
k - 1E+3
meg - 1E+6
g - 1E+9
t - 1E+12

More complex expressions can be defined for parameters, including simple mathematical
operators (+,-,*,/) parenthetic grouping, and references to other parameters. For example, the
following is a valid parameter definition:

MY_PARM=(10.5p+@MY_OTHER_PARM)*2

References to other parameters must include a @ prefix before the parameter name. Note that
parameters can be passed down multiple levels of hierarchy by explicitly including a reference
to the upper-level parameter in a Parameter Value text property attached to an instance of a
lower-level circuit. For example:

MY_PARM_2=@MY_PARM

In this case, @MY_PARM refers to the parameter passed in to the circuit containing an instance
of the lower-level circuit, and MY_PARM_2 defines a new parameter for the lower-level circuit
using the value of MY_PARM passed from above. If desired, the same name can be used for
both.

When defining parameters, additional white space can be inserted into the expression to
improve readability. Parameter names are case-insensitive.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 469


Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Objects

Verilog HDL Objects


Verilog HDL parameters are valid for component instances and nets, and are defined by
attaching Parameter Value text properties to symbol instances and nets. When attached to a
symbol instance which represents either a block defined in the design or a model defined
outside the design (for example, in a library), the HDL parameters will act as user-defined
name/value pairs which are passed to the block definition or library model.
When HDL parameters are attached to a symbol which represents a primitive device or to a net,
the parameters are interpreted as physical properties of the device or net. The Verilog HDL
Parameters Used as Physical Properties on page 472 topic discusses this special case in more
detail.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined


Name/Value Pairs
The following figure illustrates a simple use of HDL parameters as user-defined name/value
pairs and the corresponding results in the netlist.

470 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs

Figure A-4. Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs

The schematic in Figure A-4 contains a single instance of a block named lower and has a
Parameter Value text property attached which defines three parameters: RISE, FALL, and OFF.
Assume that the pins of the instance are connected to nets of the same names as the pins. When
this instance is netlisted, the following results:

SPICE:
Xlower1 In1 In2 Out1 Out2 lower RISE=5 FALL=6 OFF=7
Verilog:
lower lower1 (.In1(In1), .In2(In2), .Out1(Out1), .Out2(Out2));
defparam lower1.RISE=5;
defparam lower1.FALL=6;
defparam lower1.OFF=7;

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties
Using Parameters in Verilog

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 471


Supplemental Information
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties

Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical


Properties
The following figure illustrates a simple use of Verilog HDL parameters for defining physical
properties and the corresponding results in the netlist.
Figure A-5. Verilog HDL Parameters for Defining Physical Properties

The schematic shown in Figure A-5 is the block definition for the lower block instance used in
the previous figure. It contains two Verilog primitive gates, a buffer 'buf' and an inverter 'not.'
The buffer 'buf' has a Parameter value which specifies a propagation delay for the gate. The
inverter 'not' has a Parameter value which specifies the drive strength for the gate. Finally, the
wire connected to port Out2 has a Parameter value which specifies rising, falling, and turn-off
propagation delay for the wire.

The following results would be obtained from the Verilog netlister for this schematic block:

module lower (In1, In2, Out1, Out2);


input In1, In2;
output Out1, Out2;
parameter RISE=0;
parameter FALL=0;
parameter OFF=0;
wire In1, In2, Out1;
wire #(RISE, FALL, OFF) Out2;
buf #(5) (Out1, In1);
not (strong1, strong0) (Out2, In2);
endmodule

472 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Using Parameters in Verilog

Note
Parameters used in a schematic block will be defined in the corresponding Verilog module
with a default value of zero. In order to prevent potential simulation errors, always override
the default values with specific values attached to each instance of the schematic block.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Using Parameters in Verilog

Using Parameters in Verilog


The following table defines the keywords recognized in Verilog, on which objects they can be
used, and what values the keyword can assume.

Table A-3. Verilog-Recognized Keywords


Keyword Objects Supported Values
DELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
RISEDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
FALLDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
OFFDELAY= ComponentsWires single delay value or min:typ:max
DECAY= Wires (trireg only) single delay value
STRENGTH= Components small medium large
STRENGTH1= Components supply1 strong1 pull1 weak1 highz1
STRENGTH0= Components supply0 strong0 pull0 weak0 highz0
WIRETYPE Wires trireg

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - Verilog
Verilog HDL Parameters
Verilog HDL Objects
Verilog HDL Parameters as User-Defined Name/Value Pairs
Verilog HDL Parameters Used as Physical Properties

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 473


Supplemental Information
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed

How the VHDL Netlist is Processed


All settings, such as mapping of names, external packages, etc. are stored in a hdlutils.ini file
that is created in the project directory during creation of the VHDL netlist.
Processing begins at the lowest-level block and proceeds to the highest-level block. Each block
is written as an entity, with a port map that lists all of its external pins.

The architecture is then written, declaring signals that are only visible within the block, any
needed temporary signals, and any needed component declarations. Then a component
instantiation is written for each instance of each component using the port mapping from the
component pin name to the block net name.

Temporary signals are sometimes necessary because VHDL does not allow the direct
connection of certain pin types to other pin types. The temporary signals provide a layer of
indirection that satisfies the VHDL semantics.

VHDL requires that the Hier Pin Name of a hierarchical bidirectional pin match the Net Name
of the net connected to the pin.

A project file that contains the location of the Remote Server Configuration Manager and
needed configuration files is required.

Related Topics
Settings Dialog Box - VHDL
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

Example VHDL Netlist Output File


The following is an example output file.

474 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

-- File : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\genhdl\sbk\sample.vhd
-- CDB : E:\scott\1405test\vhdltest1\sample.cdb
-- By : CDB2VHDL Netlister version 15.0.0.0
-- Time : Mon January 27 11 14:46:27 2014
-- Entity/architecture declarations
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity bottom is
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end bottom;
architecture bottom of bottom is
-- Component declarations
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= Y after 0 ns;
-- Component instances
XCMP1 : INV
port map(
A => X,
O => P1
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1,
O => P2
);
XCMP6 : INV
port map(
A => Z,
O => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
end bottom;
use work.all;
library IEEE;
use IEEE.std_logic_1164.all;
entity top is
port(
A : in std_ulogic;
B : in std_ulogic;
C : in std_ulogic;
D : in std_ulogic;
ZZZ : out std_ulogic
);

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 475


Supplemental Information
Example VHDL Netlist Output File

end top;
architecture top of top is
-- Component declarations
component bottom
port(
P1 : out BIT;
P2 : out BIT;
X : in BIT;
Y : in BIT;
Z : in BIT
);
end component;
component TRISTA
port(
O : out BIT;
E : in BIT;
A : in BIT
);
end component;
component AND3
port(
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT;
C : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component INV
port(
A : in BIT;
O : out BIT
);
end component;
component AND2
port(
O : out BIT;
A : in BIT;
B : in BIT
);
end component;
-- Signal declarations
signal AAA : std_ulogic;
signal ABC : BIT;
signal cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 : BIT;
signal XSIG010010 : BIT;
signal XSIG010013 : BIT;
signal XSIG010017 : BIT;
signal XYZ0 : BIT;
begin
-- Signal assignments
AAA <= A after 0 ns;
cdb2vhdl_tmp_1 <= '0';
-- Component instances
lower : bottom
port map(
P1 => ABC,
P2 => XSIG010010,
X => XYZ0,

476 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
The QCV Netlist Output Format

Y => XSIG010013,
Z => cdb2vhdl_tmp_1
);
XCMP4 : TRISTA
port map(
To_stdulogic(O) => ZZZ,
E => XSIG010013,
A => XSIG010017
);
XCMP2 : AND3
port map(
A => ABC,
B => XSIG010010,
C => To_bit(D),
O => XSIG010017
);
XCMP3 : INV
port map(
A => To_bit(C),
O => XSIG010013
);
XYZ0_1 : AND2
port map(
O => XYZ0,
A => To_bit(AAA),
B => To_bit(B)
);
end top;

Related Topics
VHDL Netlister Dialog Box
How the VHDL Netlist is Processed

The QCV Netlist Output Format


The Quick Connection View (QCV) netlist is divided into fields that are separated with a
separator (a space in these examples) as follows:
FIELD1[separator]FIELD2[separator]FIELD3[separator]FIELD4[separator]

Also see Figure A-6.

FIELD1 - Is a keyword to identify the type of net as either:

NET
PIN
FIELD2 - Is the colon character (:)

FIELD3 - Shows the hierarchical net name in between single quotes

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 477


Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

FIELD4 - Shows the net connections to all pins

Figure A-6. Quick Connection View Netlist Example 1

Related Topics
Connectivity Checks With a Quick Connection View Netlist

Search Query Syntax


In addition to plain text, you can use operator and wildcard characters to search the design or
database in the Edit > Find and Replace > Search window to narrow the list of found parts.
In the search field at the top of the window, you can use any of the characters shown in the
following table to narrow the search for parts.

The following list describes some search considerations:

Regarding wildcards (* or ?):


o They can be used in stand-alone values such as CAP* and 10*k.
o They can be used with the Like (=) operator.

478 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

o They do not work with the Equal (==) operator.


Searches are case-insensitive.
In the case of a search that uses a property name on the left-side of an operator such as
<property> <operator> <text>, you do not need to double quote a property name
string that contains spaces.
You must enclose the following special characters in double-quotes if you want to
search for a text string that contains any of them:
&=></@
Some examples of text strings that require double-quotes are:
Search for Enter
strings with spaces strings with spaces
words with quotes words with quotes
logic@chip logic@chip

The - (not) character is only considered a special character if it is used as the first
character of a text string.

Table A-4. Search Query Syntax Examples


Search String Examples Result of Search
<text> CAP Displays all lines containing CAP.
?<text> ?n In the first example, using the any single
<text>? character wildcard (?), displays lines
containing in, on, Pn, and so on.
<text>* CAP* Using the zero or more characters wildcard
*<text> (*), displays lines containing CAP,
CAPACITOR, CAPACITY, and so on.
<text1> & <text2> CAP&10uF Using the AND (&) operator, displays lines
<text1>&<text2> CAP 10uF containing both CAP and 10uF. Because the &
<text1> <text2> operator is implied between multiple strings,
you do not need to use it, as shown in the
second example.
<property>==<text> Value==1 Using the Equal (==) operator, displays lines
with the Value property equal to 1.

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 479


Supplemental Information
Search Query Syntax

Table A-4. Search Query Syntax Examples (cont.)


Search String Examples Result of Search
<property><compar Cost > .1 Using one of the comparison operators,
_operator><text> Cost >= .1 displays lines that satisfy the mathematical
operation. These comparisons also work on
Cost < .1 strings, not just numbers.
Cost <= .1
Cost <>.1
<property>=<text> Value=1 Using the Like (=) operator, displays lines with
the Value property containing 1, such as 10, 1,
1ohm.
<text> Part Label Using quotes ( ) to treat the text as a string of
characters, displays lines that contain the string
Part Label. Use quotes to escape special
characters used within a string such as 1/2, or
start->stop.
@<database_type> @Parametric Data Using the Scope (@) operator, the first
or @Parts.Capacitor example displays all lines within the
Parametric Data database type.
@<database_type>. @Capacitor
<partition> The second example displays all lines within
the Parts database type, in the Capacitor library
or partition.
@<partition> Assuming that the third example has a
Capacitor partition in more than one database
type, the search displays all lines from all
databases types containing the Capacitor
partition.
Note: The following conditions apply to
using the Scope operator:
When a search does not include the
Scope operator, the search uses the
scope from the Property Chooser
window.
When you use the Scope operator, the
search ignores the Property Chooser
window scope settings.
<property> / Value /Symbol =1 Using the Level character (/), displays lines
<property_level> that have a Value property value equal to 1 on
=<value> the Symbol property level.

480 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches

Table A-4. Search Query Syntax Examples (cont.)


Search String Examples Result of Search
-<text> -CAP Using the NOT (-) operator, the first example
or -@Parametric Data displays all lines except those containing CAP.
-@<database_type> The second example displays all lines except
those in the Parametric Data database type.

Related Topics
Databook Tool Overview
Searching for Objects in a Design or Components in a Database Library

Regular Expression Syntax in Text Searches


Scope: PADS DX Designer
Property and label syntax preferences use the following regular expression syntax:
A regular expression is zero or more branches, separated by |. It matches anything that
matches one of the branches.
A branch is zero or more pieces, concatenated. It matches a match for the first, followed
by a match for the second, until it reaches the end of a branch.
A piece is an atom possibly followed by *, +, or ?. An atom followed by * matches a
sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by + matches a sequence
of 1 or more matches of the atom. An atom followed by ? matches a match of the atom,
or the null string.
An atom is a regular expression in parentheses (matching a match for the regular
expression), a range, . (matching any single character), ^ (matching the null string at the
beginning of the input string), $ (matching the null string at the end of the input string),
a \ followed by a single character (matching that character), or a single character with no
other significance (matching that character).
A range is a sequence of characters enclosed in []. It normally matches any single
character from the sequence. If the sequence begins with ^, it matches any single
character not from the rest of the sequence. If two characters in the sequence are
separated by -, this is shorthand for the full list of ASCII characters between them (e.g.
[0-9] matches any decimal digit). To include a literal ] in the sequence, make it the first
character (following a possible ^). To include a literal -, make it the first or last
character.
Related Topics
Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 481


Supplemental Information
Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search


Conditions
Scope: PADS DX Designer
You can add numeric operators to your Databook database library search conditions.

Table A-5. Numeric Comparison Operators


Operator Function Example
= Represents values equal to the specified The = 20 operator returns a list
numeric value. of components for which the
numeric value of the specified
property equals 20.
> Represents values greater than the The > 20 operator matches all
specified numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property greater than 20.
< Represents values less than the specified The < 1.25 operator matches all
numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property less than 1.25.
>= Represents values greater than or equal to The >= 32 operator matches all
the specified numeric value. numeric values of the specified
property greater than or equal to
32.
<= Represents values less than or equal to the The <= 0.05 operator matches
specified numeric value. all numeric values of the
specified property less than or
equal to 0.05.
!= Represents values not equal to the The != 34 operator matches all
specified value. numeric values of the specified
property except those that equal
34.

Related Topics
Databook Tool Window
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

482 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search


Conditions
Scope: PADS DX Designer
The Databook tool supports using wildcards in your database library search conditions. By
default, the Databook tool uses the standard SQL percent (%) wildcard to match multiple string
characters and underscore (_) wildcard to match an individual character.
Note
To search for components using wildcards, the database is required to contain string data
and the like operator must be used.

The following wildcard characters are supported:

Percent sign (%) which represents any of zero or more (multiple) characters.
For example:
o string% Matches any value beginning with string.
o %string Matches any value ending with string.
Underscore (_) which represents any individual character.
For example:
o string_ Matches string followed by one character.
o _string Matches any two characters followed by string.
Use the question mark (?) wildcard symbol to match a single character and the asterisk (*)
wildcard symbol to match multiple characters in your database library search.

Note
xDX Databook does not support question mark (?) and asterisk (*) wildcard symbols when
connected to xDM Library Tools through xDM Connector.

For example, using RESISTO? as a search string only yields RESISTOR whereas RESISTO*
yields a list of all parts in the database that include the RESISTO string (such as RESISTOR and
RESISTOR123).

Related Topics
Databook Tool Window
Databook Tool - CL View Pane
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box
Databook Tool - Configure Dialog Box - Properties Tab

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 483


Supplemental Information
Wildcard Characters for Databook Tool Search Conditions

Numeric Operators for Databook Tool Search Conditions

484 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Index

bpaste, 408
Index

A bsize, 408
Advanced settings, 375 bus, 408
B cattribute, 409
Bus cb, 409
names, 432 ccomp, 409
Bus bundles chgattr, 409
bus contents file, 27 chglabel, 409
busconts.ini file, 27 chgtext, 409
cinst, 409
C circle, 409
CCZ Exporter, 185 color, 409
Characters component, 409
illegal in name identifiers, 429 copy, 409
Command line comman ds csize, 410
system, 421 ctoff, 410
Command line commands cton, 410
adistance, 406 cuapply, 410
ainvis, 406 cucheck, 410
align, 406 cycle, 410
ansize, 406 db, 410
anvis, 406 dbevoff, 410
aoff, 406 dbevon, 410
aon, 406 defsh1off, 411
arc, 406 defsh1on, 411
aroute, 407 defshcfg, 411
array, 407 defshfix, 411
arrowsoff, 407 defshoff, 410
arrowson, 407 defshon, 410
asize, 407 delete, 411
avis, 407 directory, 411
avvis, 407 dirsym, 411
bb, 407 doff, 411
bcast, 408 don, 411
bcomposite, 408 dsize, 412
bcopy, 408 egoff, 412
bcut, 408 egon, 412
boff, 408 esize, 412
bon, 408 exit, 412
box, 408 fcloseall, 412

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 485


form, 412 refresh, 418
full, 412 roff, 418
goff, 412 ron, 418
gon, 413 rotate, 418
grid, 413 run, 418
ground, 413 scale, 419
gspace, 413 schematic, 419
ib, 413 scomp, 419
in, 413 sdistance, 419
io, 413 setenv, 419
label, 413 sicdb, 419
line, 413 size, 419
linvis, 414 slabel, 419
loff, 414 slot, 419
logmemory, 414 sname, 419
lon, 414 snap, 420
longstrings, 414 soff, 420
lsense, 414 son, 420
lvis, 414 sroute, 420
move, 414 stext, 420
name, 415 stretch, 420
narray, 415 string, 420
naspace, 415 stub, 420
net, 415 svalue, 420
noff, 415 text, 421
non, 415 toff, 421
nsym, 415 ton, 421
o1 through o9, 416 ubat, 421
odetail, 416 undo, 421
offsheet, 416 uoff, 421
onsheet, 416 uon, 421
oroute, 416 value, 421
out, 416 voff, 421
pdbslot, 416 von, 422
placedetail, 416 wclose, 422
poff, 416 zoom, 422
pon, 416 zselect, 422
pop, 417 zsize, 422
power, 417 Configuration and initialization file summary,
psch, 417 15
psheet, 417 contents.bc, bus contents file, 27
psym, 417 example, 28
quit, 418 Cross Probing settings, 361
read, 418
reflect, 418 D
Dialog Boxes

486 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Add Block, 174 Font Mappings settings, 358
Add Properties, 179 Objects settings, 356
Apply Symbol Updates to Components, Display characteristics, 356
410 DRC
Archiver Wizard, 215 vdrc command line, 405
Change Attribute, 409 DxDe signer.xml ICTOBJECTS
Change Border, 409 ICTEDITCELL elements, 59
Change Bounding Box, 407 DxDesigner.x ml ICTOBJECTS
Change Label, 409 ICTGROUP elements, 59
Change Text, 409 DxDesigner.xml, 342, 343
Color, 466 DxDesigner.xml ICTOBJECTS
Customize (Toolbars), 189, 190, 191 ICTBLOCK elements, 59
Customize Tools Menu, 187 ICTBUS elements, 59
DRCschematic_name, 387 ICTCOMPONENT elements, 59
Find and Replace Text, 224 ICTDIFFPAIR elements, 59
Generate Symbol, 229 ICTFPGA elements, 59
Advanced Options, 230 ICTFUB elements, 59
Insert Object, 231 ICTHIGHLIGHT_LAYER elements, 59
LineSimLink ICTINVALIDCELL elements, 59
Options tab, 233 ICTNET elements, 59
Schematic Topology tab, 236 ICTNETS elements, 59
Load Properties Scheme, 344 ICTPIN elements, 59
Make Attributes Visible, 407 ICTPORT elements, 59
Merge Differences, 238 ICTSYMBOL elements, 59
New Library Symbol, 240 DxDesigner.xml LAYERS
New Project, 241 ANNOTATION_LAYER elements, 57
Open Block, 243 BACKGROUND_LAYER elements, 57
Packager, 244 BORDER_LAYER elements, 57
Part Lister, 249 CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER elements,
Advanced Tab, 252 57
Columns Tab, 257 DRAG_LAYER elements, 57
General Tab, 250 GRID_LAYER elements, 57
Header Tab, 264 HIGHLIGHT_LAYER elements, 57
Paste Special, 266 SELECTION_LAYER elements, 57, 59
Property Definition Editor, 270 UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER
Quick Connection View, 275, 278 elements, 57
Save Properties Scheme, 344 VALUE_LAYER elements, 57
Scale, 291 ZONES_LAYER elements, 57
Simulation Setup, 384 ZONING_LAYER elements, 57
Verilog Netlister, 391 DxDesigner.xml OBJECTS
VHDL Netlister, 392 ARC elements, 54
xDX PDF ATTRIBUTE elements, 54
Advanced Tab, 220 BUS elements, 54
General Tab, 217 CIRCLE elements, 54
Display COMPONENT elements, 54

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 487


FRAME elements, 54 ICTOBJECTS elements, DxDesig ner.xml
LINE elements, 54 ICTHIGHLI GHT_LAYER, 59
PIN elements, 54 ICTOBJECTS elements, DxDesigner.xml
TEXT elements, 54 ICTBLOCK, 59
WIRE elements, 54 ICTBUS, 59
DxDesigner.xml SETTINGS elements ICTDIFFPAIR, 59
DYNAMIC_PANNING, 322 ICTFPGA, 59
DxPDF ICTFUB, 59
initialization file, 160 ICTGROUP, 59
DYNAMIC_PANNING, DxDesigner.xml key ICTINVALIDCELL, 59
name, 322 ICTNET, 59
ICTNETS, 59
E ICTPIN, 59
Environment variables, 164 ICTSYMBOL, 59
Export ICTOBJECTSelements, DxDesigner.xml
CCX, 185 ICTEDITCELL, 59
F Info Tip box, Navigator, 352
File Viewer, 11 Interconnectivity Table settings, 341

G K
Grid settings, 320 Key bindings
Grid, snap to, 321 PADS, 445
PC, 433, 437
H
HDL Simulation settings, 368 L
HPGL_HEIGHT_SCALE variable Label
overview, 164 objects not labeled, 430
HPGL_WIDTH_SCALE variable LAYERS element s, DxDesigner.xml
overview, 164 ZONING_LAYER, 57
LAYERS elements, DxDesigner.xml
I ANNOTATION_LAYER, 57
ICE_CELLS SHOW_NETS, DxDesigner.xml BACKGROUND_LAYER, 57
key name, 342 BORDER_LAYER, 57
ICE_CELLS SHOW_WIDTH, CROSS_REFERENCE_LAYER, 57
DxDesigner.xml key name, 342 DRAG_LAYER, 57
ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_SHOW_GLO GRID_LAYER, 57
BAL_NETS, DxDesigner.xml key HIGHLIGHT_LAYER, 57
name, 343 SELECTION_LAYER, 57, 59
ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_SHOW_NETS UNPLACEDCOMPONENT_LAYER, 57
, DxDesigner.xml key name, 342 VALUE_LAYER, 57
ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_SHOW_WIDT ZONES_LAYER, 57
H, DxDesigner.xml key name, 342 LineSimLink - Merge Differences, 238
ICTOBJE CTS elements, DxDesigner.xml LM_LICENSE_FILE variable
ICTPORT, 59 overview, 164
ICTOBJECTS elements, D xDesigner.xml
ICTCOMPONENT, 59

488 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


M format, 424
Merge Differences dialog, 238 multiple and duplicate, 425
MGC_EPD_INVISIBLE_ ADDIN_LIST multiple values, 426
variable name and value restrictions, 424
overview, 165 netlist interpretation, 425
MGLS_LICENSE_FILE variable ranges, 426
overview, 164 used by Design Rule Checker, 45
user-defined, 425
N
Name R
adding and editing, introduction, 429 Ranges
bus, 432 properties, 426
compound, 431 Regular expression syntax, 453, 481
illegal characters in, 429 Run on Startup settings, 371
pin, 432
ranges, 430 S
sch2pdf, pdf generation command, 403
unique, 431
Navigator Info Tip box, 352 Settings dialog
Advanced, 375
Nets settings, schematics, 328
Cross Probing, 361
New Sheets settings, 324
Display, 354
O Font Mappings, 358
Objects Objects, 356
unlabeled, 430 HDL Simulation, 368
OBJECTS elements, DxDesigner.xml Interconnectivity Table, 341
ARC, 54 Run on Startup, 371
ATTRIBUTE, 54 Schematic Editor
BUS, 54 Grid, 320
CIRCLE, 54 Nets, 328
COMPONENT, 54 New Sheets, 324
FRAME, 54 Strokes, Pan and Zoom, 322
LINE, 54 Text, 327
PIN, 54 Units, 320
TEXT, 54 xDX Designer Diagnostics, 360
WIRE, 54 SETTINGS elements, DxDesigner.xml
DYNAMIC_PANNING, 322
P ICE_CELLS_SHOW_NETS, 342
Part Lister ICE_CELLS_SHOW_WIDTH, 342
icdbpartslister.exe usage, 396 ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_GLOBAL_
initialization file, 142 NETS, 343
PATH variable ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_SHOW_N
overview, 165 ETS, 342
Pin ICE_PINSDROPDOWNLIST_SHOW_W
names, 432 IDTH, 342
Property Shell commands
characteristics, 423 AllegroNetlist, 393

PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1 489


DxArchiver, 393
edifExporter, 393
icdbpartslister, 394
KeyinNetlist, 394
package, 394
QuickConnectionView, 394
RinfNetlist, 394
sch2pdf, 394
Strokes, Pan and Zoom settings, 322
Syntax
regular expression, 453
T
Text settings, 327
U
Units settings, 320
V
vdrc, Design Rule Checker command, 405
ViewDRC
ambiguity, 454
regular expression syntax, 453
Visibility
options, 423
W
WDIR variable
overview, 165
Windows
File Viewer, 11
X
xDX Designer
display characteristics, 356
xDX Designer Diagnostics settings, 360

490 PADS Schematic Design Reference Manual, PADS VX.2.1


Third-Party Information
Open source and third-party software may be included in the Systems Design products.

For third-party information, refer to the Third-Party Software document.


End-User License Agreement
The latest version of the End-User License Agreement is available on-line at:
www.mentor.com/eula

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

USE OF ALL SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO LICENSE RESTRICTIONS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE PRODUCTS. USE OF SOFTWARE INDICATES CUSTOMERS COMPLETE
AND UNCONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT.
ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT PURCHASE ORDER TERMS AND CONDITIONS SHALL NOT APPLY.

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (Agreement)

This is a legal agreement concerning the use of Software (as defined in Section 2) and hardware (collectively Products)
between the company acquiring the Products (Customer), and the Mentor Graphics entity that issued the corresponding
quotation or, if no quotation was issued, the applicable local Mentor Graphics entity (Mentor Graphics). Except for license
agreements related to the subject matter of this license agreement which are physically signed by Customer and an authorized
representative of Mentor Graphics, this Agreement and the applicable quotation contain the parties entire understanding
relating to the subject matter and supersede all prior or contemporaneous agreements. If Customer does not agree to these
terms and conditions, promptly return or, in the case of Software received electronically, certify destruction of Software and all
accompanying items within five days after receipt of Software and receive a full refund of any license fee paid.

1. ORDERS, FEES AND PAYMENT.

1.1. To the extent Customer (or if agreed by Mentor Graphics, Customers appointed third party buying agent) places and Mentor
Graphics accepts purchase orders pursuant to this Agreement (each an Order), each Order will constitute a contract between
Customer and Mentor Graphics, which shall be governed solely and exclusively by the terms and conditions of this Agreement,
any applicable addenda and the applicable quotation, whether or not those documents are referenced on the Order. Any
additional or conflicting terms and conditions appearing on an Order or presented in any electronic portal or automated order
management system, whether or not required to be electronically accepted, will not be effective unless agreed in writing and
physically signed by an authorized representative of Customer and Mentor Graphics.

1.2. Amounts invoiced will be paid, in the currency specified on the applicable invoice, within 30 days from the date of such invoice.
Any past due invoices will be subject to the imposition of interest charges in the amount of one and one-half percent per month
or the applicable legal rate currently in effect, whichever is lower. Prices do not include freight, insurance, customs duties, taxes
or other similar charges, which Mentor Graphics will state separately in the applicable invoice. Unless timely provided with a
valid certificate of exemption or other evidence that items are not taxable, Mentor Graphics will invoice Customer for all
applicable taxes including, but not limited to, VAT, GST, sales tax, consumption tax and service tax. Customer will make all
payments free and clear of, and without reduction for, any withholding or other taxes; any such taxes imposed on payments by
Customer hereunder will be Customers sole responsibility. If Customer appoints a third party to place purchase orders and/or
make payments on Customers behalf, Customer shall be liable for payment under Orders placed by such third party in the event
of default.

1.3. All Products are delivered FCA factory (Incoterms 2010), freight prepaid and invoiced to Customer, except Software delivered
electronically, which shall be deemed delivered when made available to Customer for download. Mentor Graphics retains a
security interest in all Products delivered under this Agreement, to secure payment of the purchase price of such Products, and
Customer agrees to sign any documents that Mentor Graphics determines to be necessary or convenient for use in filing or
perfecting such security interest. Mentor Graphics delivery of Software by electronic means is subject to Customers provision
of both a primary and an alternate e-mail address.

2. GRANT OF LICENSE. The software installed, downloaded, or otherwise acquired by Customer under this Agreement, including any
updates, modifications, revisions, copies, documentation, setup files and design data (Software) are copyrighted, trade secret and
confidential information of Mentor Graphics or its licensors, who maintain exclusive title to all Software and retain all rights not
expressly granted by this Agreement. Except for Software that is embeddable (Embedded Software), which is licensed pursuant to
separate embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer, subject to payment of
applicable license fees, a nontransferable, nonexclusive license to use Software solely: (a) in machine-readable, object-code form
(except as provided in Subsection 4.2); (b) for Customers internal business purposes; (c) for the term of the license; and (d) on the
computer hardware and at the site authorized by Mentor Graphics. A site is restricted to a one-half mile (800 meter) radius. Customer
may have Software temporarily used by an employee for telecommuting purposes from locations other than a Customer office, such as
the employees residence, an airport or hotel, provided that such employees primary place of employment is the site where the
Software is authorized for use. Mentor Graphics standard policies and programs, which vary depending on Software, license fees paid
or services purchased, apply to the following: (a) relocation of Software; (b) use of Software, which may be limited, for example, to
execution of a single session by a single user on the authorized hardware or for a restricted period of time (such limitations may be
technically implemented through the use of authorization codes or similar devices); and (c) support services provided, including
eligibility to receive telephone support, updates, modifications, and revisions. For the avoidance of doubt, if Customer provides any
feedback or requests any change or enhancement to Products, whether in the course of receiving support or consulting services,
evaluating Products, performing beta testing or otherwise, any inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments made
by Mentor Graphics (at Mentor Graphics sole discretion) will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics.
3. BETA CODE.

3.1. Portions or all of certain Software may contain code for experimental testing and evaluation (which may be either alpha or beta,
collectively Beta Code), which may not be used without Mentor Graphics explicit authorization. Upon Mentor Graphics
authorization, Mentor Graphics grants to Customer a temporary, nontransferable, nonexclusive license for experimental use to
test and evaluate the Beta Code without charge for a limited period of time specified by Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics may
choose, at its sole discretion, not to release Beta Code commercially in any form.

3.2. If Mentor Graphics authorizes Customer to use the Beta Code, Customer agrees to evaluate and test the Beta Code under normal
conditions as directed by Mentor Graphics. Customer will contact Mentor Graphics periodically during Customers use of the
Beta Code to discuss any malfunctions or suggested improvements. Upon completion of Customers evaluation and testing,
Customer will send to Mentor Graphics a written evaluation of the Beta Code, including its strengths, weaknesses and
recommended improvements.

3.3. Customer agrees to maintain Beta Code in confidence and shall restrict access to the Beta Code, including the methods and
concepts utilized therein, solely to those employees and Customer location(s) authorized by Mentor Graphics to perform beta
testing. Customer agrees that any written evaluations and all inventions, product improvements, modifications or developments
that Mentor Graphics conceived or made during or subsequent to this Agreement, including those based partly or wholly on
Customers feedback, will be the exclusive property of Mentor Graphics. Mentor Graphics will have exclusive rights, title and
interest in all such property. The provisions of this Subsection 3.3 shall survive termination of this Agreement.

4. RESTRICTIONS ON USE.

4.1. Customer may copy Software only as reasonably necessary to support the authorized use. Each copy must include all notices
and legends embedded in Software and affixed to its medium and container as received from Mentor Graphics. All copies shall
remain the property of Mentor Graphics or its licensors. Except for Embedded Software that has been embedded in executable
code form in Customers product(s), Customer shall maintain a record of the number and primary location of all copies of
Software, including copies merged with other software, and shall make those records available to Mentor Graphics upon
request. Customer shall not make Products available in any form to any person other than Customers employees and on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, whose job performance requires access and who are under obligations of
confidentiality. Customer shall take appropriate action to protect the confidentiality of Products and ensure that any person
permitted access does not disclose or use Products except as permitted by this Agreement. Customer shall give Mentor Graphics
written notice of any unauthorized disclosure or use of the Products as soon as Customer becomes aware of such unauthorized
disclosure or use. Customer acknowledges that Software provided hereunder may contain source code which is proprietary and
its confidentiality is of the highest importance and value to Mentor Graphics. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics
may be seriously harmed if such source code is disclosed in violation of this Agreement. Except as otherwise permitted for
purposes of interoperability as specified by applicable and mandatory local law, Customer shall not reverse-assemble,
disassemble, reverse-compile, or reverse-engineer any Product, or in any way derive any source code from Software that is not
provided to Customer in source code form. Log files, data files, rule files and script files generated by or for the Software
(collectively Files), including without limitation files containing Standard Verification Rule Format (SVRF) and Tcl
Verification Format (TVF) which are Mentor Graphics trade secret and proprietary syntaxes for expressing process rules,
constitute or include confidential information of Mentor Graphics. Customer may share Files with third parties, excluding
Mentor Graphics competitors, provided that the confidentiality of such Files is protected by written agreement at least as well as
Customer protects other information of a similar nature or importance, but in any case with at least reasonable care. Customer
may use Files containing SVRF or TVF only with Mentor Graphics products. Under no circumstances shall Customer use
Products or Files or allow their use for the purpose of developing, enhancing or marketing any product that is in any way
competitive with Products, or disclose to any third party the results of, or information pertaining to, any benchmark.

4.2. If any Software or portions thereof are provided in source code form, Customer will use the source code only to correct software
errors and enhance or modify the Software for the authorized use, or as permitted for Embedded Software under separate
embedded software terms or an embedded software supplement. Customer shall not disclose or permit disclosure of source
code, in whole or in part, including any of its methods or concepts, to anyone except Customers employees or on-site
contractors, excluding Mentor Graphics competitors, with a need to know. Customer shall not copy or compile source code in
any manner except to support this authorized use.

4.3. Customer agrees that it will not subject any Product to any open source software (OSS) license that conflicts with this
Agreement or that does not otherwise apply to such Product.

4.4. Customer may not assign this Agreement or the rights and duties under it, or relocate, sublicense, or otherwise transfer the
Products, whether by operation of law or otherwise (Attempted Transfer), without Mentor Graphics prior written consent and
payment of Mentor Graphics then-current applicable relocation and/or transfer fees. Any Attempted Transfer without Mentor
Graphics prior written consent shall be a material breach of this Agreement and may, at Mentor Graphics option, result in the
immediate termination of the Agreement and/or the licenses granted under this Agreement. The terms of this Agreement,
including without limitation the licensing and assignment provisions, shall be binding upon Customers permitted successors in
interest and assigns.

4.5. The provisions of this Section 4 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

5. SUPPORT SERVICES. To the extent Customer purchases support services, Mentor Graphics will provide Customer with updates and
technical support for the Products, at the Customer site(s) for which support is purchased, in accordance with Mentor Graphics then
current End-User Support Terms located at http://supportnet.mentor.com/supportterms.

6. OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. Products may contain OSS or code distributed under a proprietary third party license agreement, to
which additional rights or obligations (Third Party Terms) may apply. Please see the applicable Product documentation (including
license files, header files, read-me files or source code) for details. In the event of conflict between the terms of this Agreement
(including any addenda) and the Third Party Terms, the Third Party Terms will control solely with respect to the OSS or third party
code. The provisions of this Section 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

7. LIMITED WARRANTY.

7.1. Mentor Graphics warrants that during the warranty period its standard, generally supported Products, when properly installed,
will substantially conform to the functional specifications set forth in the applicable user manual. Mentor Graphics does not
warrant that Products will meet Customers requirements or that operation of Products will be uninterrupted or error free. The
warranty period is 90 days starting on the 15th day after delivery or upon installation, whichever first occurs. Customer must
notify Mentor Graphics in writing of any nonconformity within the warranty period. For the avoidance of doubt, this warranty
applies only to the initial shipment of Software under an Order and does not renew or reset, for example, with the delivery of (a)
Software updates or (b) authorization codes or alternate Software under a transaction involving Software re-mix. This warranty
shall not be valid if Products have been subject to misuse, unauthorized modification, improper installation or Customer is not in
compliance with this Agreement. MENTOR GRAPHICS ENTIRE LIABILITY AND CUSTOMERS EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL BE, AT MENTOR GRAPHICS OPTION, EITHER (A) REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID UPON
RETURN OF THE PRODUCTS TO MENTOR GRAPHICS OR (B) MODIFICATION OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
PRODUCTS THAT DO NOT MEET THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. MENTOR GRAPHICS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO: (A) SERVICES; (B) PRODUCTS PROVIDED AT NO CHARGE; OR (C) BETA CODE; ALL OF
WHICH ARE PROVIDED AS IS.

7.2. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 7 ARE EXCLUSIVE. NEITHER MENTOR GRAPHICS NOR ITS
LICENSORS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, WITH RESPECT TO
PRODUCTS PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIM ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY.

8. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL
MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS) WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY, EVEN IF MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MENTOR GRAPHICS OR ITS LICENSORS LIABILITY UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNT RECEIVED FROM CUSTOMER FOR THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE LICENSE OR
SERVICE GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. IN THE CASE WHERE NO AMOUNT WAS PAID, MENTOR GRAPHICS AND ITS
LICENSORS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER. THE PROVISIONS OF THIS SECTION 8
SHALL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

9. THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.

9.1. Customer acknowledges that Mentor Graphics has no control over the testing of Customers products, or the specific
applications and use of Products. Mentor Graphics and its licensors shall not be liable for any claim or demand made against
Customer by any third party, except to the extent such claim is covered under Section 10.

9.2. In the event that a third party makes a claim against Mentor Graphics arising out of the use of Customers products, Mentor
Graphics will give Customer prompt notice of such claim. At Customers option and expense, Customer may take sole control
of the defense and any settlement of such claim. Customer WILL reimburse and hold harmless Mentor Graphics for any
LIABILITY, damages, settlement amounts, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred by or awarded
against Mentor Graphics or its licensors in connection with such claims.

9.3. The provisions of this Section 9 shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement.

10. INFRINGEMENT.

10.1. Mentor Graphics will defend or settle, at its option and expense, any action brought against Customer in the United States,
Canada, Japan, or member state of the European Union which alleges that any standard, generally supported Product acquired
by Customer hereunder infringes a patent or copyright or misappropriates a trade secret in such jurisdiction. Mentor Graphics
will pay costs and damages finally awarded against Customer that are attributable to such action. Customer understands and
agrees that as conditions to Mentor Graphics obligations under this section Customer must: (a) notify Mentor Graphics
promptly in writing of the action; (b) provide Mentor Graphics all reasonable information and assistance to settle or defend the
action; and (c) grant Mentor Graphics sole authority and control of the defense or settlement of the action.

10.2. If a claim is made under Subsection 10.1 Mentor Graphics may, at its option and expense: (a) replace or modify the Product so
that it becomes noninfringing; (b) procure for Customer the right to continue using the Product; or (c) require the return of the
Product and refund to Customer any purchase price or license fee paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.

10.3. Mentor Graphics has no liability to Customer if the action is based upon: (a) the combination of Software or hardware with any
product not furnished by Mentor Graphics; (b) the modification of the Product other than by Mentor Graphics; (c) the use of
other than a current unaltered release of Software; (d) the use of the Product as part of an infringing process; (e) a product that
Customer makes, uses, or sells; (f) any Beta Code or Product provided at no charge; (g) any software provided by Mentor
Graphics licensors who do not provide such indemnification to Mentor Graphics customers; (h) OSS, except to the extent that
the infringement is directly caused by Mentor Graphics modifications to such OSS; or (i) infringement by Customer that is
deemed willful. In the case of (i), Customer shall reimburse Mentor Graphics for its reasonable attorney fees and other costs
related to the action.

10.4. THIS SECTION 10 IS SUBJECT TO SECTION 8 ABOVE AND STATES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MENTOR
GRAPHICS AND ITS LICENSORS, AND CUSTOMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY, FOR DEFENSE,
SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES, WITH RESPECT TO ANY ALLEGED PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT
OR TRADE SECRET MISAPPROPRIATION BY ANY PRODUCT PROVIDED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.

11. TERMINATION AND EFFECT OF TERMINATION.

11.1. If a Software license was provided for limited term use, such license will automatically terminate at the end of the authorized
term. Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement immediately upon
written notice if Customer: (a) exceeds the scope of the license or otherwise fails to comply with the licensing or confidentiality
provisions of this Agreement, or (b) becomes insolvent, files a bankruptcy petition, institutes proceedings for liquidation or
winding up or enters into an agreement to assign its assets for the benefit of creditors. For any other material breach of any
provision of this Agreement, Mentor Graphics may terminate this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement
upon 30 days written notice if Customer fails to cure the breach within the 30 day notice period. Termination of this Agreement
or any license granted hereunder will not affect Customers obligation to pay for Products shipped or licenses granted prior to
the termination, which amounts shall be payable immediately upon the date of termination.

11.2. Upon termination of this Agreement, the rights and obligations of the parties shall cease except as expressly set forth in this
Agreement. Upon termination of this Agreement and/or any license granted under this Agreement, Customer shall ensure that
all use of the affected Products ceases, and shall return hardware and either return to Mentor Graphics or destroy Software in
Customers possession, including all copies and documentation, and certify in writing to Mentor Graphics within ten business
days of the termination date that Customer no longer possesses any of the affected Products or copies of Software in any form.

12. EXPORT. The Products provided hereunder are subject to regulation by local laws and European Union (E.U.) and United States
(U.S.) government agencies, which prohibit export, re-export or diversion of certain products, information about the products, and
direct or indirect products thereof, to certain countries and certain persons. Customer agrees that it will not export or re-export Products
in any manner without first obtaining all necessary approval from appropriate local, E.U. and U.S. government agencies. If Customer
wishes to disclose any information to Mentor Graphics that is subject to any E.U., U.S. or other applicable export restrictions, including
without limitation the U.S. International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) or special controls under the Export Administration
Regulations (EAR), Customer will notify Mentor Graphics personnel, in advance of each instance of disclosure, that such information
is subject to such export restrictions.

13. U.S. GOVERNMENT LICENSE RIGHTS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. The parties agree that all Software is
commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to U.S. FAR 48
CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. government or a U.S.
government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, which shall supersede any
conflicting terms or conditions in any government order document, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory
federal laws.

14. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. Mentor Graphics Corporation, Mentor Graphics (Ireland) Limited, Microsoft Corporation and
other licensors may be third party beneficiaries of this Agreement with the right to enforce the obligations set forth herein.

15. REVIEW OF LICENSE USAGE. Customer will monitor the access to and use of Software. With prior written notice and during
Customers normal business hours, Mentor Graphics may engage an internationally recognized accounting firm to review Customers
software monitoring system and records deemed relevant by the internationally recognized accounting firm to confirm Customers
compliance with the terms of this Agreement or U.S. or other local export laws. Such review may include FlexNet (or successor
product) report log files that Customer shall capture and provide at Mentor Graphics request. Customer shall make records available in
electronic format and shall fully cooperate with data gathering to support the license review. Mentor Graphics shall bear the expense of
any such review unless a material non-compliance is revealed. Mentor Graphics shall treat as confidential information all information
gained as a result of any request or review and shall only use or disclose such information as required by law or to enforce its rights
under this Agreement. The provisions of this Section 15 shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

16. CONTROLLING LAW, JURISDICTION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION. The owners of certain Mentor Graphics intellectual
property licensed under this Agreement are located in Ireland and the U.S. To promote consistency around the world, disputes shall be
resolved as follows: excluding conflict of laws rules, this Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of the State of
Oregon, U.S., if Customer is located in North or South America, and the laws of Ireland if Customer is located outside of North or
South America or Japan, and the laws of Japan if Customer is located in Japan. All disputes arising out of or in relation to this
Agreement shall be submitted to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Portland, Oregon when the laws of Oregon apply, or Dublin,
Ireland when the laws of Ireland apply, or the Tokyo District Court when the laws of Japan apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, all
disputes in Asia (excluding Japan) arising out of or in relation to this Agreement shall be resolved by arbitration in Singapore before a
single arbitrator to be appointed by the chairman of the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (SIAC) to be conducted in the
English language, in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the SIAC in effect at the time of the dispute, which rules are deemed to be
incorporated by reference in this section. Nothing in this section shall restrict Mentor Graphics right to bring an action (including for
example a motion for injunctive relief) against Customer in the jurisdiction where Customers place of business is located. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods does not apply to this Agreement.

17. SEVERABILITY. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be void, invalid, unenforceable or
illegal, such provision shall be severed from this Agreement and the remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect.

18. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement contains the parties entire understanding relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior
or contemporaneous agreements. Any translation of this Agreement is provided to comply with local legal requirements only. In the
event of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the English version of this Agreement shall govern to the extent
not prohibited by local law in the applicable jurisdiction. This Agreement may only be modified in writing, signed by an authorized
representative of each party. Waiver of terms or excuse of breach must be in writing and shall not constitute subsequent consent, waiver
or excuse.

Rev. 151102, Part No. 265968

Potrebbero piacerti anche